Actions

Work Header

Rating:
Archive Warning:
Categories:
Fandom:
Relationship:
Characters:
Additional Tags:
Language:
English
Series:
Part 1 of Caught in the Whirlpools
Collections:
A Collection of Beloved Inserts, Reborn the Sage, Japanese Approved, Rain Recs, SakurAlpha's Fic Rec of Pure how did you create this you amazing bean, Fics that quench my thirst and breathe life into my soul, Lilranko Interesting Read List, OC's Through the Worlds, Burn it all down: The Revolutionist's manifesto, I Read This Instead of Sleeping, food for the soul, cauldronrings favs ( •̀ ω •́ )✧
Stats:
Published:
2020-09-14
Updated:
2021-06-15
Words:
65,209
Chapters:
22/?
Comments:
167
Kudos:
1,221
Bookmarks:
529
Hits:
28,320

Reflect the Sky (Turn the Tides)

Summary:

Uzumaki Kameko wasn’t special. But she had a duty to continue Uzushio’s legacy as their Chiharu-sama and she’ll be damned if she hurts more people than she helps.

Or

An SI OC comes too early to do damage so she preps an orphan Uzumaki to do it for her.

Chapter 1: One

Chapter Text

When she was born to two Uzumaki parents, one of them was already gone.

Her mother said, “Hiroki.”

(Her lips never moved again.)

---

When she was four and remembered everything she heard, read or saw, she was brought to a room with seven other children.

A stern, middle aged woman stood next to the Uzukage.

“Because of some information acquired,” The Uzukage began, “Uzushio is creating a new position. We will observe you for a year and one of you will earn the name Chiharu-sama and train under Yuma.”

---

When she turns five she is at the end of her abandoned dock and alone. She drifts off.

(When she wakes up on the shore with the waves nipping her toes, her hair is sky blue and her eyes are a mix of green, blue, and purple that change depending on the day.)

---

She is selected and her title is Chiharu-sama, The Lady of One Thousand Springs.

(No one called her ‘Hiroki’ anyways.)

---

She meets Yuma-shishou. She looks her in the eyes.

“You and I have a duty to Uzushio. Together we will protect it, and one day you will carry this burden alone. Are you prepared?”

She decides, for this woman, she will do whatever it takes.

“No.”

Yuma-shisou’s eyes gleam.

“That’s right. You’re not. But I’ll make sure that you are when the time comes.”

They share a smile.

(It’s the first of many.)

---

Yuma-shisou is the only one who doesn't call her Chiharu-sama. She tells her that the name isn’t truly hers yet.

“I will call you Kameko, Tortoise child, in hope that our plan succeeds.”

She isn’t entirely sure what Yuma-shisou is talking about but there’s a warm feeling in her chest.

---

By fourteen she has learned every seal from every seal master from the village best at sealing.

Yuma-shishou pats her head, “Now, you learn everything else.”

---

Kameko learns everything from Uzushio glassblowing to family recipes.

She is the embodiment of Uzushiogakure culture and knows just about everyone.

(She hasn’t taken a break in just over eleven years.)

---

Apart from an intense flexibility routine, chakra control and, before she hit her capacity, reserve expansion Yuma-shisou insisted on, Kameko does nothing ninja do.

Uzushiogakure is a Hidden Village.

When she is sixteen and a half when she begins shinobi training.

“While Uzushio is standing, you will not fight,” Yuma-shisou tells her.

---

When Kameko turns seventeen Yuma-shisou brings cake from her favorite cafe and leads her to her abandoned dock. Setting it down she turns to her with steely eyes.

“It’s time for you to know the truth about Chiharu-sama,” she says. “I was born a very long time ago,” Yuma begins.

Kameko has been able to see Yuma-shisou’s grey hair since she’s known her but she’s nowhere near ancient- not even the elders’ age. She squints.

Yuma-shisou raises an eyebrow and cracks a smile, “this body is, admittedly, only 48.”

Kameko squints harder and Yuma continues her tale.

“I was not born in the Elemental Nations, but a place called Earth to the Navajo tribe of Indigenous people. But I knew of the Elemental Nations... eventually Death claimed me. But I awoke again, born and raised through the First Shinobi War.”

Kameko’s eyes are wide but Yuma is looking over the water.

“I know the future of this world,” she whispers. “And yet, my timing can change nothing.”

She looks up and stares Kameko down, “The Second Shinobi War started when you were ten. It ends with the fall of Uzushio.”

Kameko’s heart stops.

(When the war ends, her home will be irreversibly gone.)

---

With Yuma-shisou’s reveal, they begin their days with the stars still hanging and sit together on their dock. Her shisou tells her about the future of her world. That it’s up to her on what she changes.

“But,” Kameko questions, “Aren’t I too early as well?”

Yuma-shisou smiles but there is something guarded in her eyes.

She does not answer.

---

Yuma-shisou tells her that every Uzushio shinobi will tell and show her all their tricks not recorded in scrolls and it is only due to her memory that she actually knows all the tricks a month before she turns eighteen.

Not that she has the ability to actually do more than a fourth of them.

---

Despite knowing the end was coming, not knowing when was making her anxious and tense.

On their dock, looking over the water, she confides her worries to her very wise shisou.

Yuma laughs and a bittersweet smile crosses her features.

“I once fell in love with one of about four people I knew in the whole time period,” she tells her.

Kameko gapes, because her Shisou is The Best but she can’t really imagine her in love.

Yuma looks at her face and cackles, throwing her head back.

---

It happens two months after her eighteenth birthday.

--

The Uzukage summons her and Yuma-shisou to his office with a steely look in his eyes and a hard set jaw.

Yuma nods and drags her out of the room.

She takes her to the far side of the island where eight of her other sensei’s wait.

Hand signs flash and a staircase opens.

Yuma-shisou takes her hand and they begin the descent into the unknown.

Five of her sensei’s follow.

The passage is closed behind them.

---

After walking about an hour down, they arrive to five identical doors.

Yomaku-sensei tells her, “It is only ever the second door, the rest are traps.”

She nods and they continue.

---

When they finally get to their destination and she has memorized all the traps, she stands in awe of the organized scrolls that cover half of the absolutely humongous auditorium. The other half are covered in a seal.

“Stand in the center.”

Her sensei’s each take a corner and start to prepare the seal.

Confused, Kameko looks to Yuma-shisou.

Yuma looks at her apprentice with an open expression Kameko has never seen before.

(She’s scared.)

“You have finally earned the name Chiharu-sama.”

Kameko sobs.

(She will never forget these words.)

“Today, Uzushio will fall to the combined forces of Iwa, Mizu, and Kumo. Our shinobi will fight to their last breath, our civilians will be slaughtered and raped, and everything of value outside of this bunker will be stolen,” Yuma pauses and takes a deep breath. “The only ones who know the traps in this bunker are here.”

Kameko looks at her sensei’s, hard at work to save the last bit of Uzushio together.

“And you will be the only one to leave alive.”

Kameko’s head whips around, “What.”

(It isn’t a question, but a heartbroken plea.)

“The six of us will seal our essence into you. With the additional chakra you will have enough chakra to rival a jinchuriki. There are rations there,” She points to a sealing scroll on a table by most of the scrolls. “You will stay here at least two weeks and perform the Uzumaki funeral rituals on our bodies. There is about half of Uzushio’s wealth here- we didn’t want the other Nations to think they're missing something and come looking- and you will commission Konoha anonymously for clean up of the island.”

Yuma moves to her corner of the hexagon.

Mori-sensei smiles at her, “This is called Chinami Hall, Hall of One Thousand Waves. You will never truly be alone.”

The seal glows.

Yomaku-sensei grins, “Even if your hair somehow got a little screwed up, you’ll always be an Uzumaki of Uzushio. You know what that means more than anyone.”

Kameko gives a watery smile.

Hayamenoko-sensei nods and tells her, “You are smart. You will be fine.”

The seal starts to burn.

Minami- sensei’s fingers twist awkwardly,“Ano.. If you never want kids it’s okay, but pass on the traditions please. Be the best version of yourself possible.”

Kaito-sensei winks but stays silent.

Kameko turns to Yuma-shisou.

“After you absorb our essence, it is likely that you will live to be above 700 years old unless you find yourself close to death and sacrifice one of us in return- which is completely acceptable. You will not age past twenty. Do not stop learning. Be strong. Be kind. Go where the wind takes you but know you will always be welcome in the Land of Whirlpools.”

It feels like Chiharu-sama’s eyes will never be dry again but she nods and straightens her back.

“I am prepared.”

Yuma’s lips twitch and everything goes dark.

Chapter 2: Two

Summary:

Some reflection, a new house, and seeing everything Kumo has to offer.

Chapter Text

When Kameko wakes up she is alone and the seal is gone.

So she takes some time to reflect.

Her mother named her Hiroki, a male name meaning abundant joy and strength. Kameko now understands that she will live a very long time, just like a tortoise. She holds Uzu culture through Chiharu-sama but she has neither abundant joy or strength.

That is a problem.

She will never be called Hiroki but she will honor the person who gave birth to her.

(She misses Yuma-shisou desperately.)

Kameko decides that it's time to make a list of goals. She grabs a pen.

First, she will evaluate her body and grieve.

Second, finish her studies and become a Uzushio kunoichi.

Third, recover all Uzushio artifacts.

For now, that will be enough.

---

After bawling and saying goodbye, she burns the bodies and collects the ashes in an ornamental box.

Then stands and turns to face the scrolls.

---

Kameko is in Chinami Hall for more than two weeks. She refuses to leave until she has at least read every scroll.

(She is Uzumaki and she refuses to let them take anything else.)

(Yuma-shisou packed her enough rations anyway.)

---

When she comes out, Uzushiogakure is rubble but there are no bodies.
---

Their dock is destroyed and the sea has reclaimed it but she scatters the ashes over where it was anyways.

She is done crying.

---

She buys a small house on the outskirts of a small town across from the island. And then she trains. She stops only when she can no longer go on, then she devours some food and collapses.

(It doesn’t stop her from thinking about how she will never receive a hitai ai with the Uzushio swirl.)

---

The war ends.

---

She trains non stop for nine years straight and still looks eighteen.

---

The small town turns desolate with the exception of about twenty families too poor to move.

(The loss of Uzushio has hurt them too.)

---

By now, Kameko is undeniably Kage level with zero battle experience. She has learned everything possible from the scrolls and has weapons of every kind. She builds a new house, bigger than she has any reason for, and multiple greenhouses. She has one for medicinal plants, one for poisons, one for flowers and fruits and one for vegetables.

She protects her property with more seals than Uzushio ever had.

---

She starts a clone spy network across the elemental nations and begins her plans to bring everything back to Chinami Hall.
---

Mist is pathetically unorganized but taking everything back is still, in her opinion, disgustingly easy. She takes their forbidden scrolls and anything she sees of value.

She still doesn’t have her first kill.

---

When she returns to her house by the water she deposites her goods then goes to get groceries.

Kameko is browsing the fish when she hears a girl scream. Following the noise, she glimpses a bulky male raising his hand and a small girl cowering against the wall of a nearby alley. She sees red.

“Stop.”

Her first kill is easy and when she lies in bed she wonders if she should be sad. She is trained in Uzu arts to be the best of the best but she is not truly a kunoichi. She has no kage. She kills who she wants.

She saves who she chooses.

She smiles.

---

She walks into town the next day with four baskets full of fruit and vegetables. She hands them out to everyone she sees with a small smile.

She asks them to keep it a secret.

The townspeople adore her.

---

She expands her greenhouses and leaves a shadow clone to tend the house. Mist was close, but Iwa and Kumo are not. While good exercise, she is paranoid and it only takes her two weeks to create a new and improved version of the Nidaime Hokage’s Hiraishin.

She leaves them with her spread out clone network and inside her house. After reclaiming everything from Iwa, she leaves a seal hidden on the inside of all the Hidden Villages as well.
---

Kumo is her last step in gathering everything Uzushio was and she finishes her work quickly.

Then she comes across a locked room.

With a raised brow, she slips inside.

And freezes.

Surrounded by stasis seals is the Nidaime Hokage, Senju Tobirama.

Part of her is furious, it isn’t just objects and information they steal but actual people? Jumping into action and knowing her time is limited she breaks the stasis seals while scoffing and picks him up before breaking into a run. She doesn’t want to Hiraishin when he isn’t even conscious but as the alarms start blaring and the city awakens she realizes she might not have a choice.

She pats his cheek and he hardly stirs. Biting her lip, she considers taking him to Konoha then leaving.

Sighing, she finds her seal that means her home and pulls.

(She’s never Hiraishin’d with a passenger either, goddammit.)

---

She sets him on one of her guest beds and curses when she feels a fever. Forming the hand signs for Mystical Palm she runs a diagnostic jutsu and lets out a sigh of relief.

Her house isn’t a hospital but she’s pretty sure she can get an IV from the next town over. Putting a paralysis seal on the Hokage along with a wet rag over his forehead, she sets out.

---

When she returns, his eyes are narrow, “Name and affiliation.”

She raises her brow and tilts her head, a move she learned from her Shisou.

“Men can be dumb,” she nods at herself. “But so can women and anything in between. Body language is something everyone knows. This is what I’ve always done to tell them ‘you are stupid and wasting my time.’ Your turn, go.”

And suddenly her nose tingles and she blinks back tears.

Tobirama looks like he just got hit by a truck.

She decides to start the conversation, “What is the last thing you remember and what year was it.”

Tobirama has a good poker face and hesitates, “I was fighting Kumo’s Kinkachu Brothers and it was 120089.”

She swears mentally and says in a slow, measured voice, “You may call me Chiharu of Uzushiogakure. That date was about thirty years ago,” she pauses. “I found you in Kumo covered in stasis seals.”

Tobirama’s expression shutters completely. Kameko blows out a breath, “You can stay here and recover- you have a fever- and I’ll get you some clothes.” She stares him down. “This is one of the most secure places in the Elemental Nations and I don’t want you nosing around.”

Tobirama nodded slowly, “When you return will you please tell me about what I’ve missed?”

Nodding awkwardly, this is the longest conversation she’s had in a while, she tells him to get some rest.

---

Over the next few days Kameko seals everything important, including her reclaimed-from-Kumo artifacts, into Chinami Hall.

She trains, and sends clones to garden and nurse Tobirama.

Then she sits him down with a cup of tea and tells him what happened over the last thirty years.

(His cup is in pieces halfway through.)

---

After explaining everything, including her Chiharu-sama title, he nods. His lips quirk into his first smile, “So, you knew Yuma-chan?”

It’s Kameko’s turn to freeze.

“When we were young, she was assigned to my team,” he let out a weak chuckle. “I might have been a little in love with her but she was so stoic and then I became Hokage and got a team… I think she is my greatest regret.”
“I once fell in love with one of about four people I knew in the whole time period.”

Kameko suddenly knows, knows in her heart, knows in her soul, knows from the essence still inside her, that this was the man she loved.

“But,” he continued, “If you are her apprentice then I must help her finish her last task.” His eyes refocus, “Will you allow me to train you?”

----

Tobirama-sensei trains her for all she is worth- teaches her more jutsu, more about sensing, politics that may or may not still be relevant, and she finally has a sparring partner. They practice in the ruins of Uzushio and when the sun sets a clone brings Uzu recipes and they sit on the edge of a cliff and eat.

The days are peaceful.

---

“She named me Kameko.”

Tobirama nods.

---

Tobirama was almost 30 when he was sealed and stasis seals did damage. With her medical ninjutsu he will have about 20 more years, but nothing more.

When she tells him, he laughs and ruffles her hair.

(Despite being on the shore, both of them are coming out of their shells to each other. They know it’s what she would've wanted.

It’s still a relationship deeper then in-another-life-would’ve-been-the-daughter.)

“I am here until I consider you at the highest level I can take you. But I no longer have much of a reason to live. I’m unnecessary and it feels wonderful,” he looks down at her. “Your duty will continue for a long time and I will support you, but that is all I can do.”

“Don’t you want to return to Konoha?”

She doesn’t want to be alone, but she’d much rather he be happy and content.
“One day, I will take a trip under henge and check on them,” he admits. “But they have a life where I am dead and that uptight, paranoid sensei is dead. I refuse to be the person that was unable to prioritize Yuma ever again.”

Kameko feels the warmth in her chest she thought was unique to her Shisou and hopes that they will find each other again. She grabs his hand and traces the patterns over the callouses.

“Very well.”

---

Kameko is almost thirty and ageless at eighteen.

---

It has only taken two and a half years to learn everything Tobirama himself knew. He calls her a prodigy.

She knows she is a genius but she isn’t sure how she feels about prodigy.

She meditates on the shore of the sea and stares at the whirlpools that took the red from her hair and left only the reflection of the sky.

---

Over time, taking care of the village is second nature and she builds them their own huge greenhouse and tells them to share.

The now-twenty-two families have begun to slowly revere her.

Kameko finds it awkward and uncomfortable but Tobirama teases that if she’s going to live long enough to be a deity anyway-

She punches him.

(She is mellow but she is also Uzumaki.)

---

The third shinobi war begins and Kameko is one of the first to know, her clone spy network is the best and most established in the Elemental Nations.

She respects Hatake and she might be the only one.

She is not a ninja.

---

Tobirama-senei decides it is time he returns to Konoha, but he will not fight. He will henge to his technical age and keep watch of the younger generation, especially Tsunade and Nawaki.

They exchange Hirashin tags, her seal directly on his skin, and a tight hug.

“Would you like letters?”

“Of course.”

This goodbye is bittersweet but painless.

(His place is among the leaves.)

(She is Chiharu-sama and her place is herself.)

(They meet in the middle anyway.)

Chapter 3: Three

Summary:

Kameko's off to Suna

Chapter Text

Kameko decides that it’s time to make new goals. So she makes a simple, four point to-do list.

1) Get access to Suna poisons and antidotes
2) Get a new sparring partner
3) Wander and help people personally
4) Acquire as much information and skills as possible

She knows war is ugly and unless she finds a new way to train she will be bored on the seashore.

She is Chiharu-sama and therefore the legacy of Uzushiogakure.

“...pass on the traditions please.”

She has a duty.

She packs and heads for Suna.

---

War time ups defense but Kameko needs to talk to the Kazekage, not T&I.

So when he walks into his office she activates her barrier and privacy seals and ties up the ANBU.

Gold sand surges but Kameko is already moving.

“I want nothing more than to talk,” she pauses. “Actually, I need a new sparring partner but that’s not what I’m here for.”

Rasa is tense and beyond irritated, but he is trapped with about five dead weights and his sand can’t catch this teenager with blue hair.

But then again, the dead weights aren’t actually dead.

(Why doesn’t she have a hitai ai?)

“I won’t let you out until you talk to me and you’re just giving me free training anyway.”

Kameko shrugs, could be worse.

A lot worse. Aren’t Kages supposed to be like, invincible?

Rasa’s brow ticks.

“Name and village association,” he says curtly.

Kameko expects this question and she still hesitates. She is not used to introductions. She does not know if she should share the importance of the title.

(What if he didn’t care? She doesn’t know what she’d do.)

“Chiharu of Uzushiogakure.”

Rasa stiffens.

Sand was completely neutral in the conflict but he was under the impression that there were no survivors.

“... You don’t have red hair.”

She nods, “The sea took the red and left the sky when I was five.”

Rasa twitches.

Kameko scents weakness, “Why don’t we have a chat.”

It isn’t a question.

(Rasa’s dust still hasn’t touched her.)

(Rasa would refuse this odd girl praise forever but he admits that this infiltration is completely flawless. His staff don’t bother him until at least 11:00 and it’s only 8:25, the ANBU rotation had just started. She made no sounds to attract attention. Her performance is impeccable- all she dodged with was speed. He has no true knowledge about her skills.)

---

Rasa paused.

“You want all Suna-exclusive poisons and antidotes?”

Kameko nodded, smiling, “Yes.”

“No.”

“Ehhhhhhhh, what if we make it a trade?”

Rasa sighs.

“Suna exclusive is exactly that, we aren’t sharing with outsiders for the right price.”

“You understand that either way I’m getting my hands on them,” Rasa bristles, “But instead of just taking, I’m offering to kickstart your economy on something apart from war. You might not even need to join the conflict.”

Rasa pauses, “What can you offer that holds that much promise?”

Kameko smirks and leans back in her chair, “You will probably never know my real name. Uzushio suspected their fall and I was given the title of Chiharu-sama, the protector of our legacy.”

Rasa’s brows are furrowed, calculating, “You can’t have been older than twelve when it happened?”

She simply shakes her head then looks him in the eye.

“I know the Uzumaki Art of Glass Blowing. I also know seals that, should you make a treaty with Amegakure, which I’d advise anyways, would be able to hold enough water for crops and plumbing everywhere in Suna.”

The Kazekage stares with wide eyes.

“Also, I’m technically thirty.”

She winks.

“I’ll be back tomorrow- think about it.”

---

As soon as the barriers were down, Rasa wakes his ANBU, scolds them until they are appropriately embarrassed for not even noticing their attacker, then sends them to call a council meeting.

Rasa isn’t so ignorant or arrogant that he couldn’t realize, despite the delivery, that Chiharu-sama just delivered him a wonderful gift.

An inevitable war now has the potential to be turned at the door.

Rasa smiles. A title well earned.

---

Kamkeo let out a yawn, stretching her limbs.

The talk with the Kazekage went exceptionally well and her plan actually followed the plan. She arrived around eight in the morning, got the necessary information from her clone and went to the meeting. The run from Whirlpool to Suna was done within a day and a half and now she was going to go to an inn, put up protective seals, and sleep.

Walking into the first inn that looked decent (her project of getting Suna on its own feet was definitely going to be able to keep her busy) she walked to the receptionists counter while discreetly channeling chakra to her ears to eavesdrop on the two maids whispering furiously in the corner.

“What do you mean the cold water isn’t working?”

“Exactly what it sounds like! Goddammit, I can’t lose this job, I’ve got to take care of Tarime-chan!”

“Well, do we even know why it isn’t working?”

“It’s all-”

Kameko beamed.

“Ladies, I think I can help.”

---

Wiping excess ink on her clothes, Kameko felt satisfied. She helped and got to do seal work. She might have gone a bit overboard but no one denies free, high quality work.

Even before Uzushio fell, she had been the seal master by the time she was a teenager.

Realizing she hadn’t eaten in about a day, Kameko set out to find some local cuisine. Preferably where she could eat it before ANBU poisoned it.

---

Patting her full tummy, she returned to the inn where the owner met her at the door with a wild look in her eye.

“I hope you don't want anything for your services! I didn’t commission you! You can’t trick me! Who even are you?”

Kameko is taken aback, and then she is indignant.

“I don’t want anything for my services! Who are you to yell at me when I’m just helping out! You’ll never know my name, you rude, bitter old hag!”

And then she pauses. Considers the okami’s perspective.

Kami-forsaken Uzumaki temper.

The okami is gaping, a vulnerable look in her eye.

“Ah, well-”

“I shouldn’t have-”

They start at the same time and Kameko lets out a relieved smile.

“I apologize Okami-san, I should have told you what I was doing, and that I expected no payment. Please forgive me”

The Okami bows hastily, “Of course! Then please forgive me, thank you for your kindness.”

Kameko waves her hand, “Goodnight then.”

---

 

Kameko wakes to a knock at the door.

Her lips quirk, “I’ll be ready in five minutes!”

 

---

With all her belongings in a hidden scroll on her thigh, she sets out for the Kazekage's office.

Halfway there, she stops to get breakfast from a food stall. Suna is poor and leaning into desperate despair but they aren’t quite there. She can still help, especially if she can get the Kazekage’s ear.

She alone has enough money to stimulate the economy from Uzushio so it’s not like there’s any damage done, not counting the amount she’s saving from all her clones’ part time jobs.

She walks into the building and steps into an ambush.

Fuck my life.

---

It’s not that she hadn’t considered the possibility, it just seemed highly unlikely.

The ambush is done by the Council.

Not ordered. They were the participants.

They want to hear everything she can do and what she wants in return. They remind her of children and a sempai, listening with wide eyes and admiration. She’s pretty sure Council’s aren’t supposed to act this way to an outsider.

They even offer the Kazekage up as a sparring partner.

(By his fidgeting, she changes metaphors and decides the Council is the mother of Kazekage-chan and they just found the most perfect husband-)

---

They are in session and negotiating for six and a half hours.

Kameko gets her exclusive poisons, their antidotes, and the Kazekage as a bimonthly sparring partner.

Suna gets a neutral party to negotiate with Ame, fifty water seals that each hold five tons of water, and get to give her a Bingo Book page with her labeled as an “associate.” They also get three apprentices trained in the Art of Uzumaki Glass Blowing.

Kameko considers it a win-win.

---

She doesn’t mind that she isn’t supposed to kill Suna shinobi but that won’t stop her if she decides they should die.

---

While the Kazekage and Council gather twenty participants, of which she will choose three to train, Kameko explores.

She talks to food vendors and seamstresses.

She walks the dunes and looks at architecture.

She explores a store of potted cactus’ and helps a girl find, “The biggest tumbleweed!”

She is Chiharu-sama and she holds all of Uzushio.

She can appreciate far more than fighting.

---

It takes another week before she is summoned to the Kazekage’s office.
There, she finds twenty people, young and old, but all with spirit. Most are talking to each other and waving hands, laughing. She hovers in her corner and feels homesick.

Uzumaki’s were expressive and louder than the waves that crashed against the shore.They were bright smiles and bright hair.

Kameko realizes she has neither.

“Your mind was the only reason you were in the running for Chiharu-sama,” Yuma-shisou tells her. “When you drowned and the Whirlpools returned you to us, a human chosen by the land itself? You are the most Uzumaki of us all, Kameko, your hair the most beautiful.”

Her lips tilt upwards and she nods at herself.

Her hair isn’t red but it is bright. She can work on smiles and happiness.

She steps forward.

---

She chooses an older man with dark skin and laugh lines, an unassuming teenage boy with brown hair, and a quiet blonde girl who is just entering puberty.

She asks them, “Are you prepared?”

Then she tells them, “You are each other's new family.”

---

Their second meeting is at five a.m. in a shop called “Uzumaki Glass.”

“This shop is ours equally,” she tells them. “Mira-chan,” she points at the smallest among them, “Owns this shop just as much as I do. I am your Shisou until I tell you otherwise. Disrespect towards me or each other will not be tolerated.”

She waits for them to nod before continuing.

“You will call me Chiharu-shisou. Uzumaki Glass Blowing is an art renowned for a reason. It has unique patterns and comes in all shapes and sizes. The most important part is to connect to the art. In this shop, we will exclusively learn Uzu styles and patterns. Should you later wish to use the skills learned here and create your own style that mixes Suna and Uzu elements, that is perfectly acceptable but it cannot be sold in this shop,” watching their response, Kameko continues, “By signing the contract, you will work here at least three days a week for the rest of your lives and each of you will eventually train your own apprentices.”

None of them looked surprised, eyes gleaming with determination.

She smirked, “Let’s get started.”

Chapter 4: Four

Summary:

Kameko sees how she really fares against the Kazekage, gets another student and visits the front lines.

Notes:

Minor warning for violence, gory metaphors

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Perhaps it should’ve been expected after the scene in his office, but Rasa was far too dependent on his gold dust. 

 

Kameko frowned. To stop improving after hitting good enough? Yuma-shisou would have hit her.

 

“Okay, stop.”

 

The dust falls.

 

At the beginning of the spar she thought he was just feeling her out but that is clearly not the case. 

 

“How’s your taijutsu?”

 

He shakes his head. 

 

“Kenjutsu?”

 

Shakes again.

 

Poisons? Other jutsu?”

 

“My taijutsu and ninjutsu apart from Gold Dust are jonin passable but not Kage level. I… have no specialization.”

 

His ears are red.

 

She slumps. Here I was, thinking I got a new toy. Tsk.

 

Straightening up, she claps her hands together.

 

“Alright.”

 

He looks up.

 

“You aren’t going to be my sparring partner, but I’ve not taking Suna out of it’s hole to let it fall because it has a weak Kage.”

 

He seethes, “No one’s outrun my sand before.”

 

She raises an eyebrow, “ Excuses, Kage-chan?”

 

He sulks.

 

---

 

Sabaku no Rasa has no idea who this no name kunoichi is. Or what, for that matter. He has never heard of a Legacy Holder.

 

She is a ninja that knows glassblowing of all things. 

 

(The lost art will save his economy.) 

 

She looks no older than a teenager but claims to be his age. 

 

(She screams a long life.)

 

She has blue hair where people are known for red.

 

("The sea took the red and left the sky when I was five.”  What does that mean? Was she joking ?)

 

And now, after being bartered away by the Council who’s tripping over themselves to please her, they’re secluded a few miles away from the village without ANBU and he’s getting his ass kicked. 

 

And that’s putting it nicely .

 

---

 

After hearing the Kazekage’s, surprisingly honest, confession, Kameko has decided to take one more student in Suna. 

 

“I will not embarrass you,” She tells him. “In public, you will call me Chiharu-sama. Here, you will call me sensei.”

 

He hesitates, stares hard at her, then dips his head in a shallow nod.

 

“We will train all day once every two weeks. While we train, I will put up an opaque barrier and no one will see you looking disheveled except me.”

 

“... Thank you, sensei.”

 

---

 

Kameko alternates between training her students at “Uzumaki Glass” and Rasa deep within the dunes.

 

She likes teaching.

 

(Sometimes, like when Hideo made his first red vase with waves on it, she feels a warmth in her chest like the ones Yuma-shihou and Tobirama-senei made her feel.

 

It’s still a bit different, though.) 

 

---

 

There was one week where she takes her plants home via hiraishin, and sets her clones to learn the information. 

 

(An occasional headache is a minor price to pay and shadow clones have been her study crutch since she was seven.)

 

---

 

After six months, she leaves and says she’ll be back after her birthday.

 

Kameko has a couple months before she is thirty-one.

 

(And yet, still eighteen. Part of her will never age past this mentality. She will be a wise child.)

 

---

 

She Hiraishins home, does some warm ups, and Hiraishin’s back.

 

---

 

Suna’s forbidden and secret scrolls are hidden a bit better than Mist but extraction is just as easy.

 

She’s disappointed, but she did not want to kill Suna shinobi either. 

 

She’s spent half a year following Minami-sensei’s last wish, and now she will switch gears and continue learning just like her Shisou told her.

 

(Just like she tells Rasa.)

 

---

 

Five months in, she has learned all that’s possible from Suna’s scrolls, so she takes everything Sand has given her and makes the trip to Chinami Hall. 

 

---

 

Walking in, she realizes that the Hall will need to be organized. The half that holds all of the Uzu shinobi arts is spotless (preservation seals, she has no doubt) but the other half is empty apart from the table and pile of scrolls from Mist, Iwa, and Kumo. 

 

Something dark passes over her features, and Kameko decides shinobi without secret or forbidden techniques are bad enough and she’s going to take, learn, then leave them here where no one can exploit the knowledge inside. 

 

Nodding to herself, she makes plans to commission some shelves.

 

Before she leaves, she places down a modified Hiraishin seal, one that will allow her in without creating a corpse. 

 

(Shinobi are paranoid and Uzushio was a shinobi village.)

 

---

 

She has two months before returning to Suna. She has access to their exclusives of every type but she is now realizing she doesn’t have their general.  

 

“Skipping to the fancy stuff, are we?” Minami-sensei teases, poking Kameko’s nose. She goes cross eyed. “But preparing lobster must be more interesting than crab!”

 

“Is that so?”

 

“Yeah!”

 

A clone knocks on her door, interrupting her planning. She looks over her shoulder, “What is it?”

 

“The conservatory is currently producing excess, Hime-sama.”

 

It was always odd to others how obedient and formal her clones were. Sometimes she thinks she does the jutsu wrong, conserves the part where they copy her personality. She asked a clone once if this was the case. It gave her a small smile, “We are naturally like this. However, we stay this way because it calms you. We are Mizuko.”

 

Kameko decided Mizuko are The Best after her Shishou and it doesn’t really matter anyways. 

 

“I haven’t seen the townspeople in a while, and they haven’t seen me either,” she organizes her thoughts, “When is the next town meeting?”

 

“Tonight, Hime-sama. Would you allow me to cook?”

 

Kameko nods firmly, “I’ll help.”

 

---

 

Four and a half hours later, laden with a cart full of warm dishes, Kameko walks into the town meeting. 

 

They greet her with wide, beaming smiles. 

 

They greet the food with wide eyes and deep bows.

 

Her townspeople do not starve but she has not taken care of them as well as she promised herself she would. 

 

She decides this will be her next project.

 

(There are knowing glances but no one talks about how these are homemade Uzushio recipes.)

 

(The people of the coast are strong.)

 

---

 

She may still be in need of a sparring partner but she’s helping people personally and learning Village secrets so Kameko thinks she’s on the right track.

 

(It’s not like she doesn’t have time to figure it out.)

 

---

 

Kameko spends the next month cooking to her heart's content for people who appreciate it wholeheartedly and she feels some of her homesickness dissipate. 

 

She uses Doton jutsu and creates better houses, home’s that don’t leak.

 

Fuuton dries laundry.

 

Katon in fireplaces for cold nights. 

 

Iryo-ninjutsu for when the kids scrape their knees or the grandparents that have arthritis. 

 

She adds plants to her apothecary and makes a clone to start making soap so her townspeople don’t have to buy it. 

 

By the end of the month, every villager has a Hiraishin seal and she teaches them a simple chakra flare code for emergencies.  

 

And then she’s off.

 

---

 

She has a month to get to Suna and Kameko has never actually seen war. 

 

She knows where she’s going. 

 

---

 

The first week is spent scoping the area and watching the way children too young for puberty “face” against jonin. Watches jonin fall to slow acting poison with agony painted across their features until someone comes and slices their throat open like a peach. Watches Chunin plant bombs where they are unable to escape the blast radius.

 

It is ugly.

 

(Kameko is suddenly very relieved she was able to save Suna from this. )

 

“Nothing isn’t fair in war, Love,” Yuma-shisou says while petting her hair. “And no one wins.”

 

Kameko’s never seen anything like it. And she never wants to again.

 

Her heart hurts. Her eyes sting.

 

“But we fight because we are our Kages tools.”

 

Her eyes narrow. 

 

She stays.

 

(She is considering taking the entire war-dependent shinobi structure down at its knees.)

 

---

 

When the second week starts, she is sneaking into camps and healing the children, enough for them to survive with no permanent damage. 

 

But also enough for them to be sent home immediately. 

 

(Children, to her, are people under eighteen.) 

 

---

 

While Uzumaki are not known for their patience, it is only halfway through the second week when she joins the fighting. 

 

(One day in a warzone is an eternity.)

 

She chooses no sides.

 

She uses her stealth skills that accomplish whatever she asks of them and finds isolated skirmishes.

 

She casts genjutsu that tells shinobi, “Ignore the hitai ai.”

 

She places compulsion seals, “I won’t kill them.”

 

She layers so many genjutsu that the soldiers think they’re in a spar. 

 

She heals.

 

When her last month ends, there is damage and people are still fighting but there are also smiles, friendly jeers, and far less death.

 

She leaves the border and hopes that reinforcements won’t come to either side.

 

(Her clones will tell her if they do. Then she will return and do it again. And again.)

 

(These are no longer battles and all she did was take away the difference in hitai ai’s.

 

She thinks, Villages are terrifying .)

 

---

 

For a long time, once a week, she chooses a border without major players and layers genjutsu and compulsion seals. Her Hiraishin seals are carried by half the ninja population.

 

She continues.

 

---

 

She returns to a warm welcome in Suna. 

 

Her students, finally receiving a break from new material, have started producing as much as they can and Suna has made as much in the last month from the simple Uzu-design glass as they make in a year of missions.

 

Uzushio glass blown products were always a civilian luxury item and their return to the market is ground breaking for merchants. With Suna’s neutrality in the war, civilians feel safer and the Kazekage is diligently protecting trade routes within the Land of Wind. 

 

Rasa tells her this while smiling, but Mizuko already has told her.

 

She knows.

 

So why is she just now recognizing that this is different from the future Yuma-shisou told her about?

 

Yuma-shishou told her that she knows the future from the perspective of a Konoha Jinchuriki who will not be born for… she pauses, about five years.

 

Kameko rubs her nose, time has flown over her head.

 

She groans.

 

Rasa furrows his brows.

 

“Alright, that’s good news. Gaki, I want fifty suicides from that dune to that dune. My cute little apprentices are going to take a break from the market and I’m accelerating their training. Between the three of them, they’ll know everything about the Art of Uzumaki Glassblowing within five months.”

 

Rasa opens his mouth to interrupt.

 

“And, kami, you weren’t going to interrupt your sensei were you? Seventy-five suicides. And , I will make you thirty high level glass pieces to auction when you see fit.”

 

And that was that.

 

---

 

Kameko is thirty one and ageless at eighteen. 

 

---

 

A little over four months after Kameko has perfected Suna taijutsu and kenjutsu, a Mizuko wearing an apron Hiraishins in front of her with a smile far larger than her usual quirk of lips. 

 

“Hime!” The Mizuko pauses and a light blush covers her cheeks and she continues in a far softer voice that does nothing to hide her excitement. “Hime-sama, Tobirama-sensei finally sent a letter!”

 

Kameko gasps. She knew that, because of war time and his obvious “past” of being a shinobi, it would take him a long time to be cleared and that he would still wait past the official time to be careful.

 

Opening the white envelope carefully she takes out the folded up letter first. Unfurling it, she blinks, I’ve never seen his handwriting before.

 

(She hasn’t even started reading and she feels like she might burst.

 

She’s happy.)

 

Dearest Chiharu-chan,

 

I admit, I miss you more than I thought I would. I was going through old stuff because of the move and found this green ribbon that reminded me of Yuma-chan's eyes and I was never man enough to give her. I’d love for you to wear it but maybe around your wrist? Neck? 

 

See, I got you your very own hair ornament that I found at the wonderful Konoha market! So many treasures to find.

 

Enjoy,

 

S.T.  (Best Jiji)

 

Inside the circular red ornament is a hand painted storage seal with a slip of paper that says nothing more than, “Full stealth, October 19, Hokage Rock” in one of the Uzu codes she taught him. 

 

She can wait two months for her sensei.

 

---

 

A month later Mira, Hideo and Kouichi finish their Art of Uzumaki Glass Blowing Course. She takes them to celebrate and tells them that only the Kazekage has her address and to give messages to him.

 

They are dear to her heart and she tells them, “You are all honorary Uzumaki now. You will have each other's back before anyone, anything else. You help each other. You will share burdens. You will be in charge of teaching each other when I’m gone.” 

 

She smiles softly, “I know you can do it.”

 

Mira and Hideo have tears in their eyes and cry, “Shisou!” with the synchronization of students who have been together for a year and half.

 

She smiles.

 

 Mira will turn fourteen, Hideo twenty-one, and Kouichi fifty-two this year. 

 

There is an age gap.

 

(They have already overcome it.)

 

(Maybe she learned something, too.)

 

Kouichi asks her to visit.

 

She promises.

 

---

 

(She ignores that she will outlive even Mira by a very large margin.)

Notes:

So I realized I formatted the first three chapters wrong and you guys can't see things like italics. I'll fix it eventually but let me know if i should do it ASAP.

Chapter 5: Five

Summary:

Kameko bonds with Rasa, goes to Ame, and reunites with Tobirama-sensei.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

She is once again standing in the Kazekage’s office but the tension present is far less volatile.

 

“The war shows no signs of letting up,” she says conversationally. 

 

“The small nations are very angry,” he agrees.

 

Kameko cuts to the chase.

 

“It is time to negotiate with Amegakure. I have one more month and then I will be busy with other affairs for an undetermined amount of time.”

 

“Sensei, you are formidable, but can you truly do it in one month?” Rasa questions.

 

There is no doubt in voice, he is only curious. He knows that if she says she can, then she can.

 

(The Kazekage has learned to fear her on the battlefield, but he will never forget how she tamed the Council before even meeting them.

 

He ignores the voice that tells him he acts like a fresh genin with a bad case of hero worship.)

 

Kameko still loves how her Kage-chan now calls her “Sensei” in front of everyone.

 

Students are the best.  

 

“Without extenuating circumstances, yes.”

 

He nods slowly, “Send a letter?”

 

Of course , Kage-chan!”

 

---

 

Rasa takes the day before she leaves off.

 

(No he isn’t allowed to but he did it anyway.)

 

They walk across the sand and up dunes.

 

When they are far from the village and alone, she begins talking.

 

“When I was five years old, I fell asleep on an abandoned dock,” she tells him. “When I woke up, my hair was sky blue and I was on the shore. Later that year, I was selected as Uzushiogakure’s first Chiharu-sama, The Lady of One Thousand Springs.”

 

“Sensei… ?”

 

Rasa has known his sensei for almost two years now. She is kind and strong and selfless. She is smart with an impeccable memory. She teases and laughs. She is an excellent teacher.

 

What she does not do, however, is talk about herself.

 

She looks at him. 

 

“I’m choosing to trust you.”

 

His heart swells.

 

“My duties as Chiharu-sama truly began with Suna,” she tells him. “And yet, training for the title began when I was selected.”

 

She looks at the cloudless sky. She turns to him.

 

“I know every skill that every citizen of Uzushio did before the invasion,” she pauses. “Do you know what that means? I knew every citizen of Uzushio. And I lost all of them.”

 

The twist of her lips is anything but kind.

 

“I’ve had hundreds of sensei’s,” she tells him. “And all of them are dead .”

 

Rasa hesitates, “I am alive,” he offers.

 

Kameko grins at him. 

 

“I have one sensei left,” she admits. “But he isn’t from Uzushio.”

 

“I am the legacy, skills and hobbies of my people. I know everything and I will forget none of it.”

 

Rasa is in awe, he may be Kazekage but he now realizes that Chiharu-sama is a title far more impressive. 

 

“My glass blowing students call me shisou, but you are my disciple just as much as they are. More than that, I consider you a friend.”

 

She smiles and it is more dazzling than the sun at midday.

 

“It’s nice to meet you, Rasa, my name is Uzumaki Kameko.”

 

---

 

When they are two dunes away from Sunagakure, she stops them. 

 

“I have something I’d like to offer you but you do not have to take it- it is a choice.”

 

Rasa nods.

 

“I am a seal's mistress and I, like the Yellow Flash of Konoha, have created a version of the Hiraishin.”

 

Rasa’s jaw is slack and he’s internally cursing while letting out wails of despair. How is he supposed to get over his minor case of admiration when his sensei is this cool ?

 

“I’d like to plant a Hiraishin seal on you so I can come in case of emergency. One chakra pulse for ‘please visit I miss you sensei’, two for ‘emergency, come ASAP.’ Would you like it?”

 

He offers his wrist.

 

---

 

She sets out quietly the next day before the sun rises.

 

She has one copy of her water storage seal, five pens, and her survival gear.

 

When she is cresting the first dune, she turns back and bows.

 

“Thank you for taking care of me.”

 

---

 

She arrives at the Ame-Wind border in time for a late breakfast. 

 

Kameko’s Plan to Talk to Kage was a roaring success the first time and so she changes nothing.

 

So when Hanzo of the Salamander walks into his office alone, just past two in the morning, Kameko is there to greet him. 

 

“My name is Chiharu of Uzushiogakure,” he tenses and whips around, “And I am here as an envoy of Sunagakure.”

 

And then the barriers rise.

 

---

 

Kameko is disappointed, again .

 

Hanzo of the Salamander, the Amekage, is supposed to be the undisputed, strongest fighter in all of the minor countries.

 

She’s a Poison Mistress, immune to many, but she also has common sense. And Yuma-shisou’s protocols.

 

Of course she has a kami-forsaken mask.

 

And while Hanzo of the Salamander does have exceptional Taijutsu and Kenjutsu, he simply isn’t fast enough to keep up with her. 

 

---

 

Hanzo is flustered and completely off kilter.

 

His training hasn’t been intense for about two years but he doesn’t see how that translates to this blue haired child dodging every blow he sends at her.

 

He doesn’t even recognize her from the Bingo Books, “Who are you?”

 

She raises an eyebrow and tilts her head, “I already told you.”

 

His jaw clenches tighter and he ignores the flash of embarrassment that follows her answer. 

 

“Why don’t we sit down?”

 

Hanzo has been a leader for a long time and he knows when to accept defeat. 

 

His sword lowers.

 

“Wonderful!”

 

---

 

Kameko thinks she might be a genius because she’s never heard of anyone using her Plan to Talk to Kage and it’s worked twice now.

 

“Okay!” clapping her hands, Kameko pulls out the blank notebook from thin air. 

 

He splutters, “That was in my locked drawer!”

 

She is unimpressed, “Yeah, locked with seals anyone above chunin level could open.”

 

He pauses, “Uzushio fell almost fifteen years ago. You wouldn’t have been more than a toddler.”

 

The grin she gives him is sharp, “Maybe, maybe not, but I am here only as Suna’s envoy.”

 

“Sunagakure has been neutral and we have decided it best not fight on every border,” Hanzo clenches his jaw. “What do they want from us?”

 

Kameko waves her hand, “Nothing drastic, and something you are in abundance of,” she tells him.

 

“They want some water.”

 

Hanzo figures that the desert does indeed want water, but how do they expect to get it? A one-sided open border to fill a canteen ? Not gonna happen.

 

“I am a seal’s mistress,” he jolts, “I have seals that can capture enough water to stop Suna citizens from experiencing drought and absorb enough water that Ame can develop agriculture apart from the occasional rice patty.” 

 

Kameko allows him to stew in that information before dropping one more bomb.

 

“Shimura Danzo of Konoha is a dirty liar,” she tells him. “Do not forsake your own people.”

 

She leaves.

 

He does not try to stop her. 

 

---

 

Kameko waits three days before returning. 

 

---

 

When she does, she is disgusted by the man in front of her. 

Sunagakure was on the brink of despair.

 

Amegakure is long past that point and has basically hit the bottom in every way. 

 

Diseases are running rampant and just about everyone she saw was malnourished.

 

Orphans dot the landscape. 

 

She decides that Hanzo is no longer a fit ruler.

 

---

 

“When did you stop caring?”

 

He looks up at her.

 

“I don’t quite remember,” he admits softly. “I know I gave up but I don’t know when or why.”

 

“So you brought your people into another war.”

 

He flinches.

 

“I am the last of Uzushiogakure,” she tells him. “But I am Chiharu-sama and I am it’s legacy.”

 

He looks at her and sees her eyes that are a mix of blue and purple.

 

(The ocean during a storm.)

 

“I will find you a successor and I will negotiate with them, and then you will come with me.”

 

(It is not a question.)

 

He nods.

 

---

 

Hanzo is a bit excited.

 

(He will never admit it.)

 

---

 

Kameko returns in four days with three others.

“This is Yahiko, Nagato, and Konan,” she announces.

 

“They will be Ame’s new leadership. Since there is no Council and I have recently been disillusioned with Kageship, their titles will be Ame-sama.” 

 

She sits them down in front of him, “Tell them everything they need to know.”

 

She does not ask for his opinion.

 

(He is relieved.)

 

---

 

While they talk, she is adding privacy seals and barrier seals to the office. Then she adds real protection seals to the desk keyed to the Ame-chibis’ chakra.

 

After that, she sits down and eavesdrops. 

 

No one asks her to leave.

 

(She would have.)

 

---



Kameko is finally able to sign the treaty as Suna’s envoy. It takes longer than she’d like but she leads them through every step of political negotiation and explains what she’s doing and why.

 

“To negotiate when you have all the power is not to negotiate at all,” Yuma-shisou tells her sternly. “Do not abuse the people around you, False Treaties do damage, Kameko-chan.”

 

She gives them the address Rasa has, it is to the post office closest to her house, and takes them to dinner.

 

(She is sure to leave a large tip for the meager portion of dumplings.)

 

---

 

“Okay, Ame-chibi’s,” she claps her hands and they look up at her with wide eyes. “I am going to give you enough money to do two things.”

 

She raises one finger, “Buy enough seeds to feed the tiny population you have by the end of your seasonal harvest.”

 

She raises a second finger, “And to pull out of this awful war. You are expected to defend your borders but do not antagonize.”

 

Their stances showcase their determination , “Yes!”

 

---

 

After Hiraishining to Suna to drop off the treaty on Rasa’s desk, she returns home.

 

She sends a clone to get the money and pulls aside a House Mizuko, “I’m going to leave Hanzo here. I want you to introduce him to the village and show him how to help civilians. Hell, teach him to cook, be his sparring partner, whatever, help him find his spark . I’ll be visiting Tobirama-sensei in a few days.”

 

“Of course, Hime-sama.”

 

They share a grin.

 

---

 

The moon is high on October 19th and the wind nips her fingertips.

 

Kameko holds all Uzu-culture, including traditional dress, but she was accustomed to wearing black, ANBU-style clothing before the invasion and she doesn’t change what works.

 

The green ribbon tied around her neck is the only color on her clothes.

 

(The red hair pin is to be worn when she meets her partner, romantic or platonic, to whom she will share her life. 

 

Or more acurately, theirs.

 

It is in Chinami Hall.

 

Part of her aches because she recognizes why Tobirama knows Uzu tradition so well but the rest of her absolutely swells with joy because she was raised as an orphan but Tobirama-sensei gave her a hairpiece anyway .)

 

She sits along the tree line and waits. 

 

---

 

She has never been to Konoha, hasn’t stolen all their secrets, and yet, despite her clone network, this is the Hidden Village she knows the most about. 

Assuming she hasn’t changed everything, this is where Naruto will be born in a little over three years. The war will end in one. 

 

She smiles and flips off the moon.

 

---

 

Tobirama-sensei arrives an hour later and they Hiraishin to a nearby town. 

 

---

 

Setting down next to a river, Kameko leans her head on his shoulder.

 

“It isn’t the cliff facing the sea,” she says wistfully. “But I currently have a guest and I’d like it to be just us.”

 

“A guest, huh?” Tobirama wiggles his eyebrows.

 

Kameko gapes, “Those Konoha History books are shameless liars!”

 

Tobirama chuckles, “Ah, well, I’ve definitely been channeling Hashirama-nii recently. It’s surprisingly therapeutic to not be excessively paranoid.”

 

Kameko hums.

 

“My guest is Hanzo of the Salamander and he’s closer to your age, Best Jiji-sensei.”

 

Her elbow nudges his ribs.

 

Tobirama  doesn’t respond.

 

Looking over, Kameko’s eyes pop and she starts flailing, “What is it?”

 

“Your guest is the Amekage?

 

“Um, no. He sucked and Kages are stupid, other than Kage-chan because he’s my cute little disciple, so now there are three wonderful, hand- picked by me, Ame-sama’s.”

 

Tobirama decides he must have selective hearing in his old age.

 

“That’s nice, Kameko-chan.”

 

She beams. 

 

“I also taught the Art of Uzumaki Glass Blowing to three apprentices in Suna so they wouldn’t have to join the war…”

 

Tobirama sits, content to listen to Kameko talk about her life.

 

It’s been far too long.

 

---

 

Eventually, once Kameko’s caught him up, she turns to him.

 

“What about you, Tobirama-sensei?”

 

He looks at her seriously, “Konoha sees me as a ditsy, old man who sleeps a lot.”

 

She giggles.

 

“But, I’ve been doing reconnaissance at night and I fear that I might have bred a lot of hatred.”

 

She stops abruptly, “... Are you talking about Danzo?”

 

Tobirama does a double-take. 

 

“I am,” he stumbles over his words, then straightens up. “Something went wrong with him, or maybe it always was? He’s a warhawk , Kameko-chan, and I don’t know how it happened .”

 

“It doesn’t matter.”

 

“What?”

 

“It doesn’t matter,” she looks him in the eye, “I am Chiharu-sama but I am also all that’s left. I will live a long time. What happens when I start pondering why I am the only one left? Why I was chosen?”

 

She takes a deep breath, “That is destructive thinking about things we cannot change. Please don’t hurt yourself sensei.”

 

She touches her neck and there’s a wry twist of her lips, “That’s what Yuma-shisou told me after telling me that Uzushio would fall.”

 

Tobirama lets out an explosive sigh and nods.

 

(He does not question her wording.)

 

(If she can help it, she will never lie to him.)

 

---

 

He has just finished telling her that his only sane student left, apart from her, Uchiha Kagami, is about to be a father.

 

The bad news is that he is now retired for unknown reasons, during a war, nonetheless, and he has bags under his eyes and a too-lean frame.

 

 The baby hasn’t yet been born. 

 

He’s sick, he tells her. 

 

She tells him to worm his way into his life again.

 

He says that he will.

 

---

 

“Tsunade-chan might leave when the war ends,” he discloses. 

 

Kameko tilts her head, “What do you mean by leave ?”

 

“She’ll abandon the village and they won’t make her a missing-nin because she’s The Last Senju.”

 

Kameko scoffs. Then she slumps. 

 

“You want me to put her under Mizuko’s Become a Well Rounded Person Program?”

 

(She admits that she isn’t great at naming things but she’s practicing because Chinami Hall? The Lady of One Thousand Springs? Uzushio was clearly kick-ass at naming so she will get this down no matter how long it takes.)

 

He raises an eyebrow.

 

“Currently, Hanzo is our only participant,” she admits. “But I’m considering opening it to everyone with ANBU-and-up strength levels.”

 

“Your clones will do the therapy while you scour the Elemental Nations for a worthy sparring partner.”

 

She turns to him, “How do you know ?”

 

He winks, “You are obviously Yuma-chan’s apprentice.”

 

Her chest warms. 

 

---

 

“Sensei, I know it’s not the same and that I’m only thirty-two, but I’m supposed to live past 700,” she looks at him with tears in her eyes. “But I don’t want to. But I’m also not suicidal.”

 

She lets out a hiccup.

 

“Will you please tell me what it’s like to wake up and thirty years have passed?”

 

He pulls her against his chest and she focuses on the sound of his heartbeat.

 

(No matter what, he will be dead in less than two decades.)

 

His lips part.

 

“You and I, Kameko-chan, are minor exceptions to human laws of time,” he tells her. “But compared to time itself, seven hundred years is nothing.”

 

“My experience is not yours. Your existence is not mine. All I can tell you is that Uzumaki Kameko is the First Chiharu-sama of Uzushiogakure and you can do whatever you want.”

 

“You can end Kageship or cross the ocean. You can survive or you can live.”

 

He looks at her, “And whatever you chose to do, I believe in you.”

 

“...you will never truly be alone.”

Notes:

I'm currently writing chapter 7 but I should have some semblance of an update schedule soon :)

Chapter 6: Six

Summary:

Collecting village secrets, meeting Karura, and finally finding a sparring partner(s).

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

An hour before the sun rises, they leave the river and get onigiri and fruit from a late-night shop. 

 

As they walk back to Konoha, Tobirama-sensei reapplies his henge. 

 

“Make friends with Uchiha Kagami,” she repeats. “Remember, you are past regretting inaction towards your precious people.”

 

She smiles, “Call me if you need me.”

 

He waves his chakra cane at her, “Be safe.”

 

---

 

Kameko decides it’s time to learn what the foreign scrolls have to offer.

 

---

 

When she returns home, she heads straight to her dock. The dock, cliff, and Chinami Hall all reside on the same half of the island…

 

She bites her lip.

 

The scrolls can wait.

 

---

 

When she is done, Uzushio’s entire island is covered in seals even stronger than before.

 

(Even if their strength wasn’t the original problem. There’s a reason the only ones who knew the secret of Chinami Hall were the ones sacrificed.)

 

Half will be accessible to her alone.

 

The other half will be an available sparring ground for all-out battles safe from collateral damage.

 

She puffs up in pride for five seconds and then she faces the scrolls. It’s time to get started.

 

---

 

In her nine years of nonstop training, elemental jutsu had become something of a favorite after seals and genjutsu. She was equally proficient in all natures, made easier by her precisie chakra control.

 

Iwa’s secret scrolls were mostly Doton jutsu and Kameko was all but squealing. 

 

She never did believe in saving best for last.

 

---

 

Her training is always intense but mixed with Kameko’s motivation and general elation from seeing her sensei, Kameko has perfected everything she hadn't already studied in just under five months.

 

When she emerges from the island, a House Mizuko tells her Hanzo is with another clone helping a nearby town fish and that they will not be back until late.

 

Kameko beams, “Such a miracle worker Mizuko-chan!”

 

“I am only an extension of you, Hime-sama,” the Mizuko demures. 

 

Kameko turns bright red and splutters.

 

“Although, he truly is trying to better himself, Hime-sama,” the clone continues.

 

Mizuko’s face becomes solemn. 

 

“I also have news that the events of Kannabi Bridge have occurred.”

 

Kameko sucks in a breath.

 

---

 

Her heart is heavy for Uchiha Obito and his teammates.

 

The rest of her is heavy for the slaughter of Iwa shinobi.

 

The war will wind down, but in the past four months she has neglected her self-assigned war duties.

 

(If Namikaze Minato is another Kage-level shinobi dependent on one jutsu she’s going to turn him black and blue.)

 

---

 

She spends two months on the front line.

 

She is in the middle of healing a stab wound way too close to a jonin’s heart when Rasa’s Hiraishin flares twice.

 

She curses.

 

---

 

“What is it?”

 

When his sensei Hiraishins into his office there is blood over her clothes and on her hands and she is in a battle stance. 

 

Her eyes dart around, finally landing on his wife, “Is it her?”

 

Within a moment, the sharp edge of a kunai is against Karura’s neck.

 

Within the next, his dust is between them.

 

No! Sensei what are you doing ?”

 

Kameko furrows her brows but lowers the kunai, “Kage-chan you pulsed the seal twice. That means emergency. The only possible threat I see is this woman. While it goes against my morals to kill pregnant women, I most definitely would for you, Kage-chan.”

 

Rasa is gaping, “Ah sensei, I don’t need anyone dead, it’s just that the medic said it was safe to tell you… and I got excited. I should have only pulsed once.”

 

He turns to the woman in front of her and bows, “Karura-san I sincerely apologize, it is my mistake.”

 

“Oh my gosh this is your wife?

 

They both turn to her, gaping.

 

“How do you...”

 

C’mon Kage-chan, I will always have the tea. You can’t hide anything from Sensei!” 

 

She winks, then looks at Karura, “I’m really sorry, been on the front for a while, but I am very overprotective of Kage-chan so don’t hurt his feelings too often, okay?”

 

Nodding to herself she turns to Rasa, “Training grounds, now .”

 

She sees him straighten before her shunshin carries her out of the office.

 

---

 

After a lecture on Hiraishin protocol, how to treat women ( “If she is at the end of anyone’s, apart from my own, kunai ever again I will skewer you ”), and how completely unacceptable it is to learn about his, albeit arranged, marriage from the Council before him ( “You were the only one in Wind to have my address, want to explain that Kage-chan?” ), and a grueling training session, Kameko is finally relaxed and ready to dote on her precious disciple. 

 

“So you’re married, a soon-to-be father, anything else new?”

 

He’s spread out on the sand, face down, but he shakes his head.

 

She chuckles, “Well then, let’s get dinner with the missus.”

 

---

 

Kameko’s second encounter with Sabaku no Karura goes a lot smoother. 

 

The woman is six months pregnant and jonin.

 

It's unfortunate, but also a fact, that should Kameko have wanted to kill her, she would be dead.

 

They start the conversation with proper introductions and, though Karura is slightly terrified, she has clearly steeled herself and Kameko decides the Council could have chosen a lot worse. She can easily see Rasa and Karura growing to love each other.

 

“Karura-san, is there anything you’re craving today?”

 

She receives a small smile.

 

(It’s progress.)

 

---

 

After dinner, Kameko and Rasa are sitting on the porch drinking tea when he admits that he hasn’t had as much time to get to know his wife as he’d like and she nods, “I’ll see what I can do.”

 

(She will do just about anything for her students. Maybe even the Ame-chibi’s- she’s protective.)

 

When she walked into the Council meeting and told them that her Kage-chan needed a few days with his beloved, this was their solution.

 

She spends a week in Suna, three days of which she is Acting Kazekage.

 

She expects someone to object but the Council suggested it, the shinobi have seen their leader call her “sensei”, and the civilians adore her for her negotiations with Ame and for teaching glass blowing. 

 

And then Rasa smiles and thanks her so genuinely she snatches the hat and shoos him out. 

 

Looking at the stacks of paper, she groans.

 

---

 

Three days later, the desk is empty and she is sick of twitchy ANBU.

 

 (They’d seem trigger happy to anyone else but Kameko knows twitching is just the only way ANBU are expressive. They are impressed and bewildered. She probably just expanded her network of fans. Why is Suna of all places one of her home bases?)

 

---

 

She spends the rest of the week visiting with Karura and working in Uzumaki Glass.

 

At the end of the week, early June, she returns to the front lines. 

 

---

 

She heals for two days but the intensity of the battles has dropped dramatically.

 

It seems everyone knows this war is almost over. 

 

With about six months left in the war, Kameko packs for Kumo.

 

---

 

Kameko is wonderful at stealth because she knows how to be quiet and in depth psychology.

 

Kameko is exceptional at infiltration because she is paranoid. 

 

What Kameko is passable at, beyond most people’s ability, absolutely, but by her standards only passable at, is trap discovery.

 

So when she seals the last scroll and the alarm blares over her head she jumps.

 

Then she swears.

 

---

 

Kameko decided to run instead of Hiraishin for one reason, an unchecked goal on her latest list.

 

She still doesn’t have a sparring partner.

 

And it's driving her nuts.

 

So when she sees the Raikage and Killer B charging at her full blast, the adrenaline that flashes down her spine is like a drug.

 

When, “What did you look at and what is your village association!” is bellowed at her she is indisputably gleeful.

 

They don’t see anything on her and now they’re making assumptions.

 

(Uzushio is fifteen years under and sealing is a dying art.)

 

She feels like a little girl playing tag.  So she hollers back, “Catch me if you can!”

 

She is ecstatic when she sees Yugito Nii join the chase.

 

---

 

After half a day of running full speed deeper into Lightning, Yugito is flagging.

 

Kameko had hoped to go longer, running in their home terrain with the pleasant addition of not letting them know where she came from and planting additional Hiraishin seals.

 

She stops.

 

---

 

Yugito is tired. 

 

As a jinchuuriki, Matatabi is the only thing that is allowing her to keep up with the ruthless pace the invader has set.

 

The invader that has no hitai ai or mask, but a pale skin and dark hair in a ponytail. 

 

Yugito is curious. She’s never heard of anyone who can equal the Raikage’s speed apart from the Yellow Flash, let alone outpace them for hours .

 

A is getting increasingly angry and Yugito hopes that there’s something left to drag to T&I.

 

More than she is curious, Yugito is desperately hoping that this incident doesn’t extend the war- not that anyone involved has the resources to carry on. By the time treaties are signed, Suna will be the richest Hidden Village.

 

Glancing at her other companion, Bee-sama’s sweaty brow tells her that she isn’t the only one relying on a Bijuu’s power.

 

When she faces forward, the intruder is gone.

 

---

 

According to Yuma-shisou’s future, in about eighteen years, Killer B and A will be equal in skill. 

 

Right now, A is obviously stronger.

 

When she stops, all of them fly past her.

 

Her lips quirk upwards. 

 

A stops first, the soles of his feet skidding against the ground.

 

Bee stops next, about twenty-five yards away.

 

It takes Yugito fifty yards to realize everyone is behind her.

 

Kameko shakes her head, poor girl .

 

---

 

Kameko is originally slightly overwhelmed by the three on one, and then she joins the flow of the fight. To fight someone a miniscule amount slower is just so much fun.

 

It’s even more fun to know that they’ll train tirelessly afterwards and come back stronger.

 

And more than that, so will she.

 

---

 

After five hours, everyone is panting and Yugito is sprawled on the ground for the upteenth time.

 

Kameko is exhilarated and buzzing, could go for another three hours, but she also knows when to stop. She won’t be getting more out of them today.

 

“Well that was super fun, 9.5/10, would definitely recommend,” she beams at them. “Congratulations! Together, you three are now my sparring buddies!”

 

With a cheerful wave, Kameko Hiraishin’s home. 

 

Yugito lets out a pitiful groan.

 

---

 

When Kameko comes home, she is covered in dirt but positively beaming .

 

“Mizuko ,” she sings.

 

“Yes, Hime-sama?” Mizuko pops her head out from around the corner.

 

A moment later, Hanzo’s head appears above hers.

 

“I finally got sparring buddies! I get to go all out with taijutsu and kenjutsu because none of them are old enough to recognize Uzu styles. I got a little knocked around because all I could use were the academy three so they wouldn’t assume what village I was from and of course, no poisons or seals but Mizuko-chan, Hanzo-kun, it was so much fun!”

 

She may or may not be yelling by the end.

 

(Uzumaki feel just as intensely as Uchiha- happiness or hate.)

 

Hanzo raises an eyebrow, “Who were you able to find who could keep up with your speed?”

 

“The Raikage, his brother, and Yugito-chan! Unfortunately, their stamina needs work.”

 

Hanzo leaves.

 

Mizuko laughs. 

 

---

 

The thing about secret and forbidden scrolls is that only half, occasionally two thirds, are actually jutsu. She reads through the rest of June and considers building a house on her half of Uzushiogakure. 

 

She hasn’t found the perfect monument for her people, either. 

 

---

 

She receives a letter from Tobirama-sensei, telling her that he’s wiggled back into his Uchiha’s life and to come for an extended visit at some point.

 

She tells him she’s expecting a goddaughter anyday and busy with “school work”.

 

She says to come to her house for her thirty third birthday and then she’ll come back with him. 

 

---

 

They agreed that Rasa would flare his Hiraishin three times when it’s related to his kids but July comes and goes and there’s no word of a baby.

 

It seems the child is clinging to its first home.

 

--

 

Kameko waits by helping her townspeople, the numbers slowly growing, and walking the shore. She is watching black eels dance when Rasa’s seal flares three times.

 

It is August 23rd.

 

---

 

Baby Temari has blonde hair and beautiful teal eyes. 

 

Kameko is named her godmother. 

 

She knew Rasa and perhaps the Council would push for it, but she is surprised when Karura smiles.

 

“Why?” she questions.

 

“I know you can and will protect my family,” Karura says simply. 

 

Kameko places a Hiraishin seal on the small Temari’s back. 

 

---

 

In October the war is declared over.

 

It’s a few months too early and Kumo has actually signed a treaty instead of simply ending the fighting.

 

Kameko smiles when a Mizuko tells her. She returns to her scrolls.

 

---

 

In November, Namikaze Minato is named Yondaime Hokage.

 

By December, Kameko heads to Konoha.

 

She does not tell Tobirama. 

 

 

Notes:

y'know i don't even know why Kameko was in Kumo and somewhere she wasn't supposed to be, I really don't

Chapter 7: Seven

Summary:

Kameko discovers the problem that is Shimura Danzo, celebrates her birthday and meets Uchiha Kagami and Shisui- between shifts at the hospital.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

It’s while she's stealing Konoha’s scrolls when Kameko kills on a job for the first time.

 

It wasn’t necessary. 

 

She was deep within ROOT and on her way out when she heard screaming. POW’s were still being tortured for information she was sure they no longer had. There are three of them and six ROOT.

 

She knocks them out but it is clear that they are stronger than typical ANBU. 

 

She saves four POW’s and takes them home.

 

The other two are past saving.

 

(Shinobi would call it a mercy kill .

 

She is not a shinobi.)

 

---

 

The village adopts the four POW’s under her request and she goes to Chinami Hall.

 

Because ROOT is much larger than a typical ANBU or hunter-nin section combined, Konoha’s information scrolls are almost double that from other villages.

 

She frowns. 

 

---

 

She holds out for eight hours before she is seething

 

(Anger is fear's guardian and she doesn’t want to remember this forever .)

 

---

 

Half an hour after that and she’s on her way to Kumo.

 

---

 

She appears in the Raikage’s office under the same henge she used before and he straightens under her sharp gaze. 

 

“Get your jinchuriki and meet me at the gates.”

 

---

 

Last time she played nice. 

 

Now, she needs to destress and they aren’t tired and so she decides it's fair to pull out lightning jutsu. 

 

She darts forward.

 

---

 

A has no idea what’s happening. That is the only thing he’s sure of.

 

One moment, he was asleep and the next the alarms were blaring.

 

Then she outpaces them.

 

Then she takes on Kumo’s best three to one .

 

And wins .

 

(It was the most intense battle he’s been part of the entire war and he knows nothing about her. 

 

It takes Yugito’s comment for him to realize that she only used the Academy Three .

 

Why didn’t she kill them?)

 

Now, he’s preparing for a meeting and she just appears in his office, no signs of a shunshin, with a frankly chilling look in her ocean eyes, and tells him to meet her at the gate.

 

The ANBU didn’t even have a chance to move.

 

“Tell Bee and Yugito to meet at the gate!”

 

---

 

After kicking the snot out of each other for hours, Kameko is starting to feel better. 

 

She’s been taking blows she doesn’t need to but to see the look in their eyes when she charges through anyway is breathtaking .

 

Eventually she’s had enough and she nods.

 

“Thanks.”

 

And then Kameko is gone.

 

(She’ll be back.)

 

---

 

Between uncovering ROOT and Konoha’s secrets, sparring with her Kumo stress-relievers, Rasa flares his seal again.

 

Karura is pregnant.

 

Temari is only a month old.

 

“Arranged marriage my ass.”

 

Karura turns red and Rasa faints.

 

She cackles.

 

---

 

She finishes Konoha’s scrolls three days before her birthday.

 

After sealing them into Chinami Hall, she sits on the shore where she washed up almost twenty-eight years ago and dips in her toes.

 

She will be thirty three on May thirteenth but she is not like other thirty three year olds.

 

Rasa is her age, as is the Ino-Shika-Cho of Konoha.

 

A is three years younger than her.

 

Bee and Namikaze Minato are six. 

 

Yugito and the Ame-chibi’s are in their late teens.

 

She sighs.

 

Rasa is married and has a child and she just can’t see that for herself yet.

Maybe ever.

 

Thinking back to her red hair piece, she sighs again and flops into the sand.

 

---

 

She lays there for a long time.

 

Eventually she starts meditating underwater, using Fuuton and chakra control to keep herself dry.

 

Her eyes open, it’s time to go to Konoha.

 

---

 

Before that happens, Konoha comes to her. 

 

Tobirama smiled, “You were the one who said to come to your birthday.”

 

Kameko lets out a nervous laugh, “Well I mostly put that down because I had just realized that I forgot my 32nd birthday and it was four months earlier.”

 

Tobirama patted her head, “Then finding someone to celebrate with was the correct course of action. Just because you’ve got more than everyone else doesn’t mean you should just let time pass you by.”

 

Kameko puffs her cheeks, “I was busy . The frontlines aren’t exactly party-friendly.”

 

The before I was done with them was not implied.

 

Tobirama really needs to get his ears checked, “Of course, Kameko-chan.”

 

---

 

She temporarily keys him into the barrier and they spend her birthday on the cliff with mochi and dumplings.

 

She considers asking him for ideas for the memorial but she knows this is something she has to do herself.

 

(She alone is Chiharu-sama.)

 

---

 

They decide to walk to Konoha and the entire trip is within the Land of Fire.

 

“I am your granddaughter,” Kameko confirms.

 

“We are civilians,” he responds.

 

“I will hide my chakra but not my identity. My blue hair has never committed a crime and I am not shinobi. I am not infiltrating.”

 

He gives a reluctant tilt of his head.

 

---

 

Kameko has never entered a Hidden Village legally and among the general populous.

 

It is easy to pretend to be a civilian because she was one. In some ways she still is.

 

(Ageless at eighteen, not shinobi nor civilian. She isn’t both so she must be neither.)

 

She chats about the architecture of the walls, and after a few too many questions to the guards, they wave her in.

 

---

 

Walking into Konoha is a wave of scents and noises from the merchant district.

 

It is far larger than Suna’s and part of her recoils. The rest is ready to dive in and spend some of her ever-growing fortune on gifts to spoil her goddaughter and students rotten.

 

Before she can take a step in it’s direction, Tobirama-sensei knocks her ankles with his cane and yanks on her arm, effectively dragging her away.

 

The walk to his house is short and the quaint home they enter is nondescript but cozy.

 

She has just finished putting privacy and protection seals around her room, the innermost of the entire house, when someone knocks on the door.

 

Tobirama “hobbles” to the door and Kameko is impressed by his dedication to his cover.

 

While he answers the door, she hides in the hallway, “Kishi-san, I’m very sorry to bother you on such short notice, it's just that I forgot that I have an appointment at the hospital and there’s no one other than you that I can leave Shisui-chan with...”

 

Uchiha Kagami.

 

Before “Kishi” can reply she bounds up to the Uchiha, “Oh, we’d love to! It’s nice to meet you Uchiha-san, my name is Chiharu and I’m Jiji’s granddaughter. I’ll be in town for a bit so please take care of me!”

 

Kagami looks relieved, “Thank you very much Chiharu-san, my name is Uchiha Kagami.”

 

After passing off Shisui, he shunshin’s away.

 

She frowns, Kagami didn’t look older than thirty four but whatever disease he had would probably kill him within two years.

 

“... no one other than you…”

 

And no baby mother or wife.

 

("There is no profession that holds more grief or exhaustion than a widowed, single parent without a support network," Yuma remarks. "If you aren't in that situation, you better help. Those are the real warriors. The most ferocious guardians.")

 

That’s when Kameko decided that Uchiha Shisui will not be an orphan if she can do anything about it.

 

(She knows what it means to be alone.)

 

---

 

That night, Kameko breaks into Konoha General and does two things.

 

She reads Uchiha Kagami’s file.

 

And then she signs herself as an intermediate level medic focused on disease set to arrive in one week.

 

(Theoretically, Kameko knows just about everything about healing. Practically she only knows how to heal battle wounds. It’s time to change that.)

 

---

 

After the first day, Kameko often takes Shisui and shoo’s off Kagami to take a nap or relax with Tobirama. When their chakra mingles together to give off a peaceful and content atmosphere, Kameko realizes that Kagami recognizes his older companion.

 

Her smile hurts her cheeks. 

 

---

 

Shisui is the first, apart from Mizuko, whom Kameko does not believe needs an honorific.

 

(She loves his name.)

 

He is almost two years old and his dark eyes follow every movement. She knows he will be a genius, just like her. Bopping his nose and getting him to cross his eyes is far more adorable than it has any right to be.

 

When she sees him glance out the window she remembers there was something else she wanted to do, “Want to go to the market, Shisui?”

 

He gurgles.

 

She smiles.

 

---

 

The day is sunny and starts with Shisui on her hip.

 

When she sees a dark blue scarf with indigo wave patterns that match her eyes, she buys it and styles it into an Uzushio fashioned sling. 

 

With both of them comfortable, they proceed deeper in the market. 

 

--- 

 

It is early evening when they leave the market and Kameko has a storage seal full of gifts, some groceries, and a napping Shisui.

 

She doubts anything other than removing him from the sling will wake him and she has a few hours before it's dark out. 

 

When Kameko first arrived in Suna, she wandered for a few days and saw everything the city has to offer. She thinks it’s a good tradition.

 

She sets off.

 

---

 

Two weeks after starting her post at the hospital, Kameko has fallen into a nice routine that includes her work, babysitting Shisui and sparring four times a week in Kumo. Once a  week, she Hiraishins home and spends the day training and doing rounds in her village. 

 

(She thinks the Kumo-nin are warming up to her. 

 

They are now well aware that they aren’t getting the scrolls back, and when she tells them clearly that no one else is either, a lot of the malice disappears.) 

 

Sitting down on her break, Kameko remembers the gifts she bought the first day. Jotting down a note and wrapping it around the sealing scroll, she slips discreetly into a small closet. 

 

Summoning a Mizuko she whispers, “Can you take this to Kage-chan? Give Temari a kiss and Karura a check-up. Rasa should also have a response that will need protection seals.”

 

The Mizuko bows and Hiraishins away. 

 

Kameko stifles her giggles.

 

---

 

It’s June again, and Tsunade of the Sannin has finally noticed her work.

 

Looking over her notes, she finally sets the clipboard on the counter, “It’s creative just on the side brilliant,” she admits. “Theoretically, it should even work. What do you want in return for the hospital to be allowed to use this cure?”

 

Kameko hums, “Internationally, how much do you think it’s worth?”

 

Tsunade raises an eyebrow, “Individually, a lot. It’s not a rare disease and it affects shinobi. The concepts introduced and that could be built upon? You’d be my new rival.”

 

Kameko smiles, “I’d like my earnings to allow civilians and retired shinobi to receive treatment for free and the hospital to publish the cure and send ten copies to every Hidden Village and two to all smaller countries.”

 

Tsunade’s grin is sharp, “We can do that.”

 

---

 

Kameko awakes from her nightmare with a gasp.

 

She’s had them on and off since the invasion.

 

She starts planning.

 

Danzo’s influence in the Third War was diminished with her interference in Ame but it’s time to start tackling the larger problems. Orochimaru is possibly currently experimenting on children and The Sannin are a mess and a half. Tsunade is gearing up to leave and once she does, Orochimaru will fall into Danzo’s hands, the last straw after losing the hat.

 

Danzo hasn’t yet committed Kekkai Genkai Theft and it’s best to strike while he’s weak(er). 

 

After he’s been dealt with, she’ll wait for Naruto to be born. Kushina should be pregnant by now, finishing her first trimester.

 

She intends to interfere, but she is not going to try to stop Obito before the Kyuubi Attack. She knows that by then, Uchiha Madara is truly dead and two enemies are enough. She might need help, someone to take care of Black and White Zetsu.

 

She pouts.

 

---

 

The next day when she walks into the hospital, Tsunade is there and she grabs her arm, dragging her along, “The stupid hospital board thinks I’m trying to manipulate their sweet Chiharu-chan , just because my beside manner isn’t that nice, I’m a bully now?! They think I’m trying to make you donate all the money in one of my misguided attempts to actually help people ?!”

 

Tsunade huffs.

 

Kameko laughs, “Well you are transporting me like an unruly shinobi patient.”

 

Tsunade looked up and turned red, “Whatever! We’re here anyway, go on.”

 

With that, she shoves her inside.

 

(Kameko pretends to stumble.)

 

Putting on her brightest smile she looked up, “Hello Hospital Board-sama’s!”

 

---

 

She is out within the hour but it only took ten minutes to explain that no, Tsunade-san was not forcing me and yes, I do want to donate .

 

After that, it was just the Suna Council all over again.

 

“Oh Chiharu-chan, so kind.”

 

“Please keep up the good work!”

 

“The hospital is lucky to have you on staff.”

 

On her way out, the receptionist even gave her a lollipop and a pat on the cheek.

 

Kameko was just about fuming. She was a grown woman for kami’s sake! Even her eighteen year old body had well-developed curves in the right places, she was not a child that needed a reward.

 

She didn’t worship Tsunade like some of the hospital but she could still respect the medic that gave so much.

 

Even if she no longer dealt with bloody patients.

 

(The rumors were getting nastier by the day.)

 

Walking out past the desk, Kameko saw Tsunade waiting in one of the plastic chairs, slumped.

 

“Why don’t we get an early lunch?”

 

---

 

“Why are we leaving the village?”

 

Tsunade continued, “There’s tons of restaurants in Konoha.”

 

Kameko let out a long breath. “I only arrived in Konoha about a month ago and it still overwhelms me sometimes. It’s nice to go somewhere new sometimes.”

 

Tsunade nodded.

 

---

 

They stop at a nearby town, eat a quiet lunch and then Kameko orders a side of mochi and dango to go. Gesturing for Tsunade to follow her, they leave.

 

Kameko takes her to a stream that branches off the river where she and Tobirama-sensei chatted. Sitting on the bank, she takes her shoes off and puts her feet in the water. 

 

For a second, she just watches the water lean up and hug her ankles and then she turns to the take out bag.

 

By the time she has split the portions, Tsunade’s feet knock against hers in the water. They eat. 

 

---

 

The sun is setting the next time one of them shifts. It’s Tsunade.

 

“I don’t know any young people who can sit and enjoy the nature,” she admits.

 

Kameko nods. “I think my favorite part of Konoha so far is the Hashirama trees. Where I’m from, the nature is wild and ever changing but I see the comfort in the unmoving roots.”

 

 Tsunade hums, “Hashirama-jiji made those when I was younger.”

 

Kameko hums back.

 

---

 

Before they separate at the gates, Tsunade turns to her, “Let’s do this again.”

 

“Okay.”

 

They split.

 

---

 

Two days later, the esteemed Elder Shimura is found dead by natural causes.

 

(Kameko is a poisons mistress.)

 

Notes:

You guys just ignore the mess that is Kagami's age compared to the timeline bc ngl i really see why kishimoto just gave up on stuff making sense, the amount of math-

Chapter 8: Eight

Summary:

More of the Sannin with a small side of Shikaku Nara.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Tobirama knows Kameko is a justice firecracker; that she was probably the one to kill Danzo, but he doesn’t see how it translates to this.

 

(He ignores his relief at not having to be the one to kill him.

 

He knows Kameko wouldn’t kill him just for him anyways- not unless he asked her. And it might make him a coward, but he will not ask why.)

 

Tsunade of the Sannin, his grandniece, is on the porch looking just as surprised as he is.

 

“This is 3600 Ume Street, right?” she asks.

 

Tobirama startles, “Ah, yes, are you looking for Chiharu-chan?”

 

She inclines her head.

 

Tobirama is waving his hands and only partially understands why he is so flustered, “Ah, yes, let me get her for you!”

 

He turns tail and runs .

 

(Technically, he hobbles. Tobirama exchanged social comprehension for something god dammit- if he can’t keep up his façade for his one living relative who is he to call himself a shinobi? )

 

---

 

When Kameko greets her, she is beaming. 

 

For a moment, all Tsunade sees is Hashirama-jiji.

 

She pales. Deadeadeadeadeadtoomuchblooddeadeade-

 

Kameko’s smile drops, “Tsunade-san?”

 

Tsunade blinks. Ah .

 

(Tsunade plasters on a smile but inside she is reeling because no one else has been able to interrupt one of her panic attacks-)

 

“Would you like to take another trip?” she asks her gently. 

 

Tsunade shakes her head, straightening.

 

“I want to teach you something, come on.” 

 

---

 

When they arrive at Training Ground 36, the landscape is half even field, half rocky outcropping.

 

They sit down in the middle.

 

“I want to teach you my chakra enhanced strength technique, you have the chakra control.”

 

Kameko gapes. She has raided Konoha for all the scrolls available, including clan compounds, but Tsunade has never recorded her technique.

 

She doesn’t know it.

 

“Really?”

 

Kameko is giddy but she is also hesitant, “Why? I am not a shinobi. I am not a citizen of Konoha. Why are you trusting me?”

 

Tsunade pauses, “I want to help you protect yourself,” she says finally. 

 

Kameko’s smirk is nothing less than feral, “What are we waiting for then?”

 

---

 

Tsunade is a drill sergeant but she isn’t as close to intense as Kameko usually trains herself.

 

Tsunade thinks she’s training a civilian who can only use chakra for medical purposes.

 

Kameko is a lot more than that.

 

---

 

It takes three days for Kameko to perfect Tsunade’s strength technique. 

 

Tsunade just sighs. They keep meeting at Training Ground 36 to discuss medical procedures and together they take Konoha General by storm. They are fast friends and faster accomplices. 

 

(Tsunade would never beat Kameko in a fight.

 

They are equals anyway.)

 

---

 

Kameko is eating breakfast with Tobirama-sensei when she asks him if he wants Tsunade in his life.

 

He grunts.

 

“I wanted to return to Kagami because he had no one else,” he starts. “She has lost her precious people and all I can do is reopen wounds. My abilities do not include comforting grandnieces I hardly knew to begin with. You’ve done far more for her than I would be able to.”

 

They continue eating.

 

(He didn’t really answer the question. 

 

She will not interfere- he is past regretting his actions towards his precious people.)

 

---

 

They are by the stream and quiet when Tsunade begins her confession. 

 

“After Dan, my fiancé, died and I developed my fear of blood, I thought about killing myself.”

 

Kameko keeps her gaze on the moving water.

 

“I was useless and every time I walked into the hospital it was obvious that they knew too. Then you told me that you didn’t want money for your groundbreaking cure and it reminded me of the ideals I used to foster. Then you took me here for a day off and… I went and saw Shizune. She’s Dan’s, mine too goddammit, niece. She’s nine. And then I thought of snatching her away and leaving this cursed village that left me as the last one left.”

 

Kameko prods, just a bit.

 

“And why didn’t you?”

 

Tsunade bites her lip and smacks her feet against the top of the water. Once they’re drenched she replies, “I asked her if she was happy. She said yes. I can’t tear her away when her Will of Fire is that strong, but I can’t leave her either.”

 

(Kameko is reminded that this is the Konoha version of the Heart of Eddies. The spirit of their home.)

 

“Apart from her, do you have anyone left?”

 

Tsunade blinks, caught off guard, “What?”

 

“Do you have anyone left?”

 

They are quiet.

 

---

 

Tsunade leaves the village.

 

(When Kameko sees Kato Shizune leaving the academy, she smiles.)

 

---

 

When Tsunade returns two weeks later with a pig she’s named TonTon, Kameko greets her with a warm smile, “Okaeri.” Welcome home.

 

“Tadaima.”

 

I'm back. 

 

(I’m home.)

 

---

 

It’s Sunday and Kameko and Shisui are in the park.

 

She has found a nice hill to cloud watch on and Shisui is about to fall asleep on her stomach. 

 

(He seems mature but does not hold the energy of a toddler in his "Terrible Two's." For Kagami, she hopes that that stage hasn't already come and gone.)

 

It’s just as she’s finishing her breathing exercises and Shisui has fallen into a deep sleep when the dark haired shinobi a few feet away from them starts conversation.

 

“Nice weather we’re having.”

 

She hums agreeably.

 

“You the civilian who’s been running a storm at the hospital?”

 

Despite the phrasing, this is also not a question. Kameko has Shisui on her belly and is trying to enjoy the day.

 

She does not feel like participating in politics.

 

“I’m afraid I don’t know what you're talking about.”

 

Kameko has fifty steps planned out and she’s prepared for most responses when-

 

“How troublesome.”

 

And that’s that.

 

---

 

Kameko is on her way out of the park a few hours later when she sees Orochimaru on a bench with a haunted look on his face.

 

Kameko is sure that he never started his experiments. However, he must be riding the emotional roller coaster after Tsunade’s departure and subsequent return.

 

Ah, she realizes, he also just realized that he would’ve fallen into Danzo’s trap.

 

And now he needs to know he can help someone, something, anything.

 

Kameko sits down next to him. He tenses.

 

Rummaging through the baby bag, Kameko curls her lip at the formula before sighing. It’s not like Shisui has a mother who can breastfeed him.

 

Adding the formula to the bottle, she starts shaking.

 

“Why don’t you breastfeed him?”

 

Kameko splutters, aghast, “I’m not Shisui’s mom!”

 

They both turn a bit red at her loud proclamation. 

 

“My, my apologies.”

 

Orochimaru looks to the side, his eyes clouding over. Kameko grasps at keeping him present.

 

“It’s okay! I’m sorry for yelling. Ano… are you a shinobi?”

 

Orochimaru nods, giving nothing away, “I am.”

 

“Do you know any small Katon jutsu? Enough to warm the bottle?”

 

(She decidedly does not contemplate how this can go wrong.)

 

Orochimaru had not relaxed during the conversation but the final question has clearly caught him off guard.

 

“You… you would trust me with a child’s nutrition and nourishment?”

 

Kameko smiles a bright Uzumaki smile, “I’ll be right here,” she teases.

 

Orochimaru gives her a small smile back.

 

---

 

Shortly after Shisui is fed, Orochimaru dismisses himself and she leaves the park. 

 

When she walks into Tobirama-sensei’s house, she can feel the elation in the air.

 

“Chiharu!”

 

Tobirama beckons her forward. Passing Shisui to his father she steps further into the room.

 

“What happened?”

 

Tobirama gestures excitedly towards Kagami who turns a bit bashful at the attention. 

 

“Well, I went to my check-up today but when I walked in Tsunade was waiting for me…”

 

---

 

Because he is in his mid to late thirties and is already technically retired, Kagami has made no efforts to be reinstated.

 

His clan doesn’t entirely agree but Kagami is as adamant as Kameko to allow Shisui at least one parent. 

 

So it isn’t entirely unsurprising when he bows ninety degrees and asks her to support him at one of the meetings. 

 

He is committing a taboo by inviting her to a Clan meeting but between her, “Kishi,” and Shisui she has the largest reputation in Konoha because of her work at the hospital.

 

(The only ones who know that it was her who created the cure are Tsunade, the hospital board and, apparently, the Jonin Commander.) 

 

She agrees.

 

The meeting is in one month.

 

---

 

The next time they are at the stream, Tsunade tells her that they are friends.

 

“And I want you to meet those precious to me.”

 

With that, she pricks her thumb and cries Kuchiyose no Jutsu!

 

A slug poofs into the clearing and climbs onto Tsunade’s shoulder and she introduces them.

 

“This is Katsuyu, my summons.”

 

Kameko knows she is being introduced to Tsunade’s main summon but Katsuyu is also a boss summon. She folds into a deep bow.

 

Staying there, “It is an honor to meet your acquaintance, Katsuyu-hime-sama.”

 

Katsuyu let out a small, tinkling laugh, “Hello, Chiharu-sama.”

 

Kameko’s eyes flicker up, “Do you know of me?”

 

Katsuyu shakes her head, “Only your title, word of you is spreading there as well. Summons from you-know-where are celebrating your survival and Ibuse sings you praises.”

 

Nodding slowly, Kameko raises only so she can bow again, “Thank you for your insight Katsuyu-hime-sama.”

 

Katsuyu nods, “Is it a secret?”

 

Kameko hesitates, “For now, yes. But not forever.”

 

Katsuyu nods and turns to Tsunade, “Hime, it is good to see you well. I will dismiss myself.”

 

Tsunade raises an eyebrow, looking between the two of them, “... Okay.”

 

---

 

Tsunade does not ask the questions that are no doubt dominating her thoughts and they walk back to the village quietly.

 

Kameko is grateful.

 

---

 

Two days later, around eight am and after an intense spar in Kumo, Kameko tidies herself and heads to the Uchiha Compound to pick up Shisui.

 

While killing Danzo before the Kyuubi Attack mitigated the majority of the damage to their reputation, the Uchiha’s stiffness and traditionalism is not charming and Danzo has already had rumors circulating in recent years. 

 

The police shoulder darker glares and heavier rumors. 

 

As someone who works in the hospital, many know her in passing. So if she uses her reputation and takes busy roads on the way there, it’s her business.

 

(There is very little she won’t do for her precious people and Shisui has made that list a long time ago.)

 

---

 

On their walk, while Shisui is practicing talking, they bump into Tsunade. 

 

“Hello,” she greets. “Say hi to Tsunade, Shisui.”

 

He garbles.

 

Patting his head tenderly, she looks up and Tsunade blinks, “I read your record and I know you’re thirty-three, but he looks nothing like you,” she squints. "You know, he looks pretty Uchiha..." she wiggles her eyebrows.

 

Ignoring the comment because it was stupid, just like Hanzo-kun for giving the Sannin a cool name because all of them are clearly a club of losers, Kameko switches topics.

 

“How is Shizune-chan?”

 

Tsunade brightens, “I was going to pick her up and take her to get brown rice! Want to come?”

 

Kameko hums. She and Shisui had no plans.

 

“What do you think, Shisui?”

 

He smiles and then continues garbling. 

 

“Let’s meet Shizune-chan then.”

 

---

 

Shizune is half way through Academy and dead set on becoming a poison mistress and medic.

 

With a side of kenjutsu and genjutsu.

 

Kameko could get behind a girl like her. 

 

---

 

Because parks are the best part of Konoha, they buy snacks and head over.

 

Scanning her surroundings, Kameko notices Orochimaru on his bench.

 

“Shizune-chan, do you want to go look at this cool hill? It’s perfect for cloud watching.”

 

“You sound like a Nara.”

 

“Is that so? I’m new to Konoha, is that a clan or…”

 

And with that, she steers Shizune away just as Tsunade recognizes her teammate. 

 

With the jerk of a chin and a  responding nod, Tsunade stomps across the playground.

 

Kameko turns back to Shizune. 

 

---

 

When Shizune’s on the swings and Shisui is quiet on her lap, he restarts their earlier conversation.

 

“Fixing things as a hobby, huh? The Sannin are pretty troublesome- one of them isn’t even in the village.”

 

Kameko snorts. She could maybe go against a Nara in a game of wits and it’s a coin toss who would win. The clan head who doubles as the Jonin Commander? Not going to happen.

 

So she beams at him, “Y’know, mister, I still don’t know what you’re talking about.”

 

She doesn’t want to motivate him but Kameko knows how to be stubborn. This seems like a safe default answer. 

 

He sighs, “Troublesome. It’d be nice if you could fix that train wreck, though.”

 

Kameko’s smile turns a bit more genuine.

 

He blinks, clears his throat, then rolls over.

 

---



When Orochimaru approaches with Tsunade at his side, she smiles.

 

He looks very, very surprised.

 

You’re Tsunade’s new friend?”

 

Kameko snorts, “You sound like a possessive five year old, shinobi-san.”

 

His ears flush a pretty pink. 

 

Tsunade interrupts, “This is Chiharu. She arrived in Konoha about a month ago. And apparently that’s enough time for everyone to know her other than me and Shizune. Including my summons.”

 

She scowls.

 

Kameko laughs nervously, aware that the Nara was most definitely not asleep like he was pretending to be. 

 

Orochimaru looks intrigued, “Katsuyu knows her? How?”

 

Tsunade huffs, “She wouldn’t tell me.”

 

The Nara’s chakra fluctuates.

 

While not entirely attached to her cover, that scares Kameko more than the two Sannin staring down at her. 

 

Then again, Rasa’s response should be coming any day.

 

She smirks.

 

---

 

Orochimaru and Tsunade have started to lean on each other but oddly enough, they lean on her too.

 

Kameko doesn’t mind.

 

---

 

Kameko and Tsunade plan to go to the stream when they bump into Orochimaru.

 

Kameko stays silent.

 

Tsunade invites him.

 

She smiles.

 

(Their time at the stream is no longer entirely quiet.)

 

---

 

While Kameko has never personally met Jiraiya, she has heard a bit about him from both the Ame-chibi’s and his old teammates. 

 

He’s also tried to recruit some of her clones for his budding spy network.

 

Within five years, it will be a decent one.

 

(Mizuko has not earned the title of The Best lightly.)

 

Jiraiya of the Sannin is on his way back to Konoha.

Notes:

I really like this update schedule so updates will be on either Sunday or Monaday from now on! Side stories will probably come out as I write them and when they're timely.

Chapter 9: Nine

Summary:

Jiraiya and Uzumaki Kushina join the fray.

Or

Minato and Shikaku tag team with varying levels of success.

Chapter Text

Minato startles when the door bursts open.

 

“Sensei…?”

 

Jiraiya is slightly panting, “I have news.”

 

---

 

After calling in Shikaku and letting Jiraiya explain how one of his informants saw a Suna entourage bragging about their ability to carry “a message of the highest importance from the Kazekage to Konoha” Minato groans. 

 

The Third War has just finished but Suna is the only Hidden Village with enough resources to go to war. 

 

Almost anything they demand, Minato will have to give them.

 

He swears. 

 

They have two days.

 

---

 

The closer Rasa’s response gets to Konoha, the more giddy Kameko gets. 

 

She could Hiraishin to Suna but exchanging letters is fun and this also helps fill her quota of causing mischief for Kage.

 

(And that terribly perspective Jonin Commander.)

 

It’s totally worth blowing part of her cover to smithereens. 

 

She giggles. 

 

Orochimaru raises an eyebrow, “Do I want to know?”

 

She giggles harder, “Just waiting on some mail, Orochi-chan!”

 

His brow twitches.

 

Tsunade snickers. 

 

(Kameko calls her Kaa-sama. Shizune followed her lead.)

 

---

 

Kameko is examining fish at the market when an ANBU drops into her path. 

 

“You are to report to the Hokage’s Office immediately,” they drone.

 

(They are tense.)

 

Kameko hums. 

 

“I’ll have to take my groceries home.”

 

“I will do it,” the ANBU sticks out their hand.

 

Kameko laughs in their face, “I don’t think so.”

 

He can’t force her because of her affiliation with Suna documented on her papers and now with some type of additional proof that she knows the Kazekage personally. 

 

The Mizuko’s told her it’s some sort of small box.

 

(She’s ridiculously excited. She isn’t known for patience.)

 

While the ANBU waits outside, she doesn’t dawdle in putting away her groceries. 

 

---

 

Half an hour later, she walks into the Hokage’s office. Jiraiya and Shikaku flank their Hokage.

 

Shikaku blinks, “ You’re Lady Chiharu-sama?”

 

Kameko tsks, “Konoha shinobi express their surprise very rudely.”

 

Minato blinks. 

 

“Ah, it’s very nice to meet you, Chiharu-san.”

 

A wicked glint enters her eye, it’s time to play.

 

“Hello, Namikaze-san. I assume you have my mail?”

 

“Yes, Chiharu-san. I’m afraid it’s covered in some very dangerous seals and it would be disrespectful and dismissive of me to give that to anyone.”

 

She blinks in faux-confusion, “Namikaze-san, you are aware that I can open the seals?”

 

Minato’s eyes narrow, “What if an accident happens? Would you be able to escape the fall out? You are, after all, a civilian.”

 

Kameko’s lips curl, “I promise I’d be able to- I’ll even open it with no one around.”

 

“Ah, but how I can I be sure that you’d be fast enough?”

 

“How about a race, Namikaze-san?”

 

The room’s other participant’s freeze.

 

“This kid wants to race you ?” Jiraiya bursts.

 

Kameko ignores him, “If I win, you give me my package. If I lose, I’m obviously not fast enough to be around such a dangerous parcel and it will remain in your safe hands.”

 

She has opened what seems like an easy solution.

 

“It’s a deal, Chiharu-san.”

 

Checkmate .

 

(Shikaku is the only one who looks wary.)

 

---

 

The four of them, with an entourage of ANBU, walk to a nearby training ground.

 

“We will go from this line,” Minato draws a line in the dirt, “to this tree. Whoever grabs the ribbon from this branch first, wins.”

 

Kameko nods. She saw him plant his Hiraishin seal on the ribbon. Walking over, she subtly taps hers on the other side. 

 

Shikaku stands by the tree, “Start!”

 

The race is over in one second. 

 

Kameko wins in less than half a second.

 

Sitting on the branch waving her legs with the ribbon in her hand, she teases the gaping men.

 

“The thing about Hiraishin, Goldilocks-san, is that it shouldn’t be a flash . It should be a trail .”

 

And with that, a dazed ANBU passes her her prize.

 

She squeals.

 

Laughing at the only thing visible apart from the seal, Kameko reads outloud, “Lady Chiharu-sama.”

 

She pats the gift fondly, “Kage-chan’s the best.”

 

And with those parting words, Kameko’s gone.

 

---

 

The clearing unfreezes with her departure.

 

Jiraiya starts yelling about how is that possible and who even is she and I was only gone two months!

 

Minato straightens but his eyes are blinking rapidly.

 

The ANBU are twitching.

 

Shikaku sighs, “Troublesome.”

 

---

 

Rasa’s package includes a letter that starts with Sensei, I hold no ill will against Konoha but I feel your mischievousness has infected me...

 

(Kameko laughs so hard she cries.)

 

---

 

Now that Kameko’s cover has a gaping hole and Kagami is healed, she resigns from the hospital.

 

Tsunade and Orochimaru take her for dinner. Sitting in an isolated booth in the back of the restaurant, Kameko slumps.

 

“Alright guys, I have some news. Afterwards,” she looks at Tsunade, “you can drink as much as you want.”

 

Orochimaru stiffens, “Are you… leaving?” 

 

Waving her hands, Kameko denies the budding interrogation, “No, I probably won’t leave until at least mid-October.” 

 

Nodding and relaxing a fraction, Orochimaru waves for her to continue. 

 

“Let me start with this- I am not a shinobi. I have never received a hitai ai or served a Kage unless I chose to. That being said, I know shinobi skills. Tsunade has taught me her strength technique, but I am aware of others.”

 

Kameko pauses, “I keep secrets. Very few people know anything about my past and while you are my friends, this secret is mine to bear. That being said, whatever your village has already discovered, I will tell you. Today, I revealed my Hiraishin to your Hokage and Nara Shikaku was already aware of me- supposedly knew that we were tag teaming the hospital reforms.”

 

Orochimaru nods slowly, “Okay.”

 

Tsunade pats her hand, “We have secrets, too. Honestly, it makes me feel better it wasn’t a total novice who was immediately on par with me. We’re going to be here as long as you need us, Chiharu. You gave me back my home, something I never imagined I’d be able to reclaim.”

 

Kameko suppresses her wince. 

 

“But I’m not surprised Shikaku knows,” she continued. “His clan runs R&D and they work closely with the hospital.”

 

With that, the conversation lightens and they eat.

 

(Tsunade doesn’t drink more than one bottle of sake.)

 

---

 

While the Hokage is scheming, Kameko starts her day with a spar in Kumo.

 

When they are all panting on the ground, Yugito turns to her. 

 

“Darui says he wants to come see what all the fuss is about,” she tells her.

 

Kameko nods seriously, “And who is Darui?”

 

They sweat-drop. 

 

“He’s a student of the Third Raikage, a bit younger than Yugito, but one of our strongest fighters,” A ends proudly.

 

Kameko blows out air, “Okay, bring him next time and I’ll see if I want to keep him.”

 

She stands up, “Ready for round two?”

 

They charge.

 

---

 

Her friendship with Tsunade and Orochimaru has only grown with her mini-confession. Most of their time is spent at the stream or eating, but on occasion they simply take TonTon on a walk in the forest.

 

“Orochi-chan, I love you and your brilliant ideas with all my heart but there is no way I’m feeding Shisui something experimental-”

 

“Chiharu-”

 

“Breast milk is always best, especially at a young age-”

 

“The orphans, pay attention -”

 

“The uses could be abused-”

 

“And profitable, now that-”

 

Kameko giggles as the Sannin start yelling over each other. They pause at the noise then turn to her. Tsunade has a bashful grin and Orochimaru tips back onto his heels, looking away.

 

She doesn’t miss the upward turn of his lips. The smile reaches his eyes.

 

(For now, Kameko is also happy.)

 

---

 

It’s evening and she’s with Shisui at the park.

 

The sky is a mirage of warm colors and the sun has just dipped under the horizon when Shisui starts fussing.

 

An hour earlier she had wrapped him in a thick blanket over the scarf and now she adjusts it to cover his toes. 

 

Uzushio music focused on their ferocious sea and strong cliffs but there were songs of all types and Kameko remembers every one she heard, lullabies included.

 

The thing is, they are impulsive . They live in the moment.

 

Which leads to a culture where there’s excessive freestyling. 

 

So making up a lullaby on the spot was not uncommon, and she was taught everything there is to be taught about freestyle development. That doesn’t mean she’ll miss a chance to stick to the classics when she hasn’t sang them in so long .

 

“Fish in the shallows

In clean, clear water

Fight the whirlpools or

Fight the storm

I believe in your strength

To bend the tides

And reflect the sky

Changing time

To protect 

To continue

Little fish, swim upstream.”

 

Patting Shisui’s back she adds the tiniest amount of medical chakra to lull him into a deep sleep.

 

Then she looks up at her audience.

 

---

 

Uzumaki Kushina was six when she left Uzushiogakure and twelve when it fell.

 

She is twenty-seven when she officially meets Chiharu-sama.

 

---

 

Kameko knew there were still a few Uzumaki scattered in the wind, hell, she was sure Nagato was at least half.

 

But to see a gaping Uzumaki, no doubt lured by the lyrics of the lullaby, in the middle of Konoha wearing a hitai ai and flanked by two regal but curious looking Uchiha’s is not something she was entirely prepared for.

 

Straightening and making sure her voice betrays nothing, she opens her mouth, “Can I help you?”

 

There’s a pause, Uzumaki is still gaping, and the Uchiha female smiles politely, “We apologize for interrupting-”

 

“You’re the Chiharu-sama,” the Uzumaki whispers.

 

Kameko tilts her head, “Perhaps.”

 

“No!” the Uzumaki protests, “I was six when I left Uzushio, you were twelve, but I know that coloring! You were the only one on the whole island to be Blessed by the Land! I know it’s you, dattebane!”

 

Tears are springing to her eyes, “I’m sorry, I’m pregnant, dattebane- six months.”

 

Kameko hums. She hasn’t heard a voice tick in a long time. 

 

She loves her collected bits of Uzushio, but this Uzumaki is a ninja of Konoha .

 

Even as Chiharu-sama, she has no obligation to this woman.

 

“Congratulations,” she says slowly. “Good night.”

 

She leaves.

 

---

 

Kushina watches Chiharu-sama leave, tears drying on her cheeks.

 

She hiccups.

 

Mikoto pats her back, but the curiosity is obvious in her eyes. Fugaku leads them to a bench. 

 

Kushina takes a deep breath, “I’m sorry you guys, I know we were going to get food but when I heard that song… “

 

Mikoto shushes her, “It’s fine Kushina just… who was that?”

 

Fugaku nods, “And there’s no way that girl was older than us, Uzumaki longevity or otherwise.”

 

Kushina sighs, “I don’t know about her appearance but she should be thirty two? Three? You guys know how Uzushio fell when we were kids and we thought no one was left?”

 

They nod.

 

“Well, I know at least she made it because there’s no way the village let her out during the war. She was the most important person, the legacy holder. A few years before I was born, the Village chose her to learn everything Uzushio had to offer. She doesn’t have Uzumaki red but they said that before she was selected for the title she did and then she drowned and came out like that. She was Uzushiogakure’s precious Lady of One Thousand Springs who was Blessed by the Land. Honestly,” Kushina lets out a weak chuckle, “I forgot all about her until I saw her.”

 

Fugaku rubs his nose, “Well, you did think she was dead.”

 

Mikoto slaps his arm.

 

Suddenly Kushina straightens, “What if Minato already knew?

 

Her hair starts floating.

 

----

 

Kushina isn’t sure if the no, Kushina, what? is a relief or not.

 

Sitting in the Hokage’s office with take out in the middle, the four of them ponder over the new information. 

 

If she’s a shinobi or an infiltrator then this is an awful breach of security.

 

If she’s not, then Kushina might have a chance at family and knowing more about her culture. 

 

Mikoto hums, “We should have ANBU watch her.”

 

Minato nods.

 

“What about Kakashi?” Fugaku suggests.

 

Mikoto nods, “You guys miss him and he’s still fairly young. A break from ANBU will be good for him.”

 

Minato beams.

 

---

 

While Jiraiya is out catching up with his teammates, Minato is split between learning more about this so-called Uzushiogakure Legacy Holder and the blue haired medic who apparently also knows Hiraishin . And the Kazekage.

 

And it’s a better version.

 

(Minato isn’t pouting.)

 

Shikaku walks in and when he sees Minato’s face, his lips twitch upwards.

 

“You know,” he drawls. “I’ve met the medic. Her name’s Chiharu.”

 

Minato blinks, “... is that so?”

 

“I think it’s a wonderful time for lunch, wouldn’t you agree?”

 

They share the same wickedly curious glint in their eyes.

 

---

 

Finding 3600 Ume street is easy.

 

The hard part is that Chiharu isn’t there.

 

Her grandfather opens the door and bows, “Hokage-sama, Jonin Commander-sama.”

 

Minato waves his hands, “None of that villager-san. We were wondering if Chiharu-san is home?”

 

Kishi chuckles, “The only time she’s home is to make me food, such a sweet one. She even watches my friend's child,” he shakes his head fondly.

 

Minato doesn’t miss that he gives away exactly nothing.

 

“Ah, well, do you know where we could find her?”

 

Kishi pauses, tapping his finger to his chin.

 

“I’m afraid that since she quit the hospital, I don’t know her schedule as well as I used to.”

 

Shikaku has been looking at the sky during their conversation when he suddenly jolts.

 

“Pardon us, Sir, we’ll be on our way now,” and with that, Minato is grabbed by the arm and dragged away.

 

He’s excited , Minato bites his lip to keep in his laughter. But why?

 

When they’re down the block and heading towards Konoha’s biggest park, he explains, “When I met her, it’s because she was cloud watching in the same spot I usually do. It’s the perfect day for cloud watching and usually at this time of day, she’d have it to herself.”

 

And with that clue revealed, they’re off.

 

---

 

“I thought you’d come for me earlier,” Kameko admits, not moving her eyes. “I made it obvious and everything.”

 

Shikaku hums.

 

“Moved on from causing chaos at the hospital to the Tower?”

 

She grins and bats her eyelashes, “I’m afraid I don’t know what you’re talking about, shinobi-san. You must be really important to stand next to the Hokage, though.”

 

“Like you don’t know who I am,” he deadpans.

 

Her eyes gleam, “Is that arrogance I hear?”

 

“Not the kind that’ll kill me during war.”

 

Kameko’s face expresses nothing. 

 

“If you say so.”

 

Minato doesn’t even know how the conversation got to this point but he figures it's a fine place to interrupt.

 

“Excuse me, Chiharu-san, or.. Do you have a last name?”

 

She sniffs, “Don’t bring your politics here, Goldilocks-san, just ask what you want to ask. Or I’ll leave.”

 

Minato isn’t quite sure how to react to that but figures that’s the best opening he’s had in a long time.

 

“Are you a danger to Konoha?”

 

“Hmm, no.”

 

“Why are you here?”

 

“Visiting, fixing things here and there.”

 

“Are you Kushina’s Chiharu-sama?”

 

Kameko snorts in her mind, he’s asking all the right questions the wrong way. “Kushina’s,” as if.

 

“No.”

 

“Would you give consent to an ANBU overseer?”

 

Kameko quirks an eyebrow, “They would not be allowed inside the house unless invited and if they can’t keep up then that’s their problem.”

 

Minato lets out a sigh of relief.

 

“What is your relationship with the Kazekage?”

 

Kameko purrs, “Well, being as well acquainted as I am with his wife’s body,” she blinks pretending to realize something. “You probably aren’t ready for the answer to your question.”

 

Shikaku huffs. Minato raises his eyebrows but doesn’t continue the line of questioning.

 

“What are your skills?”

 

Kameko frowns, “Yeah, no. Nice try.”

 

Minato frowns. She knows exactly what position she’s put him in. She’s in Konoha and therefore technically under his authority. And yet, killing her could have unknown repercussions with Suna that they can’t risk and taking her to T&I could possibly work but with her Hiraishin it could also backfire badly. 

 

His eyes glint, if nothing else, he can order her to leave. 

 

Kameko pats the grass next to her, “Come on Shinobi-san, it’s a wonderful day to watch clouds.”

 

He immediately flops, sprawling, “My name is Nara Shikaku.”

 

Kameko hums, “Will you earn a nickname?”

 

Minato is getting slightly annoyed with the obscure references that border on riddles, but part of him is relieved. Being able to sit quietly is something that has been gone from his life for far too long.

 

Sinking down into the sun-warmed grass is a wonderful feeling and he lets out a contented sigh. 

 

Chiharu knocks him with her ankles, “Don’t burn out Goldilocks-san, it won't be pretty.”

 

He raises an eyebrow. She blows a raspberry.

 

Shikaku makes a choked sound before sombering, “One last thing, how did Tsunade’s summon know you?”

 

Minato forms a million questions at once, “I know you said you meet while cloud watching but that only happened twice, did you have a lengthy heart to heart?”

 

Shikaku opens his mouth but Chiharu beats him to it, deadpanning, “He eavesdropped.”

 

Minato blinks then laughs, “T&I’s Best Interrogator's best friend can’t eavesdrop unnoticed?”

 

Chiharu smirks, “Can’t expect even your best worker bee’s to be perfect, Goldilocks-san.”

 

She says it teasingly, her eyes are unguarded, so why did that feel like a threat?

 

(Kameko doesn’t forget anything she hears, sees or reads.

 

Ever.)

 

“Anyways,” she continues, “I’m not entirely sure of that answer myself. I don’t have summons.”

 

Minato tilts his head at her and she didn’t miss that they boxed her in on both sides.

 

Unfortunately for them, she is well versed in all types of psychology. 

“There are two things we can do. We can either take a nap and enjoy the sun for a few hours,” she raises one finger, “Or we can spar without Hiraishin and I might tell you where you are compared to others- only if you suck really badly.”

 

All that comes to Minato’s mind is keep your friends close but your enemies closer but that isn’t entirely helpful since he doesn’t know where Chiharu falls on that scale. Either way, he hasn’t had a good spar in a little under a month…

 

He shares a look with Shikaku who groans, “We spar for no more than two hours. I haven’t had an afternoon to cloud watch in actual years, tch.”

 

Chiharu nudges him, “It’ll be fun, I swear .”

 

---

 

Half an hour later, Shikaku is panting and whining about troublesome woman, this is not fun .

 

Kameko cackles, “I never said it’d be fun for you!

 

His brow twitches.

 

Minato’s eyes are twinkling, because of course it’s a bad thing that she’s obviously a security threat but ohmygosh a good sparring partner.

 

Kameko glances at him and snorts.

 

---

 

After a full hour Shikaku is genuinely trying to kill her, if only because he knows that he can’t.

 

Minato isn’t a one trick pony, with wonderful natural speed and strong taijutsu and kenjutsu.

 

She turns him black and blue anyways. 

 

She’s stuck to Suna taijutsu, her speed, and shurikenjutsu but Minato hasn’t managed more than glancing blows, usually due to openings Shikaku created. They aren’t on par with the Kumo team, but for the two of them they’re exceeding expectations. 

 

---

 

After an hour and a half, Shikaku taps out and Minato begs for her to use Hiraishin. When she raises an eyebrow and mentions how, “we only met last week and you already want me to use my toys? ” he flushes a deep red but doesn’t rescind his request.

 

She grins, “Okay.”

 

(There’s nothing like learning about someone through a spar.)

 

---

 

When they’re laying on the grass again, Kameko hums and asks the question that’d been on her mind since halfway through the spar, “Have you guys heard of a Darui of Kumo?”

 

She’s sure that if she asks Mizuko he wouldn’t be a surprise anymore, which would be no fun, but she doesn’t want to go in completely blind. 

 

Shikaku tenses minutely, “Why do you ask?”

 

Kameko thinks about her answer but decides the truth just edges them slowly into realizing they can’t control her, which might not necessarily be a good thing, but blindsiding people is for cowards. 

 

“I’m supposed to meet him tomorrow.”

 

Minato’s hand twitches, “What?”

 

Kameko nods with a straight face, “I have a spar with him tomorrow morning, we have some common acquaintances.”

 

Minato decides to leave the mystery that is Chiharu for tomorrow and Shikaku must agree because he announces that he’s taking a nap.

 

Kameko pouts, they didn’t tell her anything .

 

Rude Konoha shinobi.



Chapter 10: Ten

Summary:

Kumo, sad!minato, and the Sannin hunt for a wild Kameko. Also, Suna and the Uchiha (but not together.)

Notes:

would recommended reading "The Sannin" from the 2nd pt of the series (Additional Content) before this

not necessary though- enjoy <3

Chapter Text

The next morning, Kameko leaves for Kumo a bit early. She doesn’t purposely come with expectations, but the fact that Minato and Shikaku recognized Darui by name is a promising sign. 

 

When she arrives in the rocky outcropping, she spots him chatting with Yugito.

 

“Hello,” she calls. 

 

They both twitch, but Yugito greets her with a smile, “Hey! Darui this is The Sparring Partner, we call her Ao, and this,” she looks at her, waving a hand to showcase the teen, “Is Darui.”

 

She isn’t about to repeat her greeting and look socially inept, even if her actual experience apart from teasing and minor therapy is a bit rusty. He nods.

 

Well.

 

Not very wild Kumo shinobi

 

“Do you want to spar?”

 

He nods again, just as languidly, “Don’t make it dull.”

 

Kameko huffs, “Right back at you.”

 

Yugito giggles and pats him on the shoulder, “Have fun.”

 

---

 

Darui likes sparring strong opponents, even if he can’t win. 

 

Ao winning was not unexpected, especially after hearing Boss grumble about her. Bee rapped about her mad skills and he knew Yugito had a minor case of Kunoichi-worship.

 

(Not that she would ever admit it, her cool façade was impressive.)

 

But afterwards the calculating glint in her eye was a bit unnerving and he found himself tensing when she opened her mouth. He knew he did his best but what if she told him he was trash and didn’t deserve-

 

“How old are you?”

 

Darui twitches, “...almost seventeen.”

 

She’s either ANBU level in misdirection or that was the question on her mind the entire time. And he had no idea which one.

 

(If a chill goes down his spine, he is a brave shinobi of Kumogakure no Sato and it must’ve been because of the wind.)

 

Yugito snorts, “He’s sixteen-and-a-half, Ao.”

 

He feels himself flush but keeps his features neutral. 

 

Ao slumps dramatically, “To be young.”

 

(Kameko doesn’t feel older than eighteen. She may know more but she does not harvest the wisdom of someone approaching death or the weary bones that force others to sit and think.

 

For all her vast knowledge, there are some things she is fated to never know.)

 

Darui raises an eyebrow, “You don’t look older than Yugito?”

 

She hums, “Technically, I’m thirty three. I’d say I age well though.”

 

The clearing freezes.

 

“Must be lying, your fighting style is trying-”

 

“You look like a kid-”

 

Yugito makes a noise reminiscent of a small animal.

 

Ao claps her hands together, “Yeah, yeah, moaning and groaning is not what I came here for-”

 

An ANBU interrupts her, kneeling before the A, “I apologize for interrupting, Raikage-sama. There was an accident and Mabui-san is requesting your presence. There are multiple injuries.”

 

A nods, “Very well, I’ll be there shortly.”

 

“So will I,” Kameko decides.

 

The Kumo nin scrutinize her, surprised and slightly weary of the serious face they’ve never seen before. 

 

“I’m a talented medic and I have no motives apart from healing your wounded,” she stares at A, “Do you have any objections?”

 

He hesitates for a split moment, but his people always come first, “You will rush back with me,” he turns to his comrades, “It’s up to you if you follow us or keep training.”

 

And with that, they’re gone.

 

---

 

Four hours later, Kameko’s washing her hands after her third and final surgery.

 

She is proud of the lives she saved.

 

Because she never goes anywhere without a few storage seals, she has some pocket money and heads to the hospital’s gift shop to buy her patients some recovery tokens. Kameko knows Uzushio flower language and some basics for other places, but minor differences stop her from buying flowers- men and children wouldn’t appreciate them much anyways.

 

The “accident” had included a trading caravan, defensive genin team and a few rouge nin, ultimately resulting in one critical genin, jounin-sensei and the head of the trading caravan. Kumo’s medics were decent, but Hashirama was the first to develop iryojutsu and they simply can’t compare to Konoha’s. 

 

In the end, she decides on thin, silver chains with her Hiraishin seal imprinted on it.

 

(Many ninja hold her seal and she cannot save all of them. That doesn’t mean she doesn’t often disappear to end fights- Suna’s is no longer the only Bingo Book to have her description in it.

 

She’s not sure how much longer she’ll remain relatively under the radar.)

 

Leaving the gifts with the nurses, she sets out to tell the Raikage she’s leaving.

 

---

 

A is waiting in the lobby and approaches her with his lips in a thin line. 

 

The walk to his office is quiet, and Kameko does not forget how she often explores when she’s in a new place. For now, she simply follows. 

 

---

 

When the ANBU are dismissed and she is sitting across from him, she observes.

 

Her sparring partner is a shinobi who wants to get stronger for his people. The Raikage is tired and confused, but grateful.

 

Unlike most Kage’s, A and the Raikage are not very different at all. 

 

And in his office, she will respect him.

 

(He has the Heart of Eddies.)

 

“You are pardoned for the removal of Kumo’s scrolls for your assistance in saving three lives.”

 

He does not yell, but he is serious while respecting her as an equal. A soft smile appears on her face, “You may call me Chiharu.”

 

He blinks.

 

“I would like to train your hospital in pediatrics and disease,” she continues, “While I do value shinobi, the innocent should always have the best treatment. Does Kumo accept my help?”

 

A is tense, obviously flummoxed, but nods immediately.

 

“Chiharu-sensei,” he begins. She raises one hand, “One moment. Any payment I should receive for my services should be used to pay for people who cannot pay for themselves. That being said, I have a condition. I do not want to hear about any bloodline theft. Period. Are we clear?”

 

(Children deserve their parents.)

 

His eyes narrow. The information she has access to is invaluable and seemingly endless. 

 

They sit while he thinks it over and Kameko waits patiently.

 

“Very well.”

 

She nods, “The war is over unless the Kage choose to start another,” her eyes are blades and her words are a warning, “Do not be so ignorant that you forget that no one wins.”

 

--- 

 

After the council with Shikaku to gather everything they know about Chiharu; Hiraishin, medical jutsu, an affiliation to Uzushiogakure and Suna, acquainted with Tsunade’s summons, it’s slightly terrifying to know that even with just the first two skills she is easily S-rank. 

 

Security risks.

 

And there is an abundance of mystery surrounding her. Who knows what else she has up her sleeves?

 

Leaning back in his chair, Minato sighs as he feels his sensei’s chakra coming closer at an alarming speed. Jiraiya bursts through the door a minute later. 

 

“Minato, you can’t use the back up plan!”

 

“What?”

 

“The back up plan! For Chiharu, you can’t kick her out of Konoha.”

 

Minato frowns, slightly upset as his only plan gets trampled on in front of him. He likes plans.

 

“Why?”

 

Jiraiya looks uncharacteristically serious, “You’d lose the Sannin.”

 

Of all that Minato expected, that wasn’t it. His brain stutters, “Even you?”

 

Jiraiya is grim, “Yes.”

 

“But what does that have to do with her?” Minato presses, ignoring the hurt Jiraiya’s blunt words caused.

 

Jiraiya suddenly looks very tired, “She did what I couldn’t. If she leaves, Orochimaru and Tsunade-hime are going to follow her. I love you kid, but I don’t think I can ever leave my team again. We need each other.”

 

He sighs, “And if you kick her out, they won’t ever come back.”

 

Minato lets out a groan and hits his head against his desk.

 

She isn’t fighting me and yet she’s already won.

 

“When Kakashi reports back from his mission, bring him to me.”

 

---

 

After returning from Kumo and taking a shower, Kameko finally gets around to writing her response to Rasa. Kankuro should be born any day now and unless he chooses the same day as the Uchiha Clan Meeting next week, she’ll be there immediately. 

 

Moving to the kitchen, she begins preparing dinner. While washing the rice, Tobirama sits by the counter, “The Hokage on a goose chase one day, the Sannin the next?” he teases.

 

Kameko tilts her head, “What are you talking about? I was in Kumo most of the day.”

 

Tobirama simply raises an eyebrow, “They all came knocking today, I think they want you to meet Jiraiya.”

 

“Ah.”

 

“What’s this about Kumo?”

 

She smirks, “Well you know how I said I found sparring partners…” 

 

---

 

While she isn’t avoiding them, it takes the Sannin three days to find her between her trips to Kumo and watching Shisui in the compound. 

 

As it is, Shizune spots her first and bellows, “Kaa-sama, I found her!”

 

Three heads snap towards her immediately and Kameko regrets not finding them earlier. Heading over, she greets them with a simple “hello.”

 

Tsunade’s brow ticks, “We’ve been looking all over for you!”

 

Kameko laughs freely, “I’ve been in Kumo more, recently. Whats up?”

 

(Something in Kameko’s soul relaxes at being able to tell the truth to her friends.

 

Her chest is warm.)

 

Tsunade and Orochimaru flank Jiraiya as he steps forward, “We saw each other in Minato’s office, but it is an honor to meet you, Chiharu-san.”

 

She nods but does not continue the formalities, “Is there anywhere the rest of you want to go to catch up?”

 

Tsunade looks at Orochimaru who smiles gently, “We made up at the stream, Chiharu. I would prefer to go there.”

 

Kameko simply turns to Shizune, “Will you be joining us?”

 

Shizune smiles at the invitation but shakes her head, “Now that I’ve had lunch I’m going to do my homework, okay Kaa-sama?”

 

Tsunade ruffles her hair, “You got it, squirt.”

 

And with that, they’re off.

 

---

 

When they arrive at the spring, Kameko grabs a large slab of rock before throwing it in the middle of the stream. There’s a large splash and then the water adapts and flows around it. Sitting down, surrounded by flowing water, Kameko smiles. 

 

The Sannin sit across from her, on the bank, hip to hip like the long lost friends they are. When none of them start, Kameko observes Jiraiya. The Mizuko told her his boisterous attitude was a coping mechanism, a mask he knew well. While this is true, she doesn’t know much about his actual personality. 

 

But that’s okay.

 

Kameko sunbathes while the Sannin lean on each other, and the forest is quiet apart from the wind whistling through the Hashirama trees. 

 

---

 

As they walk back to the village, listening to Tsunade’s rant about the hospital staff, Rasa’s seal flashes thrice. Kameko stops, “Sorry to interrupt Kaa-sama, but I’m off.”

 

Jiraiya looks confused while Orochimaru waves and Tsunade grins.

 

“Say hi to your apprentice from us!”

 

(Kameko laughs because Tsunade thinks her apprentice will be star struck of some sort, but Rasa is her Kage -chan for a reason.

 

His awe is reserved for her alone.)

 

---

 

Despite cultural norms, Kankuro is also her godchild. After pressing a Hiraishin seal on with a kiss to his forehead, Kameko knows logically that she probably is the best option.

 

Even if Rasa doesn’t.

 

(Her longevity is a secret only she knows.

 

It is her burden.)

 

She decides to stay until the ever-looming Uchiha Clan Meeting. 

 

---

 

She takes Temari out to the dunes and lets her listen to the songs of her land, sand swirling around them. She shows her plants and small animals and tumbleweeds, poisonous and strong. She takes her across rooftops and to Uzumaki Glass. She lets her nap in a sling made of red cloth and shows her the sunset from the top of Kazekage Tower, colors blending into a hazy fire. She lets Temari crawl over her while she whispers sweet words in long dead languages. 

 

Temari does not cry when she is with Kameko.

 

---

 

Kameko cooks for Karura and lets her nurse in peace. She cleans and leaves seals in her path for easier maintenance and then leaves a key on the fridge. 

 

---

 

With Rasa, they spar and walk the dunes. They are friends, but they are also sensei and student.

 

Funnily enough, Kazekage and foreigner has not been their relationship past the first day.

 

They relax, cartwheeling down dunes and playing poison word games.

 

And when the day ends, they watch the sky sing back to the land that whispers around them.

 

---

 

The day of the clan meeting, Kameko’s goodbye’s are short and sweet.

 

(Temari is the only one with tears. Kameko takes a handful of sand and dribbles it over the crown of her head, “Cry if you wish, Desert-hime. I will return.”)

 

---

 

Kameko had promptly bought a Konoha formal kimono after realizing she’d need one. It had light blue waves embroidered on navy silk which she paired with a dark grey obi and silver earrings.

 

It reminds her of the cliffs of Uzushio and she loves it.

 

After putting on light makeup and her hair in a bun with soft flyaways to frame her face, Kameko deems herself ready. 

 

(She knows she could be considered immaculate.)

 

The meeting starts around seven and she has plenty of time to make it to the compound. Slipping on her geta, she hugs Tobirama-sensei goodbye.

 

“I will keep him safe,” she promises.

 

When she looks up, his eyes are dark but he nods, “I trust you.”

 

Uchiha Kagami is someone they will fight for.

 

(There is very little that could take them both.)

 

---

 

Shisui is with Tobirama when Kagami and Kameko walk through the grand doors of the meeting hall. 

 

(Kameko personally doesn’t think it deserves to be called a hall , which denotes a type of craftsmanship, but it is large.)

 

The quiet chatter ceases momentarily before it picks up with vengeance.

 

“Not Uchiha-”

 

“What is he doing ? This-”

 

“Who is she-”

 

“Young-”

 

“Medic-”

 

Hiraishin -”

 

Kagami leads her to the front of the room where she sits beside him. She has already been briefed on how he is the only event for this meeting. Their routine is simple, and she is playing a type of “bad cop.”

 

(She’s a foreigner.

 

Kameko doesn’t mind being the one to pick the fight.)

 

The five elders sit in front of them, facing the general populous, with two seats open in between them- likely for the Clan Head and Matriarch. 

 

When the two Uchiha’s enter, Kameko mentally chuckles at the irony. A clan of hundreds and she has already met the ones at the top. Their eyes glance over her, masking their emotions well. Just not well enough.

 

She pats Kagami’s hand in comfort. 

 

(She has fought and won against far more dangerous foes. Why fear the fish when she has already killed the shark and won over the algae?)

 

The meeting begins with Fugaku’s grave “good evening.”

 

(And yet, it is genuine.)

 

The Uchiha do not waste their precious time with pleasantries. For all their quiet grace, subtly has never been their strong suit. 

 

“We are here to decide whether Uchiha Kagami will return to active duty.”

 

Kameko’s seiza is perfect.

 

“I will listen to my clansmen, but the final decision is my own.”

 

She settles, a lion in the prairie.

 

“Kagami and his guest will speak last. Who would like to go first?”

 

The hunt begins.

 

---

 

While it isn’t unanimous, it’s close. The Uchiha Clan is in favor of returning the prestigious, with relations-to-the- Niidaime , Uchiha Kagami, to general forces.

 

They have their reasons- remind Konoha of the Uchiha legacy in the Founding, he’s strong, capable of doing his duty, showcasing the Uchiha Will of Fire.

 

(None of this is actually about Kagami. )

 

A few civilians titter about Shisui becoming an orphan, but they’ve never helped Kagami and their interest likely starts and ends in not wanting to have to take care of Shisui should he become orphaned. 

 

And then it’s their turn.

 

Kagami begins, “The Uchiha Clan is important to me but my son will always come first. I will not return to active duty.”

 

He bows his head.

 

(It’s shallow.)

 

Kameko has not moved and her gaze has remained perfectly forward, just how Kyoko-sensei had taught her. 

 

Her voice however, seeps and spreads into every corner and mind present. 

 

“Among other things, I am a doctor,” she begins. “And my title is Chiharu-sama.”

 

Mikoto’s perfect posture finds a way to straighten.

 

“Kagami Uchiha was one of the recipients to one of my cures. He is well past his shinobi prime and still recovering. You say he is strong and capable, and as a father, he is. But if you send him into the field, all the Clan would have is a disgraced legacy. You lose nothing by letting him live his own life after dedicating everything to this clan long before you,” she looks at the Clan Head, “were even born.”

 

No part of her speech is pleading. 

 

“He has done his service and been strong. He aged and retired, all while battling sickness. Nothing in that honorable story leaves space for others to exploit. You want more glory as a clan? Lose part of your arrogance and act accordingly through the comforting fact that Shimura Danzo is dead .”

 

The room hangs on her words.

 

“But Uchiha Kagami has already been your glory and all he has to show for it is a small house and what amounts to the loneliness of an eloped widow. If this continues, he will leave the clan. He can and will have a home elsewhere .”

 

The elders are outraged and Fugaku opens his mouth, Kameko’s eyes glance over him.

 

His jaw shuts with a small click.

 

“Do not doubt my words. I did not come here to hurt you in your own home, but to alert you to the world around you. This clan participated in the Founding and yet it is behind on integrating itself within the city. Place your hope, but not your abusive expectations, on the next generation. Nurture them into something you can be proud of- teach them the ways of old.” 

 

She looks at the elders, “Do not give up.”

 

She uncurls from her seiza and stands, “Do not make decisions you will regret.”

 

Kagami stands beside her and they head towards the exit. With her hand on the doorknob she turns back one last time, “And do not sacrifice your own.”

 

They leave the deafening silence behind.

 

---

 

Kagami’s wife passed during childbirth. 

 

Before that, it had just been him and Keiko.

 

Then it was him and Shisui.

 

He never got more than one person after his team fell apart.

 

(It is perfectly fitting that it is after Tobirama comes back into his life that he can have others at his side again.)

 

He had been sick and lonely.

 

Uchiha’s weren’t explicitly close and he was ignored.

 

Village tensions rose a wall against his name. 

 

And so, he did his best. 

 

He went to hopeless hospital visits while Shisui took his naps in his arms.

 

He fed him the best breast milk substitute he could find.

 

(He was breaking.)

 

And now, he was inside 3600 Ume with his precious son and two people he loved and admired. This was his team outside of war and he cherished it.

 

(He felt safe.)

 

Chapter 11: Eleven

Summary:

Meeting Maito Gai and his Eternal Rival, the Uchiha give their verdict, and Shikaku won't stop thinking about his new puzzle.

Or

Kameko's name and teenagers having philosophical conversations.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

While the outcome of the Uchiha Clan Meeting is pending, Kagami stays with them on Ume street. Kameko glances at Shisui, thinking.

 

If nothings changed, Sasuke has just been born recently and Obito will unleash the Kyuubi in about two months.

 

She still isn’t sure if she’s going to save the Yondaime and Kushina. Theoretically, Orochimaru can be the Godaime and Tsunade can lead the hospital and watch Shizune. If the Sannin live together, they can adopt Naruto and Jiraiya can still work his spy network. 

 

On the other hand, they don’t really need to die.

 

Sighing, Kameko leaves Shisui with Kagami and heads to the top of Hokage Mountain. While the day is cloudy and windy, it’s still a pleasant surprise to find the popular spot empty. 

 

Flopping onto the ground, Kameko stretches her long limbs in a groan. With the addition of Darui, it’s hard to keep up and she has more than a few bruises.

 

She loves a challenge. 

 

Staring up at the clouds, Kameko plans.

 

On October 10, she needs to plant a Hiraishin seal on Obito. She should be mostly unknown to him but she can’t rely on that. She needs a team to take care of the White Zetsu and maybe stall Obito. She has the Mizuko and she can ask Tobirama but she isn’t quite sure that’ll be enough.

 

(There’s no one else.)

 

She told A she’ll start training their medics in January but after that showdown, she’ll need some time to herself. Might do pit stops in Ame or Suna and she still needs the goddamn memorial for her people but-

 

Kameko lets out a frustrated sigh. For now, this is the best she’s going to do. She slips into  meditation. 

 

---

 

It's early evening as she walks down the stairs. At the bottom, she sees a hunched figure in green spandex. As she walks closer she hears the muffled sobs from the shinobi she often sees running around the Village.

 

She doesn’t know him.

 

She stops and sits on the dirt beside him.

 

He looks up and gives her a wobbly smile, “I appear to have allowed my grief to overcome me! Please,” his voice breaks, “please…”

 

Kameko looks him in the eyes, “I don’t know what happened,” she admits.

 

“But right here, right now, it’s just us. I’ve seen you sprouting positivity wherever your feet take you. Please allow me to return the favor.”

 

She brings him into a hug, “It’s okay to cry.”

 

He sobs once.

 

Then the gates break and he clings to her black top between heaving breaths, letting out small keening sounds. She encloses him within her legs and arms and makes herself the big spoon.

 

(She’s trying her best to protect him from the world.

 

He is a shinobi.)

 

They stay that way for an undetermined amount of time, Kameko rocking back and forth and humming, and the boy grieving.

 

(He is only about sixteen.)

 

Eventually the sobs dissolve into sniffles and he quiets. 

 

“Take deep breaths,” she instructs. “When you’re ready, we’ll get you some water and I’ll buy dinner.”

 

When he finally pulls away from her torso, his eyes are red but there’s a new determination in the line of his mouth. He stands and bows low, “My father died protecting me.”

 

Kameko nods and bows back.

 

He straightens and regains some of his usual energy, beaming at her, “My name is Maito Gai and I am Konoha’s Sublime Green Beast!”

 

(This too, is genuine.)

 

“It is very nice to meet you, Gai. My name is Kameko, but please call me Chiharu.”

 

He nods, “Thank you for your support, our Konoha community is truly loyal!”

 

Kameko laughs, “Well, I’ve already told you my true name, so what’s one more secret?” she winks. “I’m not from Konoha, and that was Quiet Uzushiogakure support you just experienced- most don’t know it even exists.”

 

Gai blinks but does not question her.

 

“Now, are you ready for dinner?”

 

He chuckles awkwardly, “I’m afraid I have not finished my laps.”

 

Kameko brightens, “I’ll do them with you and then we can have a picnic!”

 

He grins at her, “A wonderful proposition!”

 

And with that they’re off.

 

(He starts slow, but Kameko reminds him that this training and by the end, he is the only one panting.

 

Both their smiles stretch far across their faces.)

 

---



In the end, it’s dark out as they feast on dumplings. They eat at a picnic table and chat harmlessly about their lives.

 

Kameko invites him for a homemade meal the following week.

 

He accepts.

 

(A tradition is formed.)

 

---

 

Two weeks later, there is a second Uchiha Clan Meeting to reveal the verdict.

 

Kameko wears the same kimono, jewelry and makeup.

 

Kagami stands straight.

 

Fugaku does not start with a “good evening.” He looks resigned and the elders are stiff by his side. His voice is a bit dead.

 

“As Clan Head, I decree that Uchiha Kagami can decide if he chooses to return to active duty under the Yondaime Hokage.”

 

Kagami stands and bows, “Thank you Uchiha-sama. I will remain retired.”

 

Kameko never opens her mouth.

 

This time, her presence equals the magnitude of a Nara shadow.

 

They leave.

 

---

 

Their celebration is quaint and within 3600 Ume, but the relief and happiness is apparent from the chakra heavy in the air.

 

Shisui doesn’t understand what happened but he can read the room and he gurgles happily until bedtime. 

 

Kameko cooks and sings while Tobirama and Kagami relax in each other's company in the living room.

 

Wiping the counter, Kameko smiles and no one sees it.

 

(She is smiling for herself .

 

This is family.)

 

---

 

Arriving at the hill to cloudwatch wasn’t routine for her but the itch had hit her and she had followed it. She hadn’t expected company, but she also didn’t mind. 

 

Shikaku looks at her seriously, more so than he’d ever been with her.

 

“I’ve been thinking,” he starts.

 

Kameko tilts her head.

 

“During the war, especially near the end, there were far less casualties than there should have been.”

Kameko hums, “I believe that to be a good thing.”

 

He continues, “And some of my clansmen, a very observant group, told me that they had been put under a very subtle and complex genjutsu. Unfortunately, Konoha doesn’t have many genjutsu specialists to question.”

 

One side of Kameko’s mouth tilts upwards.

 

How very impressive.

 

“And yet, even when they broke the genjutsu, they couldn’t break anyone else out of it. Nor could they kill a defenseless enemy.”

 

Shikaku stares hard at her, “A long term genjutsu placed on both sides, and an inability to kill. So they kept their eyes peeled and sparred like everyone else on the battlefield. But they never saw anyone who could’ve, would’ve placed it.”

 

Kameko’s eyebrows raise.

 

“And now,” Shikaku finishes, “I think I might have a suspect.”

 

Kameko likes to tease, but Shikaku Nara is smarter than she is. 

 

“Okay, let’s play.”

 

Shikaku blinks slowly.

 

Kameko’s eyes are the ocean, cold tides and slightly erratic. 

 

“I love a challenge.”

 

He examines her, and the grin he gifts her is that of a predator’s.

 

“I see. How did you do it?”

 

“I used compulsion seals and genjutsu.”

 

“Why?”

 

“Unnecessary death on behalf of the Kage is unacceptable. In simpler terms, morals.”

 

He sits back, “Why stay in Konoha?”

 

“Originally, it was for my precious person.”

 

“Kishi-san?”

 

“The seashore* is home.”

 

He makes a rumbling noise in his throat, “What is Chiharu?”

 

Kameko’s heart races.

 

“There’s very few people who know my name, two within Konoha. Chiharu-sama is the title I was given by the people of Uzushiogakure.”

 

“Why did you lie to Minato?”

 

“I didn’t.”

 

His fingers press together, and then he gets it.

 

“Are you hostile towards Kushina?”

 

Kameko herself had reflected on this, “No. But she has no special place in my heart, and however unfair, she is Konoha’s, not mine.”

 

He flops down, “Want to play shogi?”

 

She doesn’t comment when he takes a storage seal from his ankle and pulls out a shogi board. 

 

---

 

The game goes on for about three hours before Kameko forfeits.

 

Shikaku looks disappointed, “You weren’t losing.”

 

“Neither were you,” Kameko snorts. “But I don’t want to spend the whole day here.”

 

Shikaku sighs, “Troublesome. One day?”

 

She stands, “Of course.”

 

---

 

She’s walking on the river with Shisui when she has to dodge a green blur. 

 

“Gai-kun?”

 

She walks over to the crumpled figure just as he jumps up, “Just as I’d expect from my eternal rival! What an exhilarating spar!”

 

Looking at the head of silver hair as he comes closer, Kameko blinks.

 

I might have momentarily forgotten about him .

 

As Gai turns to her, “Chiharu-san! How wonderful to see you again! I apologize for almost being thrown into you and your child, although allow me to compliment your youthful dodging abilities!”

 

Kameko’s eye twitches, “This is Shisui, but he isn’t mine. Are we still on for dinner tomorrow?”

 

He nods excitedly, “Of course!”

 

She smiles a bit, “Well I won’t interrupt training. Have a good day!”

 

Kakashi stops her, “You are trained but you don’t wear a hitai ai.”

 

Kameko tilts her head at him, and for a moment the clearing is quiet apart from the crickets.

 

“Is there a question somewhere or can I leave?” she asks drily.

 

He doesn’t move, “Why don’t you wear a hitai ai?”

 

He’s only been in ANBU for a year but he specializes in assasination and he’s already becoming one of the best. 

 

“I was never given one. I am not a shinobi.” 

 

That poor, traumatised child.

 

“If you two are done sparring,” Kameko pauses and receives two tentative nods, “How about we get some takeout and have a picnic?”

 

Kakashi looks like he wants to reject the offer, but Gai grabs his arm and responds with an enthusiastic, “It would be our pleasure, Chiharu-san!”

 

---

 

Kakashi’s stoicism has been a refined skill since he was four and decided to join the Academy. 

 

That being said, when he returned from his longest ANBU mission yet, about four months, and Minato-sensei told him to take a week off before he gave him another assignment, he wasn’t sure what to do with himself. The first day he did chores, took a shower and trained. 

 

He trained with the only changes being with or without Gai, day or night.

 

(He could’ve saved them if he was stronger.)

 

Then, half way through a spar, he lands a kick and Gai flies towards a civilian and child-

 

Wait, she’s walking on water-

 

And she invites them for a picnic. Kakashi’s been avoiding Minato and Kushina and isn’t searching for companionship.

 

Then Gai grabs his arm and she doesn’t wear a hitai ai and the decision is made for him. 

 

(A very small part of him, a part that is categorically ignored, is relieved.)

 

---

 

Kameko takes them to an abandoned training ground that is nestled on the edges of the Konoha Wall. The surrounding is swampland and long grass that brushes the wind. She weaves them through a trail worn only by her and small animals. 

 

When the grass parts, they are welcomed by a quiet brook that leads into a short waterfall. Dragonflies flit over the surface of sun-warmed slabs of rock that frame the water and Kameko leads the way to their makeshift seating.

 

She dips her feet in the water and moves Shisui from her back to her stomach, “Such a wonderful ecosystem, isn’t it?”

 

Kakashi glances at her, but his eyes obediently observe his surroundings.

 

Gai beams at her, his teeth reflecting on the water, “It is indeed a family that works as well together as Konoha nin!”

 

Kameko lets out a small laugh, a gentle wave relaxing into the sand, “As impressive as Konoha nin are, the Land and Sea probably are a bit better at being family. They do, of course, have more practice.”

 

Gai focuses on her, his brilliance not evaporating her presence like so many others. Shinobi are smart and clever, but many are not philosophers. 

 

(It could, perhaps, cause a double edged blade with a shortened handle.)

 

She continues, “They work together and support each other unconditionally. They have a balance to support everything that depends on them.”

 

“They are strong independently, but stronger together.”

 

Gai blinks, “The Land and Sea…”

 

Kameko smiles, “It isn’t youthful, it’s ageless. It can be playful or weary. Wise or unstable. Age is only as important as personality.”

 

Kakashi has been stiff, but his genius extends past the shinobi arts, “Can someone be old and wrong ? Or is it just a choice to lie?”

 

To respect elders, especially strong elders, is a deeply ingrained part of the Elemental Nations. Unfortunately, old shinobi are among the most bitter. 

 

They have killed and lied and scraped by but they have never won .

 

(The next generation must also kill and lie.)

 

Kameko hums, “That is a good question. How do you imagine yourself in fifty years?”

 

(Dead.)

 

“Do you imagine yourself with excessive knowledge?”

 

(Apart from ways to kill people, make them comfortable, how Kumo nin break? )

 

“Does age give you all the answers?”

 

(Humans don’t live more than a century.

 

She has been in the grey area for a long time. Not a shinobi, not a civilian. Eighteen, thirty three.

 

Why debate if she is truly human?)

 

“Do old civilians know war and its effects?”

 

(They know dead relatives and increased or decreased prices.)

 

Kakashi’s eye is wide before it blanks, “That sounds like it may be bordering on treason, Chiharu-san.

 

The spell is broken and Gai glances between them nervously.

 

Kameko throws her head back and laughs.

 

(It is slightly hysterical.)

 

“You know, Goldilocks-san might agree with you, kid. Ready to eat?”

 

Kakashi bristles but Gai’s silence has drained away, “I will help you distribute the food Chiharu-san!”

 

While Gai spiels about it is my greatest honor to serve food for my friends , Kameko opens boxes while maneuvering around a waking Shisui. 

 

His big dark eyes blink slowly, taking in the bird pecking by the rocks and the water running steadily. When his eyes meet hers, she smiles so wide her eyes crinkle, “Hello, Shisui. Do you want to put your feet in the water?”

 

When Kameko was an orphan, she saw happy parents and toddlers play in the crashing waves as they greeted every new child. 

 

Shisui is almost two, not quite as old, but clearly just as intelligent, if not more so. 

 

It isn’t her beloved sea, but she needs to introduce him to the water and he is young enough she doesn’t want to temporarily Hiraishin them to the coast.

 

(Someday, she’ll kidnap him and Kagami both.)

 

Gently removing him from the sling, Kameko takes off Shisui’s socks. She sits on the edge of her rock, the water lapping against her knees and sits him on her lap. When his toes go under, her jolts. 

 

He doesn’t yell or cry or try to take them out.

 

He garbles and leans forward and she locks her arms around his stomach, anchoring him to safety. He splashes while Gai takes the food from her side, dividing it into even portions.

 

“I swear tomorrow will be home cooking,” Kameko promises.

Gai’s tears stream down his face, “So kind!”

 

She nods graciously before turning to Kakashi, “You are welcome to come as well. Dinner will be at 5:45 at 3600 Ume.”

 

His gaze is guarded and shuttered, but he simply nods.

 

(Both of them know that he won’t be there tomorrow.

 

Perhaps someday.)

 

They relax on the rocks and eat quietly, blending with the environment.

 

(Like the Sea and the Land they are part of a juxtaposed peace.

 

For today, under the sun and surrounded by wildlife, it works.)

Notes:

seashore*

Kishi also means seashore

Chapter 12: Twelve

Summary:

A shogi game, a sick Hokage (literally), and ANBU Dog.

or

Karura's pregnant for the third time and Kameko isn't pleased (which might not be entirely related)

Notes:

just a heads up, i dont know shogi rules

Kishimoto owns Naruto

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

Gai comes to dinner with seasonal flowers and the night is rambunctious and happy. 

 

Gai is a master of his own world and while the grief will never disappear, it’s presence has been put to bed. He listens with equally rapt attention to Kagami and Tobirama’s stories as Shisui’s gurgles.

 

(With his accelerated growth, he will likely begin talking and crawling very soon.)

 

He is a gratuitous guest.

 

Dai taught him well.

 

(Kameko finds it unfortunate that she couldn’t save him.

 

She can’t save everyone.)

 

---

 

It’s mid to late August when she gains her ANBU surveillance. When she sees the silver hair peeking over the Dog mask, she tilts her head and continues with her day. 

 

---

 

A week later, Shikaku hunts her down. 

 

“I want a shogi game.”

 

“That’s nice.”

 

“With you, Chiharu-sama.”

 

She hums. 

 

“I’m not as smart as you.”

 

He snorts, “You’re close enough. Better than any other Nara I’ve ever played.”

 

“I once had a sensei who liked to play.”

 

He grins, “Humor me?”

 

“Only if you tell me why I haven’t been harassed by wayward Uzumaki.”

 

He scratches the back of his neck, “She’s heavily pregnant.”

 

“And…?”

 

He snorts, “Minato still thinks you’re a security risk.”

 

She clicks her tongue, “And he doesn’t want me to charm his wife and return her to the cliffside.”

 

His hooded gaze hasn’t wavered, “The rubble is hardly appealing.”

 

She grins, “I can be convincing. Why haven’t you told him that I have no interest in her?”

 

“Well,” he starts, “You did just ask.”

 

“Incriminating curiosity, no?”

 

“I don’t think you're a risk,” he explains bluntly, “You could be, but you aren’t. Not to what really matters.”

 

Nara Shikaku knows the King.

 

(This isn’t a surprise.)

 

“Paranoid kages,” an eyebrow raises, “Well if we’re being petty, his protégé spends more time with me anyway.”

 

Shikaku chuckles.

 

She leads them to a park.

 

---

 

The sun is dipping towards the tree line and there are four pieces on the board.

 

Two hours later, Shikaku wins.  

 

“If there’s a next time, I just might win,” she sighs.

 

His eyes dart towards her. 

 

“With your creativity, I honestly can’t say.”

 

Both of them offer their different strengths and utilize them to their advantage ruthlessly.

 

With the highest stakes being victory, it’s fun.

 

Kameko stands and stretches her back, Shikaku copying her movements moments later and his back pops .

 

He grumbles, “How are you my age?”

 

Her giggles are a bit hysterical.

 

“It’s getting late, go home before your wife accuses you of an affair.”

 

He slumps, “The only thing I have an affair with is Minato’s goddamn paperwork, troublesome.”

 

“You did just spend the evening with me, and I’d say we had a wonderful time,” Kameko purrs.

 

He barks out a laugh, “Go home so Kakashi can sleep.”

 

Kameko pouts, “No fun. How old is he anyway?”

 

Shikaku thinks for a moment, “Almost sixteen?”

 

She hums, “Yeah, alright. I’ll go home. Take care of your pregnant wifey!”

 

He nods, “I’ll find you when I want a game.”

 

She nods, “Good luck!”

 

---

 

Gai coming by weekly when he isn’t on a mission is a small blessing. In case of emergency, Shisui has gained another sitter and Kameko gets to cook Uzushio recipe’s frequently enough to make it routine.

 

(Uzushio recipe’s are not meant to be served with empty seats.)

 

It’s also what sends her to the market at the, coincidentally, same time as Minato. It’s early evening and he’s probably just come from the office as he tiredly inspects tomatoes.

 

“Your turn to make dinner?” 

 

He startles and she snorts, knocking him lightly in the shoulder.

 

“It’s a good thing you have ANBU watching your every move, Goldilocks-san.”

 

Placing a ripe tomato in his hand, she pays for her own groceries, before turning back to him. 

 

He hasn’t reacted to her teasing and the flush on his face is anything but natural. She bites her lip, placing her free hand against his forehead.

 

“You’ve got a fever, hun.”

 

That’s when Kagami comes up with Shisui in his arms, “Gai’s out for a mission.”

 

He pauses, glancing at Minato, “Are we still on for dinner?”

 

She frowns, “Unfortunately, I don’t think so. You guys go to a restaurant with Kishi-jiji, okay? Have fun.”

 

Kagami nods, but looks distracted. “How are you feeling, Hokage-sama?”

 

Minato jolts and forces an obviously fake smile, “I’m doing great Kagami-san! And how,” he starts swaying, “how are you?”

 

Kagami looks at Kameko, “You know where the Hokage manor is?”

 

She nods. He smiles softly, “We don’t deserve you.”

 

She snorts, “Go get dinner.”

 

And with that, she manhandles Minato back to his house.

 

(It’s telling that the ANBU don’t interfere.)

 

---

 

Kameko escorts Minato towards the door and he is obviously hanging on by a thread. He’s feverish- flushed cheeks, glazed eyes and lacking motor function.

 

Once the door clicks open, Minato partially comes back to himself, “Why should I let you in?”

 

She looks him dead in the eyes, “You are a doting husband and the Hokage. You gave too much and now you're sick. Do you remember what I said about burning out, Minato?”

 

He straightens, “... it won’t be pretty.”

 

She nods, “And no one deserves bad leadership. It fixes nothing. And so, for the evening, I’m going to take care of you, your kid, your wife, and your student. Problem? Speak now.”

 

He shakes his head and goes inside, temporarily keying her into the seals. Meanwhile, Kameko turns to where she knows her ANBU is hiding, “C’mere kid. Hokage’s orders.”

 

ANBU Dog appears in front of her.

 

Before anyone can blink, she shoves him in and slams the door behind them.

 

The layout is open and comfortable, a living room separated from the kitchen by a counter and a hallway that leads to bedrooms and a bathroom. 

 

Leaving the groceries on the counter, Kameko puts her hands on Minato’s shoulders.

 

“Go take a shower, put on clean clothes, and then come back here and I’ll accelerate the healing. Don’t even think about getting close to your wife and getting her sick, you hear?”

 

He nods. She nods back.

 

As he disappears down the hall, she takes a closer look at the living space. It isn’t dirty but it also isn’t pristine, smudges and clutter here and there. 

 

She directs ANBU Dog to quiet cleaning.

 

Then she heads down the hall to find Kushina. There are two bedrooms on either side of the bathroom where she can hear the shower running. One is a nursery, the other has Kushina asleep on the bed.

 

Sighing, Kameko scribbles a note before taping it to her forehead and returning to the kitchen. She puts away the groceries Minato managed to collect before bumping into her and then starts making Uzumaki soul food and rice porridge. When most of the dishes are simmering, Minato emerges and slumps on one of the bar stools lining the counter.

 

Washing her hands, Kameko uses her gentle bedside manner, “All right, hun. How’re you feeling?”

 

He groans.

 

“Hm, I’m sure. Symptomes?”

 

There’s a pause, “Headache, stuffy nose, swollen throat, cold and hot at weird times.”

 

She nods, “Standard fever, then.”

 

She brings up her glowing hands and when she’s done the fever has drastically diminished. 

 

“Here’s the deal,” she starts, opening one of her storage seals, “you are going to sleep on this futon in the nursery and sip this water. When you wake up, I’ll be here and you can have some warm rice porridge.”

 

He nods, “Thank you.”

 

She hands him a glass of water and calls Dog, handing him the tissues and futon. 

 

---

 

Kushina walks in just as the food is finishing, note in hand. 

 

Kameko turns to her, “Minato is sick and recovering in the nursery. Don’t get to close until he’s better. Before we eat, I’m willing to give you a check up- do you want one?”

 

Kushina blinks, “Chiharu-sama?”

 

Kameko sighs, “You aren’t Uzushio, Kushina.”

 

She flinches.

 

“Just call me Chiharu.”

 

Kushina’s back straightens and she lets out an explosive sigh, “Yeah, okay.”

 

---

 

No doubt because of her position , Kushina and Naruto are in perfect expected health. 

 

Pregnant women are expected to have sore backs and swollen ankles.

 

Kameko isn’t an overworked medic-nin that needs to conserve chakra. She heals and reinforces and, well, it’s nice. 

 

Nice to take care of a woman and her child.

 

Nice to make someone’s life a bit easier.

 

(Nice to see red hair.)

 

---

 

Dog sets the table, but it’s Kakashi who knows where the silverware is.

 

Both watch Chiharu in the apartment with a shrewd eyes.

 

Once it’s time to eat, Kameko calls stop. 

 

“Alright, you’re off duty now,” she tells him, “Take off the ANBU mask.”

 

Kushina nods, “Yeah, dattebane! Don’t think I haven’t noticed you don’t come by as much!”

 

Hesitantly, the mask comes off and a coal eye is revealed. Kameko puts a few dishes in front of him, “Don’t rush.”

 

The dinner has Kushina partially subdued but she asks Kakashi occasional questions and it isn’t silent.

 

(She has tried every dish.)

 

(Kameko notices that she doesn’t have traditional marriage seals.)

 

---

 

After dinner, Kushina takes a shower and heads back to bed. Kakashi stays, but his hypervigilance has mostly dissipated and he reads on the couch. 

 

Kameko cleans the kitchen and cooks the food that is a day away from over ripe. 

 

---

 

Minato wakes around two a.m., an hour after Kameko draped a blanket over Kakashi. She flicks on a dim kitchen light and serves him congee over the counter. 

 

His eyes aren’t as sharp as usual, but it’s hard to tell that he’s sick. 

 

He eats quietly as she refills his glass. When he’s done, he leans back, “Most wouldn’t manhandle a foreign kage and force themselves into their home.”

 

“I’m not most,” she refutes airily. “Besides, we already had this conversation. Do you not remember?”

 

(Kameko never stood a chance at normal .)

 

He shakes his head, “I do.”

 

Kameko shifts forward, leaning her weight on her elbows. 

 

“Then what do you really want to ask, Minato? What answers are you afraid of?”

 

Sky blue meets the ocean, and Kameko straightens. 

 

“I killed Danzo Shimura.”

 

(A white piece is moved directly forward, and the clink against the board echoes.)

 

Minato’s lips part, “What are your plans surrounding Kushina?”

 

(The black tile is held, moving to protect the queen.)

 

Eye contact never wavers.

 

“Nothing. I didn’t know Konoha had Uzumaki. I don’t care about the bijuu,” Minato flinches, “And Kushina means nothing to me. I don’t know her. Do I enjoy hearing a voice tick and seeing red hair? Yes. I do. But she isn’t Uzushiogakure .”

 

(It’s a strategy game. This is real life.)

 

Minato looks confused.

 

(Hardly keeping level against strong waves.)

 

 “She might not have lived there her whole life, but she was bullied for being a foreigner all through Academy,” he chooses anger, “ What do you mean ‘she isn’t Uzushio’?”

 

“I mean what I said. I don’t talk to talk.”

 

Kameko’s jaw is stiff, “Do you know what Uzumaki Kushina really is?”

 

Minato’s eyes narrow, “... what?”

 

“Collateral. Collateral between Village Power and people with fancy hats that don’t know how to properly prioritize their people.”

 

Minato blinks rapidly.

“Like the Uzumaki before, she is the wife of a Hokage. She herself had ambitions to be Hokage. She is Konoha’s Jinchuriki. She is not Uzushio,” Kameko pauses, “What she is, however, is Uzumaki .”

 

(Neither notice that the other occupants' chakra isn’t quite as still as it should be.)

 

---

 

She leaves after preparing breakfast for the sleeping household, Hiraishining to 3600 Ume. It’s late August and she needs a longer break from Konoha. 

 

(She misses her home.

 

It’s long gone.)

 

Scribbling a note, Kameko decides to return in late September.

 

She will keep her spars in Kumo, bond with her godchildren, and finally check in with the Ame-chibi’s. The Mizuko’s will tend to the house and the Make Better Citizens Program.

 

(Is she experimenting with names? Yes. With only one participant, five if she includes the POW’s, it’s a perfect time to improve branding.)

 

Smiling to herself, Kameko takes off. 

 

---

 

She runs all the way to Suna, crossing the border easily after they recognize her hair. 

 

(Suna was her first home after the Fall. 

 

Home will never mean the same thing again.)

 

(With Hiraishin, Kameko can go anywhere. And yet, she isn’t sure she belongs anywhere. How long is home supposed to last?)

 

---

 

When she arrives, she goes straight to the Kazekage’s office. 

 

Yumi, Rasa’s secretary, waves her down, brows furrowed.

 

“Hello, Chihahru-sama, I hope all is well…”

 

Kameko puts her hand on Yumi’s, “What’s wrong?”

 

(Rasa hasn’t pulsed his seal.)

 

Yumi winces, “I just think there’s something you might be able to help with,” She leans forward, “The Council is getting fidgety about the Ichibi. They want it sealed. Karura-sama is pregnant again and I… it’s tense.”

 

Kameko nods. Yuma has warned her about Gaara, a redhead driven to insanity by a bijuu. 

 

Mother dearest, mother dearest, you’d do anything for me ?

 

Bijuu and The Power of Human Sacrifice, an interesting combination indeed. A toxic relationship that pales only to human relationships with other humans. 

 

“Where is Rasa?”

 

“In another meeting with the Council. It’s been hours,” Yumi eyes are getting wet, “Can you help, Chiharu-sama? I know you aren’t from Suna but you’ve fixed big problems…”

 

Yumi is still a teenager. A chunin who wants the best for her people and who is stressed and helpless when the government insists on eating itself. Kameko smiles reassuringly.

 

“I promise that I will do everything I can.”

 

(This is what she is here for.)

 

She marches into the meeting.

 

---

 

Rasa’s relief at his sensei’s appearance is excessive but between sleepless nights at home and working relentlessly during the day, he is stressed, exhausted, and just about ready to give up the hat. 

 

(The only thing that has kept him fighting is his unborn child and his wife’s safety.)

 

She marches in, long blue hair flowing behind her and she claps her hands together, “Silence.”

 

Her killing intent floods the room. 

 

“What is the problem here?”

 

A balding council member stammers, “He refuses to use his child-”

 

Kameko interrupts, “Incorrect. What is the problem here?”

 

One more member tries, “The Ichibi needs a host.”

 

Kameko tilts her head, eyes cold, “Closer.”

 

Kameko moves forward, her KI getting denser with the shrinking distance between her and the meeting participants. 

 

“The problem here is that the jar holding the Ichibi is growing increasingly unstable. The problem is that Suna doesn’t have seal masters. The problem is that your Kazekage doesn’t want to sacrifice his family to something that may or may not work.”

 

Kameko straightens and the KI disappears like it was never present.

 

“The solution,” she beams, “is asking me, your associate from Uzushiogakure, if I could help. The solution,” her eyes narrow, “is me telling you, ‘yes I can seal a bijuu.’”

 

“The solution is not making the Tower so tense, assistants are telling me the problem because they are scared. Are we clear?”

 

---

 

And with that, the Council is cowed and reflects on their decisions. 

 

(Elders can still learn.

 

They value their jobs and they want to help.

 

They do not immediately realize that the next generation doesn’t have to kill and lie.)

 

---

 

On the way out of the meeting, Kameko stops by Yumi’s desk and hands her a bubblegum lollipop, patting her on the head.

 

“You did well.”

 

(After working at the hospital, she’s seen the remarkable effect sweets and positive reinforcement can have.)

 

(She remembers her Shisou telling her of small lollipops after doctors appointments for children in a world without shinobi.)

 

---

 

With everything cleared up, Rasa gets to go home in time for dinner for the first time in a month. 

 

Kameko doesn’t join him.

 

Instead, she goes to visit her honorary Uzumaki. Her ex-apprentices greet her warmly and they work through the evening, giving tips and brainstorming together. 

 

Mira is now fourteen. 

Hideo has gotten married.

Kouichi has discovered a love for teaching and holds seminars describing the history of Uzumaki glass art. 

 

It’s fun.

 

(It’s home.)

 

---

 

She doesn’t leave Uzumaki Glass until the early morning. She walks through Suna and then walks up the cliff and leaves.

 

She runs and jumps and sails across the dunes, does flips and cartwheels.

 

(There is a freedom in seeing nothing but small dunes. A freedom uncovered that can only come from open space and the cover of a dark night.) 

 

Later, when she has exhausted every part of herself, she flops down onto the sand with a whisper of happiness surrounding herself, and sleeps.

 

---

 

She wakes a few minutes after dawn to the feeling of small chakra signatures around her. When she opens her eyes she is surrounded by gila monsters, lizards and scorpions, an occasional tortoise. Farther back, coyote’s are curled around desert rabbits. 

 

Kameko flops back in the sand.

 

“Your official title is Chiharu-sama,” Yuma-shisou comments, “you know that. Others call you Blessed by the Land. They say that the Sea wanted you but the Land fought to keep you. As you know, Uzumaki are only completely surrendered to the Sea when they die.”

 

She tucks a lock of hair behind her ear. 

 

“You are special in many ways, Kameko,” She looks at her. “You are unique. You are both many ends and many beginnings, many firsts. I’m not entirely sure what you are- and only you can find that out.”

 

“Blessed by the Land, huh?”

 

She looks at the animals again, “Makes me want to sleep outside more often.”  

 

They chitter back.

Notes:

you guys!! I didn't update last week!! I dont even have a valid excuse I just forgot so if it's been a week feel free to yell at me in the comments :)

Chapter 13: Thirteen

Summary:

Talking to leaders and toddlers

or

Kameko goes on a long walk and bumps into Kakuzu

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

After her night in the desert, Kameko heads over to Rasa’s house. She is greeted by a squealing and clumsy Temari.

 

(Temari is about eighteen months old, younger than Shisui. She’s seen the clarity in his eyes. The cleanness of his movements. So why isn’t he walking or talking?)

 

Kameko crouches, opening her arms wide, “Hello, lovely Desert-hime! I’ve missed you.”

 

Temari coo’s, “Chi! Chi back!”

 

Kameko’s smile widens, “It seems I have.”

 

She sweeps her into the air, spinning before bringing Temari into her arms. She waits for her to stop giggling, “Where’s papa, Tem-chan?”

 

Small feet kick, “No!”

 

Kameko raises an unimpressed eyebrow, “Uh-huh.”

 

She’s learned sensing from the best and a toddler isn’t going to stop her. But when she feels Kankuro’s chakra still and asleep and Karura’s wrapped up with Rasa’s, she pauses. 

 

Maybe the toddler’s right.

 

Scribbling a note, Kameko slips Temari’s sandals onto her feet and puts a big floppy hat on her head. 

 

She’s adorable.

 

Large teal eyes peek up from under the rim, “Ready!”

 

Kameko nods seriously, “Ready.”

 

(While it might seem like a kidnapping, Kameko’s the godmother and she left a note , it’ll be fine. )

 

---

 

They go out to breakfast and eat foods with colorful sauces. Temari chatters away and gets distracted and Kameko basks in the presence of her Desert-hime. 

 

 Afterwards, Kameko holds onto Temari’s hands as the child toddles across flat rooftops.

 

When Temari finally settles, it’s around noon and Kameko assumes that it’s around nap time. They sit side by side, legs dangling, Kameko’s arm curled around Temari’s whole frame. The sun is high and Kameko pulls her into her lap and pulls the hat high enough to shadow her whole face. 

 

Then the wind whips and shares a song. A song of the Land for those who listen, the ones who remember the natural way.

 

“There’s no thunder

No rain, no master

Of dark nights

And strong lights

When every grain flies

Won’t the confused wind rise

When you are with me

Don’t be carefree, but I say

Follow the path the stars take

To dream 

To take

To give

To return home again.”

 

Temari’s eyes stay open until the last line. Then, she is asleep.

 

---

 

With Temari asleep in her lap, ignoring the pulse to her Hiraishin seal is a bit easier. It’s from a stranger, one she happened to place a Hiaraishin on during the war. 

 

Part of her wants to help, but another, the orphan abandoned to drown and die on a dock, doesn’t care. Doesn’t blink or flinch when the seal dies with it’s carrier.

 

She has already decided to stop fighting for strangers until her showdown with Uchiha Obito. 

 

(Kameko carries burdens, knows that very well, but they don’t include every person on the planet.)

 

---

 

Being forced into the role as Acting Kazekage is less amusing the second time. She likes Suna, loves her small family that lives there, but she isn’t even a citizen

 

(Her heart and soul will always be owned by coastal breezes and lapping waves.)

 

She has Kankuro in a sling around her waist and Karura brings lunch when it’s time to breastfeed. 

 

“Is this what it’s like to be Rasa?” she wonders aloud. “I have his pretty wife, his son, and the office. The only things I lack are Temari and the red hair.”

 

Karura snorts, “Like he’d have Kankuro in his office.”

 

Kameko hums thoughtfully, “Gender roles, gender roles. What is your opinion Karura? Is there a reason, apart from desire, that has you pregnant three years in a row?”

 

Karura tilts her head, “Y’know, the usual.”

 

Her tone is not flippant.

 

They eat.

 

---

 

She does paperwork, deals with fussy children, ANBU, and ends the week with a training session with Rasa. 

 

After sparring, Kameko sits next to his body, staring into the distance. 

 

“What do you think are Suna’s major problems?”

 

He looks at her, waiting. She smiles a bit, “That wasn’t rhetorical.”

 

He blinks, “Our trade is far better than it used to be. We have natural mines for shinobi tools and we grow our own poison. We have water. Our shinobi population is well taken care of. Our civilians,” his brows furrow, “are doing better with the glass trade. So our problems are civilians?”

 

He looks at her. She shakes her head, “You aren’t a puppet, Kage-chan. I’m not going to tell you how to fix your land, and I’m not always going to tell you what’s wrong. I’m not Suna.”

 

He tenses, but he is not afraid. Rasa is a Kage and he will prepare himself appropriately. 

 

“After the apprenticeship ended, I told you I wouldn’t be around as much. Unless it’s an emergency, you probably won’t see me again for at least half a year.”

 

She meets his eyes, “The best Kage, apart from the Mizukage which I have not met, is the Raikage.”

 

His hands clench.

 

“I’ve helped you with your combat ability, but I can’t do your job for you. I know you have children at home. I’m happy for you and Karura but do not forget she is just as capable a jonin as a mother.”

 

She lifts a fist of sand over his heart.

 

“Look around you. Be true. Do not rely solely on your eyes and whoever fights or pays or claws up the ladder enough to meet you. Listen. You are a leader, Kage-chan, but you are here for your people. You know this- it’s your potential that kept you alive- so act like it.”

 

The sand falls.

 

“Do not call me unless it is an emergency,” she cups his face is her hands, “I will not tell you ‘everything will be fine.’”

 

She looks at him, “I am here to support you, but I am not a crutch nor a subordinate.”

 

Her face crinkles, “Do your best.”

 

He kowtows, “This student hears the words of wisdom bestowed upon them and wishes their Master safe journeys.”

 

When he straightens, she has long since disappeared.

 

(The sand dances.)

 

---

 

The Mizuko’s have given her regular updates on Amegakure, the slow but steady improvement under new leadership.

 

That doesn’t mean she doesn’t want to see it for herself. 

 

She did send a bit of prior warning because the Ame-chibi’s were some of her favorite’s and she did want to see them on their own terms.

 

(They needed to know that they deserved respect.)

 

---

 

She is greeted at the border by a fidgety Konan. Stopping a few feet away and calling over the rain, Kameko greets her with a smile.

 

Konan nods, “Hello, Chiharu-san.”

 

The last time she had spent more than a day in Ame, she completely overthrew the government and she was clearly better in almost every way; political negotiation, financial resources, physical strength, ect. Considering that, the cold professionalism is expected. 

 

It seems they consider her a threat. A perfectly valid response. A bit saddening, but part of her is gratified by Ame-sama’s and their resilience. They’re essentially restarting a country from the ground up and they are wary of bigger predators. They put themselves on equal footing, as they should with Kage-level shinobi, and they greeted her at the borders. Kameko doesn’t miss the power play of sending Konan alone. 

 

She’s proud. 

 

While she did just come to check in, they’re doing fine. They don’t need her, nor do they truly know her. 

 

Kameko walks closer, ignoring the ANBU hiding among the foliage. The rain feels nice .

 

When she’s about to pass Konan, the teen clenches a fist, “Please wait.”

 

Kameko looks over her shoulder, “Yes?” she calls nonchalantly. 

 

Konan straightens, “You have not asked to gain entrance to Amegakure no Sato. You do not have permission.”

 

Theoretically, Kameko should ask to enter their land, not just tell them she’s coming and march in. But, well, even if they aren’t Kages, even if they were, Kameko is under no one’s authority but herself and it’s better to establish that earlier rather than later. A powerplay of her own, a gift for a gift.

 

She nods slowly, “Yes.”

 

The ANBU come closer. Kameko tilts her head, “Would you like to know why? I’ll tell you.”

 

Konan hesitates, “Why?”

 

Kameko leans closer, whispering in her ear, “You and I both know I could kill those ANBU in a heartbeat. I could slaughter your whole population in hours- three max. I could do the same with any of Hidden Villages,” Konan’s pulse races, “I am not here as a threat. I am not here to denounce your authority after giving it to you,” she pulls back a bit, making eye contact, “Because you three are doing well.”

 

She steps back and Konan’s frame relaxes a fraction, and then Kameko releases her aura. Not KI, not Positive Intent, just herself as she is. 

 

“That being said, I bend to no authority, within or without borders. I find leaders I respect, but I do not follow them. I have no ties to a living village.”

 

(Uzushio is not dead. It lives in her, on the coast, on the island. 

 

Konan would not understand.)

 

Konan stares hard at her, “Do not hurt any of our people.”

 

Kameko throws her head back and laughs, “Spoken well,” her eyes sharpen, “I am not a sadist, nor do I derive pleasure from murder or lies.”

 

Konan’s posture is taunt- she knows more is coming, even if she doesn’t know what. 

 

“Rapists, among other things, cannot be protected from me by simple things like borders,” Kameko smirks, “But then again, complex things wouldn’t stop me either.”

 

---

 

They arrive at the capital walking side by side. 

 

---

 

Kameko has no interest in making friends with people who don’t want her friendship.

 

“Not everyone will enjoy your company,” Yuma warns. “You will just be an opportunity. I am here to teach you to do the same to them. Lesson One: Do not lose yourself in the process.”

 

One day, when they are more comfortable in their authority, perhaps they will welcome her like the other Kages that know what she can offer them. 

 

Assuming that is, that they don’t succumb to their ego’s of Ame’s small size or their title or other pitfalls hidden or enabled by immaturity. They are young and Kameko doesn’t mind brave, protective people but she knows how power changes people.

 

It can be good. 

 

It can also be very, very bad.

 

(Leadership and power is perhaps the only way to know someone better than a spar.)

 

For now, they do not need her assistance and Ame does not need her interference. 

 

Kameko moves on.

 

---

 

She walks. She isn’t quite sure where she’s going.

 

Where she wants to go.

 

(It’s ironic, she’s finally resourceful enough to achieve almost any ambition and yet, all the ambitions she carries are that of ghosts.)

 

For her, it is an odd way to travel. Many shinobi feel twitchy or slow when they take a walk outside their borders. 

 

Kameko has always enjoyed looking at new sights, learning new things.

 

“Life is a blur in this world,” Yuma-shisou is rarely wistful, but it comes out more often the older Kameko ages.

 

(Now, she knows it’s because Yuma was facing death. How courageous.)

 

 “Run, run, fight, train, sell this, run! No break, no morals, just paranoia and unresolved trauma. I always thought ‘nothing could be worse than the rez.’ Parts of Africa maybe. But even then, the criteria is everything in a decision, isn’t it?”

 

Kameko doesn’t know what “Africa” is, but she’s heard of Yuma-shisou’s first home. 

 

“It made you,” she puffs out her cheeks, “so it can’t be that bad.”

 

Yuma clicks her tongue, “Nature and nurture. Sometimes kindness and survival cannot coexist. It is the job of a leader, of those with courage and strength, to try anyway. You are the first and only I’ve told my secrets to,” she admits, “Maybe I spoil you with so many stories.”

 

Kameko regards her Shisou, her guardian, the only adult who’s truly hers .

 

“You’re my first and only, period,” Kameko bits her lip, “Are stories for those who would have nothing without them, or to bring people together?”

 

Yuma nods, proud, “But you miss one point- why would someone create a story to begin with?”

 

Kameko knows only she can write her own story. Knows that she is an orphan, survivor of a genocide, has blue hair. Knows she has been Acting Kazekage, babysits Uchiha Shisui, and that she spars with Kumo shinobi. Kameko is many traits, ideas, skills, places. Kameko is Chiharu-sama. 

 

Perhaps we are only recognized through the eyes of others. 

 

Kameko goes where her feet take her. She’s still going in the general direction of her town but she takes the long routes and shortcuts in equal measure. Walks in circles if she likes a particular path. The land is never quiet; whispering greetings, sending small friends, carrying music.

 

She is not lonely.

 

She talks to new people and tries new food and enjoys that even Yuma-shisou never knew of these people.

 

---

 

She is shuffling down a worn path, watching colored leaves catch on the wind and dance to the pull of the land. 

 

Every leaf has slightly different coloring, different patterns and splotches. 

 

(Uzushiogakure was one entity but it was not uniform .)

 

Kameko huffs a breath as a plan forms.

 

(Konoha and Uzushio were old allies.)

 

---

 

She doesn’t return to her island immediately, won’t construct the memorial until it’s perfectly planned, will only allow herself when she isn’t busy trying to save the world. 

 

She knows her town is fine and switches to a completely arbitrary path. 

 

To have no destination is not to be aimless.

 

(What is freedom?)

 

---

 

It's the beginning October when she enters a small restaurant for a late lunch. It isn’t busy, nor is it empty. It has a peace only achieved outside of a city. Kameko sits against the wall and observes. A girl, about eleven, comes to her with a small writing pad.

 

“What can I get’cha, miss?”

 

When she smiles, Kameko notices at least three missing teeth. 

 

A fun age for a child.

 

Kameko hums, “What do you have?”

 

The girl straightens, puffing out her chest, “We have everything! My Ma’ll make ya anything you ev’er wanted!”

 

Kameko nods slowly, “A local special then.”

 

The girl's smile widens, “Juss’ you wait, miss!”

 

---

 

The food is decent, cheap and comes with a side of berries.

 

Kameko figures it’s almost time to go back to Konoha, if only to repel suspicion about her return correlating with the Kyuubi Attack. 

 

She has just paid her tab when a body flies in, back first. The door is in shambles and the body soars across half the restaurant before plummeting downwards.

 

 Kameko’s relaxed mood falls faster.  She turns to the doorway as a man steps in casually. He is half skin, half dark thread and his smile is both excited and entirely dispassionate. 

 

The juxtaposition makes her skin crawl. 

 

Kameko has fought S-rank shinobi who wished her harm. She’s felt the residual chakra and intent following The Fall. She killed Danzo Shimura.

 

She’s never felt an aura quite like his. Not with the sheer power to back it up. 

 

That doesn’t mean she’s afraid. 

 

Turning her head just enough to hold both the man and his prey in her line of sight, Kameko steps in front of the small serving girl.

 

The girls auburn hair frames teary brown eyes. She’s trembling.

 

Life does tend to steal fun. Kameko wonders how much it takes as tax before returning just enough to keep them alive. 

 

She steps forward, “Please take this elsewhere.”

 

The prey looks at her desperately, “Help me! Please! I swear I...” his eyes land on the girl behind her, and they darken, hands clenching, “ Oh. Sweetheart-”

 

She pinpoints her KI on him alone, “Silence.”

 

He freezes, then sobs, before going completely lax. 

 

(The terror in his eyes pleases her. Viscerally. The man is not the only predator present.)

 

She does not move closer, and turns to the man who is watching her with sharp eyes. 

 

(He is not seeing her. )

 

“Your name, sir?” she asks politely. His hitai ai is crossed out, but shinobi business is not hers, and the prey’s chakra is vile . A manipulator. Greedy. Scum.

 

He eyes her, “...Kakuzu. And you?”

 

They are simultaneously surrounded by civilians and completely alone.

 

She deflects, “Why are you looking at me as though we’d met?”

 

He wouldn’t be able to recognize a Mizuko on duty and apart from his eventual attendance as Akatsuki, she doesn’t know him any better than he knows her.

 

He smirks, “You have a Bingo Book page, Chiharu -sama .”

 

She curls her lip, “Do not antagonize. I have no issue with you.”

 

His eyes glint, “Maybe I want your head.”

 

She tilts her head, “Is it more for me to be alive or dead?”

 

His gaze is unwavering, but he leans forward in response to her question, “You aren’t a lot in Iwa’s or Konoha’s, yet. Kumo had a high bounty that recently disappeared. Mist has nothing. And Suna claims you as an associate.”

 

She lets out a small noise, “Mm. So probably alive?”

 

He cackles.

 

“Well you definitely aren’t worth much dead. Not enough for me to go after.”

 

Her eyes flick toward the prey. 

 

“Don’t kill him here,” she orders.

 

He raises an eyebrow, “What if I want to?”

 

She puts a hand on her waist, unimpressed, “Is scaring civilians a hobby or collateral?”

 

He huffs, “Maybe it’s both. What will you do?”

 

She raises an unimpressed eyebrow before grinning, “I’ll tell you what. We leave together, take your prey out, have some fun,” she winks, “and then I’ll take you out for dinner.”

 

He blinks, “I can be bought.”

 

Kameko nods, “Nice to meet you, Kakuzu.”

 

---

 

After slipping enough money to cover the damage into the girl's hand and patting her head, Kameko sweeps out of the restaurant, Kakuzu a step behind with his prey over his shoulder. 

 

(Nothing calms shinobi quite like seeing the back of a threat.)

 

Their steps are silent as they descend from the small hill.

 

Kameko leads them to the outskirts of town and off the beaten path, stopping in a grassy clearing. They ignore that the civilians steer clear regardless. Realizing she’s stopped, Kakuzu drops the prey unceremoniously. 

 

Kicking it lightly, Kakuzu scoffs, “How pathetic. How long will he be unconscious?”

 

She shakes her head, “I’m not sure. My KI has never completely knocked someone out.”

 

(She doesn’t mention that it’s rare for her to use it at all- let alone that potent, that passionate.)

 

He looks at her, “I enjoy free food, but I am not a sadist. I do not care about you and that man or what he has done.”

 

“Then why did you come with me?”

 

“I don’t know.”

 

Kameko nods, “I thought it was just me. Your body is not aligned with time, correct?”

 

“I am not normal, no.”

 

Her lips twitch up, “Uzushio has fallen.”

 

Kakuzu squints, attempting to decipher her meaning, “It has.”

 

“From now on, it’s timeless.”

 

---

 

When the head is in a sealing scroll, the valuables taken, and the body left to rot, Kakuzu turns back.

 

“Someday, will I come and collect your bounty?”

 

She grins, “Perhaps,” her eyes grow sharp, “Will all you do is collect bounties?”

 

They part.

 

---

 

To wander is not to be aimless.

 

(A journey evokes the most sadness with its completion.)

Notes:

And yes, I do think Rasa would really respect Kameko as his teacher and would take that seriously. Because he's a good egg.

 also, sadist here is purely referring to someone who likes causing pain. They aren't kink shaming.

Okay guys, updates might be a bit inconsistent from now on because my personal computer broke. I'm still writing on my laptop I got from the school, but it has AO3 blocked >:( so I can't post or reply to comments (but i can see them and holy crap you guys are ridiculously sweet and it totally motivates me!!!)

Right now, I'm using my brothers laptop but I had to pay him so...

Hope you enjoyed!

Chapter 14: Fourteen

Summary:

Kameko's back in Konoha.

or

Another Gai heart to heart, Shiranui Genma, and Uchiha Shisui's prank. In the first half, that is.

(The Kyuubi Attack)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

Her return to Konoha, to Shisui and Tobirama-sensei, is simple. She is not barred entrance, nor is she welcomed.

 

For her, it’s plenty.

 

The weather has not yet cooled and her first stop is 3600 Ume. When she arrives, feeling Tobirama and Kagami’s chakra curled into each other, it’s home.

 

Another one. 

 

“Some people have many home’s,” Yuma-shisou explains to a six year old Kameko. 

 

Kameko lets out a small huh? before beaming, “Like the Daimyo!”

 

Yuma lets out a startled laugh, “Not in the way you think. “Tadaima” and “Okaeri” are powerful for a reason .”

 

Bopping her on the nose, Yuma continues, “People can be home just as much as a place, more so even.” 

 

Kameko’s eyes widen- she understands this, despite the fact that it's never been said so simply. 

 

“And sometimes, we have different home’s for different things. And that’s okay.”

 

Petting her hair, Yuma sighs, “Occasionally, we even have home’s that aren’t like us at all. If we’re smart, and a bit lucky, having multiple homes makes you stronger.”

 

Kameko smiles.

 

---

 

With her household still asleep and content, Kameko heads towards the morning market. She picks fresh vegetables and is halfway through choosing fruit when she hears a roaring “Chiharuuuuu!”

 

Glancing upwards, she is unsurprised seeing Gai breach the horizon line. His out-of-uniform ANBU arm piece, however, is unexpected. 

 

Gai stops in front of her, slightly panting, as the brown haired teen next to him catches his breath in large gasps. 

 

Raising an eyebrow, she waits fifteen seconds mildly, before speaking.

 

“Panting is good and fine, but it’d do you better to do breathing exercises after finishing a run.”

 

He glances up at her, face sweaty and flushed. She nods, “Hold your breath, one, two, three. Release, one, two, three. Repeat.”

 

Seeing him close his eyes and listen to her instructions, she turns to Gai before smiling apologetically.

 

“I’m sorry I left while you were on a mission- I should’ve told you.”

 

He shakes his head, “Please do not concern yourself, Chiharu-san! My time with you is that of blooming flowers and your kindness has helped strengthen the roots of Konoha, assisting even my reluctant Eternal Rival! I dare not be greedy of your time!”

 

Strengthen the roots? Kameko bites her lip. Positive collateral, an interesting concept indeed. 

 

She finds it fitting that Gai would find the good in the world, even if he had to flip every rock to find it.

 

Kakashi had an interesting past life, she thinks, to be surrounded by the best who are simultaneously self-sacrificing and courageous enough to follow through. 

 

Kameko reaches for his hands, slowly enough that he could pull away. He doesn’t, watching her with wide, shy, vulnerable eyes.

 

(To be yourself so honestly that others can’t see you, Kameko believes, is something Gai will not be subjected to. Not by her . She thinks this is a good goal, despite its size. Groundwork. Roots .)

 

The ANBU glances between them before disappearing silently with a small nod of farwell. 

 

“Maito Gai,” she begins in a strong voice, “You do not impose. By keeping my name, you have become one of my closest.”

 

His grip is tight.

 

“You are of true character and I respect you.”

 

Tears well up.

 

“While I did not have the honor to meet your father, the reflection you cast and symbolize is something I know he would be proud of.”

 

She brings the lanky teen in for a hug.

 

“My time with you is blooming flowers and beautiful smiles.”

 

He sobs, arms encircling her waist.

 

“Your brilliance, your humanity, is admirable and cherished.”

 

---

 

Later, when Gai has left and the groceries have been collected, Kameko walks down an empty alley. When she is far from the noise of the main road, her follower drops in front of her. 

 

She stops. 

 

It’s the ANBU from this morning, brown hair brushing his shoulders and a sebon between his teeth. He pauses. She waits.

 

“My name is Shiranui Genma,” he starts. 

 

“I am called Chiharu,” she replies. “Why are you here?”

 

She has an idea, but assumptions are bad. 

 

“I know Hokage-sama has not deemed you an immediate threat, despite your prowess,” he makes eye contact, “And I’m still wary.”

 

She waits.

 

“But there’s a lot to be wary of in general,” he grins at her with charm that can only be fostered through a tested Seduction Corps member, “And I’d like to get to know you better.”

 

Kameko examines him. He is impressive, has a strong Will of Fire.

 

She dips her head, “How does seven sound?”

 

He relaxes minutely, “Perfect. Call me Genma!”

 

---

 

Despite her date for the evening, Kameko has most of her day free. She has missed her precious people, her friends. 

 

When she approaches 3600 Ume again, she can tell that everyone’s awake. Turning her keys, she nudges open the door, “Tadaima.”

 

Shisui dashes straight into her legs. She blinks. She was gone a few weeks and he goes from not even crawling to running?

 

And no one told her?

 

Rude Konoha citizens. 

 

Nonetheless, she swoops him from the ground and brings him to eye level, staring suspiciously, “What, do you talk now too?”

 

He blinks, a smile spreading wide as she rubs her cheek against his. 

 

“Maybe.”

 

The blood drains from her face, “...eh?”

 

He giggles, “Got you! Got you!”

 

Uzumaki Kameko, duped by a genius two year old.

 

Terrible twos, indeed.

 

(At his age, she had perfected pick pocketing, misdirection, guilt tripping and gaslighting so she probably shouldn’t be surprised.)

 

She hums, “Well I know what this deserves.”

 

He tilts his head, “What?”

 

She’s holding him with an arm under his bottom and a hand splayed over his back. “Well, you’ve obviously understood at least part of my monologues.”

 

He nods. 

 

“Shinobi will probably congratulate you on your first successful long term undercover assignment,” she looks into his dark eyes, “I will tell you to never lie to those closest to you. Hone your skills and protect them, but ignorance is only bliss before everything falls.”

 

“Yes, shisou.”

 

She blinks down at him, “Excuse me?”

 

He grins at her, “At first, I was quiet because I was shy and wanted to get a grasp of your character,” he looks a bit sad, “I didn’t get to meet a lot of new people.”

 

She’s wrapped her head around the fact Shisui is obviously much smarter than she initially believed.

 

“But then you took me places, told me stories, taught me more than anyone in the Clan’d be able to, and I kept quiet,” he looks shy. “After a while, it felt too awkward to reveal that I could talk and stuff, and then you left so suddenly,” his hands clench, “And you didn’t say goodbye.”

 

Her heart constricts.

 

“And so I promised myself that when you came back I’d be completely honest.”

 

An ultimatum she didn’t know she was part of. She’s torn between amusement and pity.

 

(Kameko will not stay in Konoha.

 

But then again, a couple years, a lifetime, is not necessarily staying for her.)

 

She ruffles his hair, “You don’t have to be my apprentice to stay on my hip,” she tells him. “Children deserve love and affection and it's always best to simply tell me, “I want attention.””

 

He sniffles before tucking himself in the junction of her neck and shoulder, “...Okay.”

 

Smiling, she bounces him a bit, pressing a kiss to the crown of his head.

 

“Why don’t we go to the park?”

 

---

 

A thought, stronger than lightning, strikes her, “Tobirama and Kagami knew, ” she seethes.

 

(Kameko appreciates traps. She likes pranks. She loves justified vengeance.)

 

---

 

It’s mid-afternoon and she’s relaxing on the couch, reading with Shisui in her lap. Originally he had asked her about unknown words but after an hour, started dozing against her breast.  

 

He jolts when he hears a stifled yelp from the bathroom.

 

When he sees Kameko's smile, he freezes and settles.

 

---

 

Upon stepping into a popular barbecue restaurant, Kameko’s evening with Genma ends almost as soon as it has begun. A man with three scars on one side of his face clamps his arm around Genma’s.

 

“Raidou?”

 

Raidou dips his head and whispers rapidly in Genma’s ear, not that it stops Kameko from eavesdropping. 

 

“So apparently Konoha’s best kept secret is that Shikaku’s a sensor and he’s been watching the door for the last five minutes. Then you walk in with the lady who makes a joke out of Yondaime-sama…

 

Genma groans, holding up a hand, before sending her a morose look, “Knew I shouldn’t have taken you here.”

 

She bats her lashes, “Can’t deny I expected a bit more getting to know each other but, well, maybe some other time.”

 

Genma blinks rapidly, a light flush climbing up his ears. 

 

Kameko tilts her head, “I pegged you for a flirt, but maybe not.”

 

Raidou chortles, “Beat you at your own game- sucks to suck, hun.”

 

Genma sniffs haughtily, “I’d be offended on behalf of Minato-sama’s honor if I could beat her,” he peeks at her through his lashes, “because you are clearly,” his voice turns a bit breathy, “very talented.”

 

Kameko opens her mouth to respond, a wicked smirk pulling at her lips, when she hears her name. Pouting, she turns to Shikaku, “Ruining my fun,” she deadpans. “So rude.”

 

“So troublesome?” he teases. She nods seriously, “Exactly.”

 

He rolls his eyes, “Stop flirting with children, Chiharu, you’re my age.”

 

(If Chiharu starts caring about age differences between adults, she’ll be completely alone in half a century.)

 

Ignoring the wide eyes behind her, she tosses a careless wave over her shoulder as she heads toward Shikaku. As she gets closer, she matches faces with chakra signatures for the other occupants at the table. 

 

Shikaku points his chin at the men across from him, “These are my genin teammates. Yamanaka Inoichi and Akamichi Choza.”

 

They nod with polite smiles. She taps her ring finger to her thumb, “A trio of clan heads, huh. Who was your sensei?” she questions curiously. Catching their collective wince, she waves her hand, “Nevermind. It’s nice to meet the real wives.”

 

They blink. She continues, subtly placing a privacy seal on the table, “Not that it’s my business, but you’re all very sweet together.”

 

Shikaku unfreezes, “How do you know ?”

 

Kameko thinks petulant despair is a good look for him.

 

Choza and Inoichi go from surprised to suspicious in a heartbeat, eyes narrowing. Kameko laughs genuinely, the sound erupting from her stomach.

 

“Well,” she wheezes, “I suspected from the way Shikaku talked about you but…”

 

Inoichi understands first, “You, you played us?”

 

She hums, wiping stray tears from her lashes, “Not used to that, Mr. Interrogation?”

 

Her eyes glint a dark purple, “Never forget to look underneath the underneath. Or,” her lips tilt up, “To remember that your eyes are yours.

 

“Overconfidence is deadly and safety is an illusion,” her eyes aren’t looking at the Ino-Shika-Cho, “Though ignorance can be bliss.”

 

Choza nods, “I see why Shikaku likes you.”

 

Kameko slides into the both, nudging Shikaku between the ribs, “Little old me?”

 

He grumbles. Inoichi hums, a gentle smile curving his lips, “He talks about you fairly frequently, ‘she could single handedly destroy a village but I honestly don’t think she’s a threat to what the founders intended’ la, la, la,” he waves his hand, a cheeky grin in place. 

 

Kameko’s delighted by the information, turning to Shikaku. He resolutely avoids eye contact, “You’re more interesting to talk about then paperwork, that’s all.”

 

She leans against him, “You could’ve just said you wanted to be friends,” she straightens. 

 

“Wait,” she pauses, letting her thoughts organize themselves, “You already did , didn’t you? When I asked ‘will you earn a nickname’ you didn’t say no or snort or anything!”

 

Shikaku’s ears are red.

 

She turns to him, biting her lip, “I’m really sorry- I don’t ever mean to be insensitive,” she smiles gently, “You’re fun to tease, fun to play shogi with, and I think we have the potential to be a, no, the platonic power couple.”

 

He turns as far away from her as he can, trapped within the booth, “I’m an adult. I know how to communicate.” 

 

He takes a deep breath before letting it out noisily. He turns back to her, still a bit bashful, “But I think we should definitely be a platonic power couple.”

 

They share a smile before Inoichi interrupts, holding his sake in the air, “To the best platonic power couple!”

 

Choza cheers.

 

“And so, the world trembled,” Shikaku snarks.

 

“We totally could make it though?”

 

Inoichi nods contemplatively, “My money will always be on you two.”

 

Kameko fist bumps him from across the table, “Shikaku your bae’s are approved .”

 

---

 

After leaving the men to return to their compounds, Kameko returns to the park where she first met Kushina. She’s brushing her hands against a redwood when she hears the soft pitter-patter of geta against the stone path. 

 

Looking down, Kameko sees a small Uchiha boy with long hair and small indents on his cheeks that drop from his eyes. 

 

“Hello,” she says.

 

“Good evening,” he returns. 

 

They continue. 

 

(It happens again. And again. She will not know his full name for a long time yet.)

 

----

 

October tenth comes and Kameko prepares a seal.

 

The day follows without calamity.

 

---

 

Kameko is paranoid and Tobirama and Shisui are the only ones around to truly notice. She hasn’t left 3600 Ume and her silent pacing is ever present. She hasn’t let her guard down, hasn’t slept.

 

It’s October eleventh.

 

She knew she would ruin and stain destiny itself but she hoped, planned that it was for the best. She loves her friends, likes Minato and Kushina well enough, and knows no child should be abused.

 

(She is not a god and she should not meddle and she knows that but the wind whispers encouragement and the animals aren’t rabid against her and she dares not leave Konoha to return to the sea so soon.)

 

She knows it is her duty, as Kameko to Yuma, to do her best by the world. To help the people, the bijuu, the animals, the plants. 

 

But how can she do that when the problem is nowhere in sight?

 

This could be a good thing, but Kameko hasn’t heard anything about Naruto already out of the womb and she knows they aren’t in the clear yet. 

 

Time ticks. Kameko paces.

 

It’s October twelfth. 

 

---

 

Two days later, Kameko feels a wave of malicious, evil chakra.

 

(It tastes like pain.)

 

She picks up Shisui, hiraishins to Kagami and Tobirama and promptly hiraishins the three of them into her house on the shore. With her first task completed, Kameko hiraishins back to Konoha. 

 

When she flashes to the top of Hokage Rock, she pauses. The space is empty and she probably has a few spare minutes, but it's morbidly interesting to see picturesque Konoha squashed and ablaze. 

 

Squaring her shoulders, Kameko opens her sensing and spreads her seal across the clearing. Anyone who steps into it will immediately have their chakra drained, lose movement, and be branded with a hiraishin that distributes a fatal electric shock if it’s attempted to be removed by anyone apart from herself. 

 

Hoping that it’s enough, Kameko goes full stealth and retreats into the tree line just as Obito reaches the clearing, his visible eye widening. A millisecond later, Minato appears alone- Kushina and Naruto are nowhere to be seen. In less than an instant, she knocks the blunt side of her kunai against Minato’s temple and watches as he crumples.

 

Obito chuckles, a dark sound. “I can’t say I expected a trap,” he admits freely, “Though, you knocking out Hokage-sama ,” he spits out the word like filth and she can’t bring herself to disagree, “is even more unexpected.”

 

She hums, watching his torso before sliding into motion against defenceless, captured prey. 

 

“Well,” she whispers against his ear, “I would like to talk to you, too. Not now though.”

 

With a sharp blow, Obito crumples. Heaving him over her shoulder, Kameko quickly teleports to the “empty” half of Uzushio. A Mizuko is waiting. 

 

“Restrain him,” she instructs, knowing the Mizuko already knows how big of a threat he is, “And kill him if necessary.”

 

She returns to fire, death, fear.

 

(“We call it Konohagakure no Sato.”)

 

She picks up her seal, and no one will be able to find proof that it existed. Minato will wake soon, around the time Hiruzen will arrive. She tugs a hiraishin seal. 

 

The next moment, she is facing a bijuu.

 

(Living, scared, angry. )

 

Rubble is underfoot and heavy chakra surrounds her from head to toe. Bodies litter fallen buildings. And in front of her is a dying Uzumaki.

 

Nononono-

 

She takes a deep breath, this is not Uzushio.

 

(Konoha will not Fall.)

 

Racing forward, she steps in front of Kushina and baby Naruto. “Stop using chakra,” she commands, “It’s a miracle you’re alive. Do you intend to leave your child an orphan?”

 

Kushina stiffens, affronted, and they don’t have time for this.

 

“You’re a parent now- you don’t get to be a self sacrificing fool .”

 

Yanking a nearby shinobi who’s trembling but determined to face death, she points him towards Kushina and the child, “Get them out of here,” he opens his mouth, “ Now .” And with that, Kameko releases her sky blue chakra chains that are her birthright

 

It’s obvious that the Kyuubi, Kurama, is beginning to come back to himself after the traumatic incidents the last couple hours have been for everyone involved. Unfortunately, the shinobi will not rest until the bijuu is contained- or gone.

 

Wrapping chains around his ankles and knees, she pulls out , making him fall flat, belly-first. Taking a step closer, she places a hand on his closest paw and yanks .

 

Hiraishin is usually relatively forgiving of passengers that have a similar mass. It’s safe to say that the Kyuubi no Kitsune is far larger than Uzumaki Kameko. When they land among the dunes with a shockwave that sends sand spiraling higher than any building, her reserves are a quarter gone. 

 

It’s enough that a civilian-born shinobi would’ve died. 

 

Kurama is flexing his claws and snaring before he even realizes that they’re no longer in Konoha, “Leave me alone!

 

Kameko sighs, hating what she’s about to do.

 

“Forgiving yourself is hard. Sometimes, it’s easier to pass the blame around,” Yuma flexes her arm muscles, her top rolled up at the shoulder, “But we take the hard way. We’re the trailblazers to make it a bit easier for everyone else.” This was one of the times where Kameko wondered if she truly was who her Shisou was talking to. She listens regardless.

 

“For what it’s worth,” she tells the trapped creature, “I’m really, really sorry.”

 

She takes out a small, handcrafted, glass sculpture that fits in the palm of her hand. It’s a red-orange nine tailed fox, intricately crafted with seals creating the patterns for facial features.

 

With one hand on Kurama and the other on the small sculpture, Kameko releases a controlled pulse of chakra.

 

“Fuin: Chakra Doll.”

 

The sand hasn’t had time to settle before the Kyuubi no Kitsune is sealed, again .

 

Kameko tilts her head back and screams. 

 

(“Leave me alone!” )

 

---

 

When she’s done and the nine-tailed fox is in her pocket, she hiraishins back to her town. 

 

She finds Tobirama first, perched on a scraggly tree that lines the coast. She sits beside him. 

 

“I’m angry that you didn’t let me protect Konoha from a bijuu,” he says. “Why did you do it?”

 

Kameko won’t deny an opening that came at the right time and she thinks, the right place. That doesn’t stop her from being a bit hesitant.

 

(Kameko knows the worst has only begun.)

 

“Shisou was special.”

 

Tobirama side eyes her before sighing softly, “In many ways.”

 

He waits, sitting against the trunk of a tree he knows intimately. 

 

“She knew a lot.”

 

Tobirama can do interrogation- flawlessly- but he has always had copious amounts of patience for his precious people. 

 

“Wise since I met her.”

 

Kameko wants to ask how old were you? Were you the same age? What did you like about each other? How did you meet?

 

“She was old.”

 

Tobirama raises an eyebrow. The wind knocks a piece of hair into her mouth. 

 

“She knew the future.”

 

Tobirama lowers his brow just so he can raise it again. 

 

“She was reincarnated but she remembered her old life. We were fake there.”

 

“Fake?” Tobirama isn’t sure if this is the part he actually wants to question, but it’s as solid a start as anything.

 

“She said we were all story characters in a book.”

 

They sit in silence, listening to the waves hit the shore and wind parse through sparse leaves. 

 

“So she knew everything about all of us and what would happen?”

 

When Kameko tilts her head, she spots a small frown adorning her sensei's face.

 

(She also sees the exasperated fondness in his eyes.)

 

She shakes her head, “Not quite. The story focused on a child who was born today.”

 

She sees Tobirama’s brain turning.

 

“They touch on the past, but she hadn’t even finished the story. She told me she only knew four people from your, her, generation.”

 

“And she prepped you to change things,” Tobirama has always respected, if disliked, Yuma’s decisions. He isn’t sure how he feels about this one.

 

“At my discretion, yes.”

 

“You know as well?” Red eyes dart to hers before he slumps a bit, weary. 

 

“I refuse to play god. I will take precautions and I will make sure people don’t die in exorbitant amounts-”

 

“And you will have my assistance,” Tobirama states. 

 

Kameko smiles, relieved, “Shisou gave us everything we needed to make a beautiful world, didn’t she, Founder-sama?”

 

Tobirama puffs his cheeks out.

 

“There was a time when she tried to teach me to be a well rounded person. To have empathy and be passionate. To fight against the odds and be alive . To be my own person.”

 

“I’m not sure if she believed she succeeded,” his voice cracks a bit, his lips part, “You are her legacy.”

 

Kameko shakes her head, “We both are.”

 

The world murmurs.

 

“To protect the flames and the sea and the Heart,” she echoes.

 

Tobirama blinks, before elation crawls unto his features. “From the sky through the valleys.”

 

Together, the last bit bursts from their bodies, and they cheer for what they will make happen .

 

“We rise again!”

 

(Neither notice standing up, digging their toes into the ground where dirt mixes with sand, absorbed with bellowing their song for the world to hear.)

 

---

 

In response, the sky sheds a tear and the stars blink and Kameko and Tobirama were never alone.

Notes:

Um... hmm

yes i believe gai is one of the few healthy shinobi who cries out his pain and does introspection and grows as a person bc of it.

just wait bc he won't be the only one :)

i swear i didnt mean to make shikaku a sensor or a partial tsundere going into this chapter but well... I also meant to write Genma so

Hope you enjoyed!

Chapter 15: Fifteen

Summary:

Obito, Tobirama & The Village Hidden in the Leaves, and the aftermath of the Kyuubi Attack.

Or

Some backstory, a new way to train, and goodbye's.

Notes:

endish of part one, but there won't be an update gap or a timeskip or anything else dramatic

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

 

Despite her respect and adoration for Tobirama, Kameko keeps one secret: her longevity. Naturally, he knows she will outlive him, he just doesn’t realize by how much.

 

Kameko knows she is unique , knows that will never change, but that doesn’t mean she wants to be looked at differently .

 

That doesn’t change the fact that telling her sensei a pile of secrets leaves her mollified. 

 

When they settle, the conversation returns to pressing matters. 

 

“You know who attacked Konoha,” Tobirama states.

 

Kameko nods, proud of her sensei in a way only a student can be. Tobirama knows the inner workings of the village and he’s brilliant .

 

(She wonders if Yuma-shisou ever had a fangirl stage for him?)

 

“His name is Uchiha Obito and he is the, lets say, protege of Uchiha Madara.”

 

Tobirama settles, “While it’s true that Konoha was my brother's dream, I adopted it as my own. He brought the bricks to build it, I was the one who wrote the instructions and made the mortar. Together, we built it tall, built it safe, built it sturdy.”

 

He sighs, eyes darkening, “And then Madara left.”

 

Kameko turns her head, watching her sensei’s silhouette. 

 

“Hashirama thought that Madara would be a better Hokage, and I made it a democratic decision because I refused to believe Anija could be bested at anything by him, never genuinely thought Hashirama knew what he was doing when it related to his best friend ,” he barks out a laugh, “Not enough to trust him, at least.”

 

“To be wary and paranoid is important,” Kameko replies, “But so is moderation.”

 

He nods, “I made many mistakes, like anyone else, but mine had consequences far greater because of my position. Shinobi lost their moral code so long ago we don’t know what to do with ourselves, how to be better, so we give up and follow the elders, who also didn’t know any better and followed their elders.”

 

They share a sigh.

 

“Anyways,” Tobirama continues, “Madara was best friends with Anija for a reason, and that final battle hurt in more than a physical sense. I held quiet beliefs for a long time that Hashi-nii fell to heartbreak.”

 

Kameko hums, absorbing what she’s heard. 

 

“It would not surprise me that between hearing of Anija’s passing coupled with his family’s demise and separation from his clan, he broke. Snapped.”

 

Shattered, she thinks. Kameko slumps a bit, “The Curse of Hatred is very real,” her voice is soft, “But Madara’s hand in this life was atrocious.”

 

Tobirama growls, belatedly protective, “ More?  What else happened to him?”

 

“While Shisou didn’t know all the details, he was essentially manipulated by the Rabbit Goddess who resides on the moon.”

 

Tobirama raises his hand before slowly lowering it, “That was… not what I expected you to say,” he admits. “Surely, there is a way to protect the village?”

 

Kameko nods, “As of now, I have captured and imprisoned Obito.”

 

“Busy, aren’t you, Kameko-chan?”

 

“Learned from the best.”

 

She digs her feet in the ground, “We can interrogate him later- I need food and sleep.”

 

They crest the hill to her village, her people, together.

 

(They are both leaders. They are both brilliant and strong. And yet, they also coexist.)

 

---

 

Considering that Konoha is a wreck, Kagami agrees to stay in Kameko’s town with Shisui for a few days. 

 

During that time, Shisui follows Hanzo like a baby duck, Kagami gets a new sparring partner and Tobirama is dumbfounded.

 

“My ears are healthy,” he says, aghast. 

 

Kameko squints, “That’s a good thing?”

 

Tobirama slowly shakes his head, “I honestly don’t know anymore.”

 

Hanzo fidgets awkwardly, bowing a bit lower than necessary, “It’s nice to meet you.”

 

Tobirama blinks owlishly before nodding, “And you as well.”

 

Kameko thinks it’s a good start.

 

---

 

Eventually, while Hanzo is showing Shisui the geography via nature walk and Kagami is speaking with the locals, Kameko and Tobirama head to where Uchiha Obito is held.

 

---

 

Obito awakes to grey walls and a small light.

 

(Obito awakes to chains and pain.)

 

He thinks. The last thing he remembered was seeing Minato knocked out and a glowing seal under his feet. 

 

The trap.

 

He heard a kunoichi whisper in his ear. Why did she knock out the Hokage? How did they know he was coming?

 

(Is Minato okay?)

 

(Sensei needs to die.)

 

What happened to the Kyuubi? Zetsu told him they need the bijuu for the Tsukuyomi Plan. For Rin.

 

( RinRinRinLovelyKindGoodRin- dead.)

 

He groans. Needs Rin. Needs safety, needs home, needs her smile.

 

He feels himself drop a bit darker. Into the pit, into the acidic tar until he can’t see. He will continue.

 

By any means necessary.

 

---

 

The door opens.

 

---

 

When it closes, Kameko holds a jar and a box and no new information.

 

“What do you want, Obito?”

 

“You can’t give it to me.”

 

The room is empty.

 

---

 

She puts his eyes in Chinami Hall and spreads his ashes over the cliff.

 

“I hope the reality and ideal are not separated by a dark, wide chasm,” she whispers. “I hope he can find peace within himself.”

 

Tobirama stands behind her. 

 

---

 

When they settle down for dinner, Kameko blinks at her table.

 

While she has had meals with Yuma, the Sannin, Gai and Kakashi, her family meals in 3600 Ume, it isn’t the same as having a family meal in the house she’s built for herself. 

 

The warm feeling reappears in her chest. She thinks she knows what it is now. 

 

She names it Dui* . To overcome obstacles and feel loved, to harness spirit and connect with other living beings. 

 

“In other stories I read, there were tales of a golden core,” Yuma-shisou says. “The concept is a core within you, similar to your hara for chakra, but you must grow it yourself. It allows you to connect to other things in two ways- you can see and help spirits and it connects you to nature. The second concept is similar to nature chakra, which you would harness to be a sage.”

 

Kameko parts her lips before closing them, pausing. 

 

Yuma continues, “I’m not sure if it’s possible in this, or any, world and it just hasn’t been done or if it isn’t how things work.”

 

Kameko shrugs, “So don’t worry about it?”

 

Yuma smiles wanly, “A penny for your thoughts on a rainy day, perhaps.”

 

Kameko has no summons and no sage training. She thinks that cultivating Dui might be a good thing to add to her longterm to-do list. 

 

Then Shisui smiles cheekily at her and the Dui spreads all the way down to her toes. 

 

She smiles back.

 

(Sitting at the table feels easier somehow.)

 

---

 

A few days turns into a week and eventually Kameko knows her mini vacation is over. Shisui and Kagami are saying goodbye to the villagers when Tobirama touches her elbow gently.

 

“Can we talk?”

 

“Of course.”

 

They return to the coast and the scraggly tree and Tobirama sighs, “While you litter the world with your seals and search for Zetsu,” he begins, “I’d like to stay here.”

 

Kameko nods slowly, “Okay. What will you do?”

 

He smiles roguishly, “While it has been nice to spend time within Konoha, I miss my lab and experiments. My training. My land.”

 

He gestures to the coastline, “This is ancestral Senju land; where I learned to fight, to care for my family, to defend what was important. I built a village on what I learned here, but I lived there as an adult for about a third of my life. Konoha will never quite be home,” he admits. “Not my main one.”

 

“It was made to protect the King,” she says. “It has fulfilled its duty.”

 

He straightens, “As it should.”

 

Tobirama is like a strict mother.

 

“And,” she smirks, “you checked on your village and made sure everything was in order. Now that you’re sure it’s fine, you’ve gained a bit of freedom.”

 

The mother that goes to a personal, explosion-proof lab instead of a bar with their free time.

 

(A cool mom.)

 

His lips tilt upward as he catches on, “I have been teased for mother henning the village,” he admits freely, “It is my pride and joy and better than any other.”

 

Kameko stifles her giggles, “Indeed.”

 

---

She leaves Tobirama with a few Mizuko lab assistants and makes a bet with Kagami on how long it will take to pop them all. 

 

With the Kyuubi in her pocket, she hopes that Zetsu will not try to collect the remaining bijuu immediately. 

 

Not that she’d rely on hope alone. 

 

To remove any possible confrontations with Suna, she’ll simply steal the Ichibi before Gaara is born, preferably after she says her goodbyes. If she collects the bijuu, it will surely bring Zetsu to her, but she won’t kill innocents. 

 

Yugito, for one. 

 

She’ll simply leave a Mizuko with the ones she doesn't want to kill and collect the bijuu when they die naturally.

 

The era of jinchuriki’s is over .

 

(Step One.)

 

---

 

When they arrive in Konoha, Kameko is not surprised by a decimated yard surrounding a pristine house.

 

The first thing she did when arriving at the 3600 Ume was put up seals.

 

Uzushio protected it’s loved ones by any means necessary.

 

(Until they didn’t.)

 

Shisui cheers, “Thanks, Shisou!”

 

Kagami gifts her a soft smile, “Thank you, Chiharu.”

 

She leans forward, her lips just brushing his ear, “Call me Kameko.”

 

When she pulls away, his ears are red. 

 

“I’ll always do my best to keep you guys safe,” she tells them. “So call me if you need me.”

 

They touch their seals.

 

“Go on inside,” she shoos them forward, “Go home.”

 

Between blinks, Shisui is hugging her knees. 

 

“Come back.”

 

“I will.”

 

“Stay safe.”

 

“I will.”

 

“I love you.”

 

“I love you, too.”

 

---

 

After leaving the Uchiha’s, she has a few more stops to make. 

 

She bumps into Gai first, this time at the top of Hokage Mountain.

 

“I’m going on an extended mission,” she tells him, “I’m here to say, ‘see you later.’”

 

He cries, but Gai trusts her word. He wishes her luck, happiness, and safe travels.

 

(They both value honesty.)

 

---

 

She finds Kakashi next, eating with Kushina and Naruto at a small restaurant. Because most of the restaurant district was converted to dust, it’s stuffed to the brim.

 

When they spot her, Kushina freezes. Kameko taps her shoulder, “I’m not here for you,” she tells her. “But I do have advice if you want it.”

 

She glances down at Naruto and her lips quirk upwards- he still has whisker marks. He’s adorable, and sleeping soundly as a newborn should. 

 

Then she turns to Kakashi, “I already told Gai,” she starts, “But I am going on an extended mission.”

 

His eyes narrow, “You haven’t been in the village.”

 

She tilts her head at him, “I know.” 

 

Kakashi stoically weathers the flash of embarrassment. 

 

“Why did you help?” Kushina interrupts. “Why didn’t you let me die?”

 

Kameko turns her head and curls her lips, “You are no longer simply a kunoichi. Nor is Minato simply a Hokage. You are both parents now.”

 

Kushina tilts her head, “I’m not going to be a housewife!”

 

Kameko is beginning to get annoyed, she’s on a time limit. Taking a deep breath, “Who said anything about being a housewife?”

 

Kushina splutters, “Well, what do’ya mean then, dattebane?”

 

Kameko sighs, “It means prioritize the fact that you have a child that needs you. It means not being a self sacrificing fool .”

 

Kameko levels her gaze with Kushina’s, “You are one of Konoha’s best kunoichi and dying doesn’t save any of the people you have the potential to help in the future. You want to think like a kunoichi?”

 

Kushina nods mutely.

 

“You are an asset to the village. You die and you send the Hokage into grief- detrimental to the village . You die and your son loses anything you could have taught him , including the dying art of fuinjutsu. You die and you won’t take any students , won’t pass on your suiton jutsu or any of your other unique skills.”

 

The longer she goes on, the paler Kushina gets. The restaurant has long since quieted.

 

“You tried to take on a bijuu after childbirth with your newborn in your arms ,” Kameko says slowly, “Do you now understand why that was a bad idea ?”

 

Kushina slumps, “Yeah, dattebane.”

 

She looks down to the baby swaddled in her arms, “Sorry, Naruto-chan. Your mama will always fight to stay by your side.”

 

Kameko nods, “And that is the best you can do,” she rests her hand over Kushina’s knuckles, “Do not forget your Will of Fire, kunoichi.”

 

Kakashi, realizing their moment is over, begins, “That only makes sense if it comes from the perspective of Konoha kunoichi,” he says. “You’re ROOT, aren’t you? You got to play civilian but with all the damage it’s all hands on deck.”

 

She looks deep in his eyes.

 

He thinks he’s right, she concludes. But he also wants to be right. That’s dangerous.

 

Instead of laughing like she originally wanted to, Kameko’s tone is dry, “I’m afraid not. I saved Kushina-chan out of my own plans,” the shinobi population tenses- it seems they know that they no longer house the Kyuubi in the village, “And now I’m leaving.”

 

She smiles gently, “I will, however, return. Goodbye for now, Kakashi-kun. Don’t get into too much trouble.”

 

Despite turning his face away, she spots the blush that rises just above his mask, “...Bye.” 

 

The restaurant erupts into conversation when the bell jingles after her exit.

 

---

 

When she visits Shikaku, his office is a mess and he has bags under his eyes. 

 

“Do you want some help?” she asks sympathetically. “I can only help for an hour or two though.”

 

Shikaku’s eyes blink at her for a few moments before he stands abruptly, “Chiharu?”

 

“The one and only,” she smiles, amused. 

 

He tilts his head, “On one hand, national security,” he muses. “On the other…” he looks over his desk and shudders.

 

Kameko plasters on a winning smile, “If it helps my resume, I have experience as Acting Kazekage,” she tells him.

 

Shikaku snorts, “Of course you do.”

 

She sniffs. 

 

He hands her a stack of papers.

 

An hour and a half later with the assistance of a dozen Mizuko’s, his desk has a few leaves of paper remaining and he is gaping. 

 

“A kami…,” he whispers reverently. 

 

She slaps him. 

 

“Anyways,” she tells him seriously, pleased when he straightens. “It’s time for me to go.”

 

He furrows his brows. 

 

“I’ll come back eventually,” she comforts, “But I’m not sure how long it will take. These,” she holds up two ribbons- one red and one black, “Are for Shikamaru.”

 

He tilts his head, “Bit of an odd gift there, Chiharu. He hasn’t been born yet.”

 

“They have my hiraishin seal on them. Two pulses for an emergency that requires my assistance,” she explains curtly. “I’m trusting you not to bring me into a trap. If you’re ordered, do one pulse and I’ll come, but I will be prepared to fight.”

 

He nods.

 

“Thank you, safe travels.”

 

“Thank you, my pleasure.”

 

They share a grin.

 

---

 

Kameko has some time to spare before Tsunade finishes her shift and tackles the second-to-last part of her to-do list.

 

Yakushi Kabuto.

 

At the moment, he’s about thirteen. 

 

While she had considered including him in Mizuko’s therapy program, she had eventually discarded the idea after doing surveillance. Kabuto is a functioning, brilliant, selfish sociopath with a decade of training and people skills.

 

Kameko refuses to deal with the inevitable fall out.

 

(After October 21st, Yakushi Kabuto is never seen again.)

 

---

 

Tsunade is her last stop. 

 

Jiraiya and Orochimaru are out on the village on missions but Tsunade’s expertise is valued higher domestically. It’s just after her shift and Kameko brings pork buns.

 

“It’s time for me to go,” she tells her.

 

Tsunade flinches. 

 

“Already?” she whispers. “ Now?

 

Kameko brings her friend into a hug, “The three of you will be fine. Eventually, when I’m done, I’ll come back.”

 

“But now ?” Tsunade pleads.

 

Kameko pulls back, “I’m protecting the King,” she tells her, “And all of my precious people.”

 

She pulls back a bit, bopping Tsunade on the nose, “Including you.” 

 

Tsunade flushes, “We’ll miss you.”

 

“I’ll miss you too.”

 

She leaves her with two letters.

 

---

 

When she leaves Konoha, she doesn’t look back.

 

---

 

Instead of heading to Kumo right before dinner, Kameko figures there’s one thing left to do before tomorrow.

 

Steal the Ichibi.

Notes:

My hand slipped-

In the additional content story, which is canon to this story, I did have HashiMito. Here, there is implied MadaHashi and it's up to you if there was mutual pining that never became a relationship or some sharing that wasn't enough or maybe Mito was just a beard... tbh these ships were not planned and they just keep slipping in so, oops?

And how many of you thought Kameko was just socially stunted about the warmth in her chest? Uh huh.

Yeah, me too.

But I guess we're doing some world building now, not that it'll effect anyone other than her. I've written a few chapters ahead, and I have to admit that I like where it's going. Dui is NOT Kishimoto canon and I completely made it up while i was out of internet. Turns out it means "correct" in mandarin (according to my google) which I thought was a cool coincidence.

Also, characters I plan to die... aren't. So. Hmmm. It's fine.

And, well, Kameko keeps giving out her name when she leaves.

(It's not an accident)

---

Wow, that was a long note. 'Till next time, happy holidays!!

Chapter 16: Sixteen

Summary:

Considering Uzumaki Mito, the bijuu, and Karatachi Yagura

or

Kameko takes an international trip and meets an Old Spirit

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text



Her trip to Suna is instantaneous. 

 

While its security has improved since she stole their forbidden scrolls, there's still no match between her stealth skills and the Mizuko network. 

 

When she arrives in front of the tea kettle, she places a hand on it before hiraishining to the empty mountains in Lightning Country. 

 

Placing it on the ground, Kameko takes out a second glass figure. This one is a tan, one tailed, tanuki. 

 

“Fuin: Chakra Doll.”

 

Once the kettle is simply a kettle, Kameko burns it to ash. 

 

---

 

Kameko goes to the Valley of the End.

 

(Beginnings rise from pain and change. For the hope of better things.)

 

---

 

This , she thinks, is where the first bijuu was sealed by Uzumaki Mito.

 

Many people revere her for that alone. 

 

Kameko thinks that Mito is a disgrace. A kunoichi, a wife, but the beginning “of the End.” 

 

Yuma had once told her about Uzumaki Mito.

 

“A wonderful seals mistress? Yes.” Yuma tells her, “We all know that. Spirited and cunning? Yes. I knew Mito as a girl and I know she held the Will of Fire.”

 

She sighs.

 

“I just don’t think she had the Heart of Eddies. Mito was Uzumaki-hime, but she was never quite Uzushio. I don’t think she wanted to be.”

 

“What?! Why?” Kameko cries, outraged and indignant.  Her home isn't perfect, she knows that better than most, but to choose to leave? No loyalty, no filial piety. She was   the princess!

 

Yuma shrugs, “Just how she was. We can’t force people to be different from who they are, Kameko-chan. We just observe and know that they will be the way that they are.”

 

No one has observed the bijuu “the way that they are” in a very, very long time.

 

(“Leave me alone !”)

 

She sets down the Kyuubi and Ichibi on one side of her. On the other, she sets down the other seven sculptures. Each glass figure is small enough to stand in her palm. 

 

These sculptures had been hand crafted by her through blood, sweat and tears. They’re perfect.

 

(They have to be.)

 

Only the seals, all smaller than the human eye can see, scrawled on the bottom of their paws are to keep the bijuu within the sculpture. 

 

The rest, the ones that make the details- the black that make claws within the indents, the darker red within the foxes ears, the pupils, all serve different purposes. 

 

One allows them to talk, to see, to move, to feel once she adds chakra. Another allows them to use their chakra offensively, for self defense, against anyone other than her. A seal that lets them use chakra to stick to surfaces. A hiraishin seal that can call her or send messages. One that makes the glass virtually indestructible. One that keeps it clean.

 

It’s more freedom than they’ve had, the ability to be alive and safe- even as a small creature. 

 

(It’s dependent completely on her.) 

 

She can summon them, with or without consent. Can determine how far they can go. Where. Can shrink them and slip them onto a silver chain she wears around her neck. Can freeze them the moment they try to tamper with any of the seals- not that they’d succeed. 

 

Worst case scenario for Kameko, they get Stockholm syndrome. Worst case scenario for them, it’s no different than any other container. 

 

(Maybe worse.)

 

Kameko sighs. 

 

Glancing at the other seven dolls, she places them on the necklace. It’s a pretty thing, a silver chain with nine tiny rectangular pendants. Facing forward, each pendant holds a bijuu in what looks like simple art. When the bijuu is free, it’s empty space. Facing sideways, like books in the same series, the pendants are magnets and connect to each other, spelling To Cherish All Creatures .

 

Steeling herself, Kameko adds a bit of chakra to the dolls in front of her.

 

For a moment, nothing happens.

 

“You can move,” she tells them.

 

Kurama jolts forward, legs unsteady, “This is wrong!” he cries, “This isn’t right! Who are you? What are you?”

 

Kameko blinks. 

 

The Ichibi yells and squeaks, but nothing that comes out sounds quite like any language Kameko knows. He flails in every direction before sloppily following his tail. She hopes she didn’t break them somehow.

 

“I, um, I am human,” she stammers, caught a bit off guard. The questions were expected, the phrasing? Not as much. They seem like terrified children. Considering that, she tentatively exudes mild Positive Intent. “I am Chiharu-sama, but you may call me Kameko.”

 

Kameko already knows and has come to terms with her dubious morals but she’ll be damned if she isn’t going to share her name with the imprisoned and ancient chakra creatures. The ones that obviously already have PTSD from other human fuck ups.

 

The ones that will be the only ones to outlive her. 

 

(The ones who could keep her company.)

 

The Kyuubi sits on his haunches, eyes flashing in every direction, ready to try to escape. He hasn’t lost hope for freedom.

 

Then, so quietly, a civilian would’ve missed it, “What did you do to us?”

 

Kameko watches him carefully, watches his tail bristle and his puffed up chest and remembers “Leave me alone !”  

 

She flinches.

 

Then she puffs up her chest, “I made dolls and sealed you both within them. You can move and feel things.”

 

Kurama snorts, “Even you can’t stop me from feeling things.”

 

The doll stops glowing and stills. She sighs, folding it up into her necklace, tapping it softly before turning to the Ichibi. 

 

He’s stopped moving now, staring off into the wilderness and whimpering. 

 

He stops glowing and Kameko sprawls against Madara’s forehead, “ Stupid.

 

(She isn't talking about them.)

 

---

 

“I will be leaving,” she explains. “I do not know for how long, and I apologize for being unable to train your medics in the time frame I originally gave.”

 

A nods sternly, “...Is this related to Konoha’s Kyuubi Attack?”

 

She smiles wryly, “In a way.”

 

Darui must pick up on something Yugito doesn’t, his brows furrowing.

 

He meets Chiharu’s eyes, “You knew it was going to happen.”

 

(He phrases it as a statement. It is a question he doesn’t want the answer to.)

 

She dips her head in a shallow nod.

 

Yugito recoils. She has a healthy dose of both respect and fear for Chiharu but even during a war she wouldn’t have allowed a bijuu to destroy so many innocents. Civilians. And she knows, knows Chiharu could’ve stopped it if she wanted to. So why didn’t she?

 

Yugito feels sick.

 

(Yugito is a kunoichi and she does what needs to be done. She is not cruel.)

 

Chiharu glances over at the group, pausing on Yugito’s frozen form. She knows what shinobi do to each other, knows it takes a certain type of person to murder for a living, but Chiharu was never like that. Could’ve killed everyone on their team ten times over but they never went home with injuries worse than bruises .

 

Chiharu isn’t a villain, Yugito knows this, but perhaps her god-like nonchalance is more chilling.

 

“Until next time, I hope.”

 

(The trail Chiharu leaves behind matches and merges with the sky.)

 

(The day is bright and cloudless.)

 

---

 

With her goodbye’s finally completed- she’d like to see Yuma call her antisocial one more time - Kameko touches her necklace. 

 

“To Cherish All Creatures,” she repeats.

 

She has things to do when she returns and she has things to do now.

 

---

 

Her plans are relatively simple- capture the bijuu that she can and leave clones with trustworthy jinchuriki- which she’s already done for Yugito and B. 

 

While collecting, she’ll place her hiraishin seals across the Elemental Nations and work on cultivating Dui.

 

Eventually, she either finds Zetsu or he finds her. Her goal is to find him as quickly as possible but she hasn’t discounted the fact that he might wait until she’s old and vulnerable or dead.

 

Jokes on him. 

 

Even if he has lived for over a millennia, there was a reason  Zetsu attempted Kaguya’s return before it was perfect, flawless. 

 

He’s dying. Weakening.

 

Slowly but surely, Kaguya dims and Zetsu with her. Kameko assumes this is because while Kaguya is immensely powerful, she isn't a true deity. 

 

It’s a pivotal game of hide and seek between unrivaled spymasters. The stakes are loved ones.

 

(Kameko will protect her precious people no matter what.)

 

---

 

She heads to Mist.

 

The first village she comes upon is on the outskirts and still recovering from the Third War. They’re also recovering from Kiri nosediving towards civil war and genocide and then spinning and flipping towards recovery.

 

Kameko does not blame them for being wary. 

 

Nonetheless, she stays at a small inn and eavesdrops in the common room.

 

“They say that Yagura isn’t having his fits anymore.”

 

“Really? How longs’ it been? Do we know why?”

 

The fisherman snorts, “Hell, they- them upper levels- are claiming he was under a genjutsu .”

 

The buff lady at the counter is silent and Kameko amuses herself by imagining her face before the woman explodes. “Mist’s a fucking shinobi country- one of the Great Five! You’re tellin’ me that them higher ups are tellin’ us that none of ‘em noticed that shit?! None? Not one of them noticed their leader was under a genjutsu? What kind of Kage even gets caught in a genjutsu?”

 

“Well they say it was a mighty strong one,” the fisherman eggs her on.

 

Kameko turns to another conversation happening across the street and hears something similar- with one more interesting tidbit.

 

“They know we all mad,” a teenage girl whispers to a friend, “I heard they was gonna crown a new jinchuriki in the name of unity or somethin’.”

 

“The hells a jinchuriki gonna do for unity ? All we’ve heard for years is how a jinchuriki’s ruining our country!”

 

“I know- I heard they’re pickin’ a kid now. Sucks for whoever that is, hate to have one of them monsters in me.”

 

Kameko sighs, and I’m sure they’d hate to be in you, too.  

 

At the same time, her mini recon excursion has yielded strong results. If Utakata isn’t a jinchuriki yet, then she still has a chance to secure the six tails. 

 

Her time table has sped up, but a lead is always exciting.

 

(Kameko is prepared.)

 

---

 

When she arrives, it’s to a procession. At the center, there’s a small boy next to a large jar surrounded by shinobi. People gather around them, curious and wary, but there is no cheering. 

 

Kirigakure is showing it’s people in a display of good faith, but people are still suspicious and bitter. 

 

(Damage control does not change the fact that harm was done.)

 

The air is ripe with tension and the crowd is made up of the same amount of people as citizens come to catch a glimpse then leave. 

 

Kameko frowns. She’s going to have to steal the jar in broad daylight if she’s assumed correctly and they’re on their way to the sealing. 

 

Unfortunately for Kiri, Kameko’s on a mission and she doesn’t particularly care if the country decides to tail spin back into civil war. 

 

(Mist led the assault against her home .)

 

Rolling back her shoulders, Kameko henges as a man with basic brown eyes and dark hair. 

 

With that, she jolts forward.

 

---

 

She relies on pure speed without an anchor hiraishin seal and her fingertips just brush the jar before she has to dodge two swords, skidding to the side. 

 

Unfortunately for them, that brush was all she needed.

 

With that, she summons the jar to herself and returns to Suna. Nestling it gently in the hot sand, Kameko stares blankly at the container.

 

Letting out a groan, Kameko slaps her hands over her face, “So embarrassing! So dramatic !” she berates herself.

 

Shaking out her limbs and ignoring that she just stole the Rokubi like some exhibitionist heist bum , Kameko removes a third doll and places a hand on the jar.

 

“Fuin: Chakra Doll.”

 

And just like that, Kameko has three bijuu in her direct possession, two indirectly. 

 

---

 

Kameko is not the type for breaks when she has a project and immediately flashes back to Kiri, this time as herself and with eyes for a different target. 

 

Karatachi Yagura will have a two step test; the first being whether he is a good jinchuriki, the second is whether he is a fit leader for Kiri. The one they need to recover. 

 

If he doesn’t pass both, Kameko is just going to take the Sanbi and move on. 

 

(She already dislikes that B and Yugito continue to hold their bijuu. It feels like loose ends.)

 

---

 

When Kameko implemented her Plan to Talk to Kage, she can’t claim this is what she expected. 

 

---

 

She found him on the beach in the early morning, long before the sun was set to rise.

 

“I am Chiharu-sama of Uzushiogakure.”

 

“My name is Karatachi Yagura,” he begins, “But I am no longer fit to call myself Mizukage.”

 

Kameko sits beside him, “Why?”

 

“I have failed my people, my companion bijuu, my values,” he says, “I’m not sure what I am anymore.”

 

“Thank you for your honesty,” she replies. He himself claims he cannot be a good Kage or jinchuriki and with that mindset, it’s true. Despite that, she likes this man with magenta eyes. Likes his honesty and ability to self reflect. 

 

“I might have to kill you. Would you fight me?” 

 

Yagura leans back on his hands, “I don’t know. Perhaps my shinobi instincts would make me.”

“What do you think about your shinobi instincts, Karatachi-san?”

 

“I fell for a genjutsu,” he spits, “Didn’t even notice it for years.”

 

“I can tell you about that, if you’d like.”

 

Yagura hums, watching the waves, “No one here knows how it happened.”

 

“He wasn’t from here. Not any of the Hidden Villages- and to be frank, no one could handle another war right now, Suna maybe . So don’t try,” Kameko is clever, and everything is a test. 

 

Yagura shakes his head and her lips curl, pleased, “I’m sick of searching for bloodshed. Kiri isn’t ready for war, nor do we seek it. Not right now.”

 

She can’t help herself, “Kiri’s certainly taken enough blood to drown many times over.”

 

He turns to watch her, “I was young during the siege, and Fall, but I remember when they came back.”

 

“A history exchange?” she proposes.

 

Yagura shrugs, “Different perspectives are important. The ones that came back, they weren’t proud. The Fall of Uzushio was nothing less or more than a massacre. They were strong, but they didn’t stand a chance.”

 

Kameko’s eyes darken, but her anger isn’t at Yagura. It’s at his retired and dead kin. 

 

(Sometimes, that’s hard to remember.)

 

“Many were ashamed of themselves- pretended they weren’t, but there’s a reason there’s never been a similar event since. No one wants that to be warfare.”

 

“A bit late to be “ashamed.””

 

“Possibly. Had they known survivors, I doubt they would have apologized.”

 

Kameko blows out, “Shinobi. Sometimes I think I can, at the very least, I can understand their motives. Other times, I’m just in over my head.”

 

Yagura’s exhausted features switch to bewilderment, “You are a kunoichi.”

 

Kameko smirks, but this time the natural amusement isn’t there, “I am trained. I have long since found the difference between that and a shinobi.”

 

Yagura watches her, “I did sometimes wish I hadn’t gotten myself into this mess. Been a fisherman, perhaps.”

 

“In another life.”

 

“Yes.”

 

----

 

After the first night, she’s undecided. So she goes again the next night.

 

---

 

“I forgot to tell you the truth about the genjutsu.”

 

Yagura simply nods.

 

“The person's name was Uchiha Obito,” she begins, “But he was not working for Konoha. He was manipulated by his kidnapper turned sensei, who was in turn manipulated by someone I am hunting.”

 

“What is their goal?”

 

“Obito has recently been killed by me and that was probably the event that allowed you to break the genjutsu,” she continues. 

 

Yagura sighs, “They have wronged me and everything I stand for. Please allow me to help you.”

 

Kameko sits on her haunches, considering her options. 

 

“They are hunting bijuu,” she breathes. Yagura stiffens. 

 

“They continue to wrong me,” he amends. 

 

“I already have help,” she tells him. “I’m only here to see if I should protect you or kill you and take the Sanbi.”

 

“You are also collecting the bijuu?”

 

She nods, “Mostly as bait but I am,” she pauses, “not pleased about jinchuriki existing. With the sealing arts dying quickly, it’ll only become more dangerous as time passes.”

 

“It’s not so much a win-win as making the best of the situation,” Yagura admits. 

 

Kameko interlocks her fingers.

 

“I do not want to burden you like I burden my village,” he admits. “I have positioned and trained Terumi Mei to take over as Mizukage- she is meant to begin today. After dawn.”

 

The world murmurs.

 

“May the waves caress her and the wind tell her the tales of the ancestors.”

 

“May she lead, be flexible, and cry,” Yagura finishes. 

 

Do you want to die?  She wonders, what inspires you?

 

“I want you to take Isobu. I want you to care for him and make sure my people are okay,” he tells her. 

 

“You seem to believe I can do many things.”

 

“I have lived a long time, long enough to know those who are strong. The ones who can rule the world.”

 

Kameko chuckles dryly, “Younger than me,” she tells him. “Why should I do this for you?”

 

He gives her a sharp grin that she doubts anyone has seen in a long time, even before the genjutsu. 

 

“Because you don’t rule the world.”

 

Kameko cackles.

 

----

 

On the third morning, Yagura leads her to a small cave. They sit in the middle, quietly.

 

“I am a med-nin,” she tells him, “Equal to Tsunade with bigger reserves, better bedside manner.”

 

He glances at her, “I will fight.”

 

His eyes glaze over, “And Isobu as chosen to cooperate.”

 

She nods once, then stands and starts placing down silencing seals. 

 

When she’s done, she takes out a fourth sculpture of an immaculate, three-tailed turtle. Gently, she takes Yagura’s hand and squeezes, “Be strong, both of you.”

 

With a collective breath, Kameko hisses, “Fuin: Chakra Doll!”

 

---

 

Once she has checked that the Sanbi is safely secured and nothing has gone wrong, she immediately turns to Yagura, her hands glowing green. 

 

His heartbeat is there, but she now intimately understands why no one’s been saved from the brink. His chakra system is so, so fucked that any amount of healing chakra just exacerbates the process. 

 

Taking a deep breath- Yagura is going to die if she uses iryo ninjutsu. He will die if she doesn’t. Think. Think, think, think. What else is there?

 

Dui.

 

She pauses. Taking a hold of the Dui she has stored in her chest she pushes it up to her shoulders, down through her arms, past her finger tips. It’s both easier and immensely harder to move than chakra.

 

Her hands glow a dull gold and she quickly presses them into his chest. Please work, she prays.

 

(“Be strong.”)

 

The Dui seeps into his body, and then he’s glowing . Every part of his chakra system is visible through the glowing lines as it repairs itself, the remnants of his chakra also turning gold. 

 

The Dui’s absorbing the chakra, she watches, rapt. 

 

(It’s the last thing she sees.)

 

---

 

“You shouldn’t play with things you don’t understand, child.”

 

Kameko jolts, turning towards the dark skinned androngynous figure in the corner.

 

“Where did you come from?” she blurts.

 

The figure sighs, “You called me earlier, the both of you. To look after the new leader.”

 

Kameko’s hand drifts to her necklace, “A deity?”

 

The figure’s blue hair is half down, half up in beautiful, intricate braids. “Not quite,” it says, mirth evident. “I am just a very old spirit.”

 

Kameko has so many questions but she bows first, “It is an honor to meet Old Spirit,” she starts, knowing that she has not earned their name. “This one is called Uzumaki Kameko.”

 

She straightens slowly, “Forgive this one’s arrogance, but do you know about Dui? Will it be able to save Yagura?”

 

Old Spirit nods, “Yes. I have frozen time within this cave so your friend will not get better or worse while I explain.”

 

Kameko nods mutely. 

 

“You are Blessed by the Land, Sea and Spirits,” Old Spirit says, “And you listen to us. That alone makes you very special, even disregarding that you attempted to use “Dui” to heal instead of hurt.”

 

Kameko smiles, but it isn’t genuine. 

 

“In my time, we simply called Dui “Zero Life Force.” It is the first step to anything alive- chakra itself is just a form of diluted, surface-level Dui. Within humans, you are born with enough to live, but it does not regenerate and should you run out, you die. It must be cultivated, which you have subconsciously done throughout your life, allowing you to save that boy.”

 

“So it’s just chakra?” 

 

Old Spirit smiles indulgently, “In the same way a bastard child is related to noble grandparents. Technically yes, but it is very different. Dui is inherently purer and stronger than chakra.”

 

“Is it related to nature chakra?”

 

Old Spirit hums. “Nature chakra has a higher Dui ratio then normal chakra.”

 

Kameko nods, “Okay. How is it able to heal Yagura? His chakra system is fried and if Dui is chakra it should be reacting badly?”

 

“It may be easier to consider Dui and chakra as separate entities. Dui is the “zero” for anything natural and can be made stronger through Will. It heals the intense chakra burns because it is purifying the chakra within his body and healing the pathways as it goes. Jinchuriki often die when the bijuu is removed because the creatures take the person's Dui with them, or they burn through it themselves.”

 

Old Spirit continues, “Normal chakra is originally just diluted Dui, but because it is so weak it can be tainted and polluted depending on who wields it. Malleable.”

 

Kameko bows again, “This one thanks you for your shared wisdom.”

 

“Good luck, Blessed.”

 

---

 

Now that she knows what Dui is , Kameko feels much more confident in the situation. 

 

Her Dui was able to convert and purify Yagura’s remaining chakra. His chakra system is still healing and he is low on Dui, but he will survive. 

 

Resting her head gently on his chest, Kameko smiles.

 

“Thank you for fighting.”

 

Notes:

the bijuu have trauma.
THE BIJUU HAVE TRAUMA.

my lord, i feel like that gets ignored. they aren't middle schoolers who don't have anyone to sit with they were literally
1. dead dad/guardian, abandonment issues
2. free and roaming only to be sealed and constantly repressed/loss of freedoms
3. feared and attacked everywhere, trust and self confidence issues
4. each other kinda? they're pretty socially stunted. Lonely bc they feel like no one is an equal + why would anyone enjoy their company? *see 3

they will be cared for but their healing journey isn't going to be one chapter, and a lot of their care for Kameko is only accepted bc they know she won't die of old age just bc they took a nap or something, ect. Besides, they've been sealed but they haven't had the lease as loosened, so to say. We'll see if that backfires, later.

anyways, we'll be seeing the bijuu more but they'll be wary. They'll be mean. Just remember, they also have their reasons.

On another note,,, I haven't actually finished Shippuden (and i ain't one for Boruto.) despite knowing a lot of spoilers so Kaguya will be the 'big canon enemy' we see in this piece

Until next time :)

Chapter 17: Seventeen

Summary:

Meeting Terumi Mei, Kaguya Kimimaro and Zetsu.

or

Kameko takes a five year old hunting.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

With Terumi Mei being approved by both the Old Spirit and Yagura, Kameko figures she should implement the Plan to Talk to Kage one last time in Kiri. 

 

It seems odd that her chosen free time would be mid afternoon when many are working, but Kameko recognizes that everyone’s unique.

 

“Hello Mei-chan. I’ve heard a lot about you,” she greets politely.

 

Mei’s a good shinobi, doesn’t jump or tense up. Her eyes find Kameko’s almost immediately- not that she’s hiding. 

 

“All good things, I hope?” she questions airily.

 

Kameko nods, “Of course, of course.”

 

They’re both playing politics so intently it feels like a joke. Kameko likes her, too.

 

(She hates Kiri. She can learn to accept the people within.) 

 

“Because you’re Mizukage, I thought I’d inform you about a couple things,” Kameko shares generously.

 

“I’m listening.” Mei’s body is relaxed, but she’s facing Kameko and her arms are near her sides. 

 

“I’ll begin by reassuring you that you aren’t the only Hidden Village with no bijuu,” And, just like that, it seems that Kameko’s being reevaluated. “Of course, conflict can be so tragic- I couldn’t bear to continue speaking on that subject.”

 

“Are you sure I couldn’t convince you?” Mei brings her hands together, emphasizing her cleavage. 

 

Kameko sighs wistfully, “Not today, I’m afraid. Just wanted to tell you it isn’t a Hidden Village stealing them, either.”

 

Mei's smile is wicked, “And I don’t suppose you have anything else to tell me?” 

 

“Oh, maybe just one thing,” Kameko says coyly, “But yes. I’ll be taking Yagura-san with me, he’ll be joining an, ah, exclusive program.”

 

Mei’s eyes flash and Kameko knows she’s accidentally gone too far. Oh dear.

 

“What did you do?!” she hisses, “If you hurt Yagura-”

 

“I didn’t,” she interrupts, “I just removed his bijuu.”

 

Kameko winces when Mei spits a glob of lava at her. “Okay, that didn’t come out right. Kami, Kages I swear!” as she dodges a second fiery way to die. “Never want to listen to the whole story.”

 

When a third ball flies towards her, Kameko starts getting annoyed. Placing a kunai at her neck, Kameko moves to whisper into her ear, “That’s enough.”

 

Mei freezes before her body heats up. Kameko steps away.

 

“Who are you?” Mei’s tone is no longer melted sugar or smooth chocolate, but venomous and enraged. Helpless. She reminds Kameko of Kurama. 

 

“I am Chiharu-sama of Uzushiogakure. I do not like Kirigakure, but I have been asked to watch over it. That being said, I do what I want and I’m currently busy. Therefore, I wanted to check in on the new leader, make sure everything would go alright.”

 

Kameko sighs dramatically, “You were doing so well, too. I don’t care for your connection but Yagura is no longer a jinchuriki, he is alive and recovering, and he is coming with me.”

 

Kameko flashes an eye smile she stole from Kakashi but that he’ll probably end up accused of stealing from her, and gives a short, two fingered wave.

 

“See you later, ‘kay, Mei-chan?”

 

---

 

With his misaligned Dui and chakra combined with a healing chakra network, Kameko summons five Mizuko’s to escort Yagura to her town instead of attempting hiraishin. 

 

She intends to extend an invitation to the Mizuko Become a Better Person Program.

 

(Perhaps he’ll have a chance to become a fisherman.)

 

(Karatachi Yagura will always be the Yondaime Mizukage.)

 

---

 

She’s been walking leisurely out of Kirigakure when sees a small army of white haired people rushing towards the shinobi village.

 

Blinking, her mouth makes a small ‘oh.’ The Kaguya are attacking and her Shisou’s told her about this. 

 

It seems that before heading to Taki, Kameko will be taking a small detour.

 

(The details make the story.)

 

---

 

She finds him two days later next to a river bank and in front of a fire, roasting fish. He looks about five.

 

“Hey, little one.”

 

He jolts, looking up at her with wide, guarded eyes. She nods, “Yeah, kid, they’ll be coming after you soon. Want to come with me?”

 

She’s asking nicely, but Kameko’s taking him either way. She changed the future and Orochimaru won’t find him this time. He’s her responsibility.

 

(She knows what it’s like to be five and alone.)

 

“My name’s Kimimaro,” he responds quietly.

 

“Nice to meet’cha. You can call me Chiharu-baa.”

 

(Kameko will never trust herself to be a parent, but she’s a kickass godmother. She thinks she could be a good aunt or a grandmother with intricate stories.)

 

---

 

It takes pathetically little effort to convince him to follow her. 

 

The hard part is when she tells him he’s going to be staying in her town with the Mizuko’s. 

 

“I’m strong,” he insists, “Useful. Take me with you.”

 

Kameko keeps a neutral expression as she considers her choice. While she had planned to have him participate in Mizuko’s therapy program, it wouldn’t be as effective if he feels like he’s just been abandoned by the first person who cared. It’d do more damage than good to his psyche and self worth. 

 

Plus, he could defend himself. And she was plenty strong enough to fight even while protecting him. 

 

By the time she found Zetsu, she’d have to flash back to pick up Tobirama anyways.

 

“Okay,” she decides. “But if I speak in a serious tone like I am right now, you listen without question. Am I understood?”

 

Kimimaro nods enthusiastically, a smile tugging at his lips.

 

And just like that, Dui pools in her chest.

 

(It hasn’t been more than a month since she’s said her goodbyes. She’s missed the warmth.)

 

She smiles back.

 

----

 

It turns out that Kimimaro is almost six but he’s malnourished and small for his age. Kameko buys another sling, this one a dark green with silver wind spirals and dots of snow decorating the fabric. 

 

She keeps him on her back as they travel, his head nestled in the crook of her neck. For the most part, she runs while he’s asleep. During the day, they stop at small villages and natural attractions. She lets him play and eat and learn while she cultivates or trains.

 

From mid afternoon to sunset, she enforces a naptime where she erects a defensive barrier and a subte genjutsu and they sleep, curled together. 

 

It takes less than two weeks to arrive in Taki.

 

---

 

She tells Kimimaru to be quiet and takes him with her for information gathering. It is one of the more influential small villages and isn’t quite as dangerous as one of the Great Five.

 

She thinks it’s a good start. 

 

(She’s training him, but for all Kameko cares he could be a fisherman. She might even prefer it.)

 

The timing of her arrival in Taki is far more opportune than Kiri’s. Their jinchuuriki is old and sick and already close enough to death that the village whispers. 

 

And yet, a new container has not been selected. Any other time, Kameko would investigate more on the politics but she already has Mizuko’s in Taki and she simply doesn’t care. 

 

---

 

With her sealing prowess, the extraction takes less than a minute.

 

She leaves before the body is cold. 

 

---

 

Because he’s still growing and most of their bonding has been primarily primal, Kameko decides to take a week off and give Kimimaro a chance to recover from their incessant traveling.

 

(She has five bijuu and two jinchuriki.)

 

---

 

“What is this?” Kimimaro questions, poking at the sweet dumplings.

 

“Dango,” she tells him while biting her own. “Tell me if you like it.”

 

“‘Kay.”

 

He opens his mouth wide, making a small “nom.” At the last moment, he chickens out and simply nibbles at the sugary snack. 

 

Kameko raises an eyebrow as he chews, “Well?”

 

When he tucks in again, his cheeks are red and his eyes are sparkling.

 

“Good,” he decides.

 

Kameko nods slowly, watching his bulging cheeks and sticky hands.

 

“Good,” she parrots.

 

---

 

“What is that?”

 

“A spice. Good with fish.”

 

“What’s that?”

 

“A toy. It floats and moves on still water.”

 

“What about that?”

 

“Looks like a weapon. Probably.”

 

“What’s that?”

 

“... A civilian child.”

 

(“Are you sure?”)

 

---

 

It’s dark and Kameko’s ninety percent sure Kimimaro’s having a nightmare.

 

She doesn’t know what to do. 

 

( Protectprotecthurt- )

 

He awakes with a gasp, bolting upright. 

 

Trembling. 

 

(Why are his eyes still shut? Whywhywhywhy- )

 

“I’m here,” she tells him. “It’s no longer real. If it is, I’ll kill it.”

 

Kimimaro is silent apart from his ragged breathing, giving no indication whether he heard her or not.

 

“Can I,” his voice breaks, “Can I have a hug, Baa-chan?”

 

She meant to be gentle, but once he’s in her arms, Kameko squeezes him as hard as he does her.

 

(Pain means you’re alive.)

 

---

 

The third night, when Kimimaro is sound asleep and protected by multiple barriers and a Mizuko, Kameko heads to the roof. As much as she’d like to at least talk to the bijuu, Taki simply isn’t isolated enough.

 

(She doesn’t want to hurt anyone without a good reason.) 

 

Just because she’s being a considerate- as possible- travel companion, doesn’t mean that her hunt has taken a break. 

 

Han and Roshi are the next and last on her list and it’s almost a given that they’re together. Of the rare times that Mizuko’s have seen them, it’s likely they’re even dating.

 

Kameko sighs, pulling her hair down from it’s bun. 

 

They’re smart and they rarely show themselves to civilization in the first place. When they do, they’re heavily henged and constantly on the move. They also probably know that they're being hunted, which will probably drive them further underground. 

 

Zetsu probably knows where they are. 

 

Tugging her fingers through knots, Kameko analyzes the situation. The only places in the world that Zetsu can’t interfere with are Uzushio Island, her town and surrounding area, and 3600 Ume. If only because of the seals she’s placed. 

 

(Kameko is not a shinobi. They do not have the monopoly on paranoia.)

 

She has no idea how he thinks, how frantic he is, or the extent of resources he has available.

 

She knows he’s willing to risk anything.

 

( Everything. )

 

She smirks.

 

---

 

By the time Kimimaro’s vacation is over, Kameko has a lead. 

 

---

 

The good news is that the jinchuriki are still alive.

 

The bad news is it has taken Kameko five months to find them. And Zetsu befriended them. 

 

The great news is that Zetsu is there. She doesn’t even mind that part of her Brilliant Master Plan has been completely invalidated. 

 

Immediately making three Mizuko’s to fight and buy time, Kameko scoops up Kimimaro and sends a pulse of warning to Tobirama’s seal. 

 

A moment later, Kimimaro is set on the ground within her village and she and Tobirama have returned to the battlefield.

 

“Take the clones and subdue the jinchuriki,” she spits, eyes a violent indigo, “I’ll get Zetsu.”

 

And with that, they split. The trio are in the obscure mountains bordering Fire and Rivers, the area so secluded there are no residents as far as the eye can see. It’s ideal to reduce accidental casualties, probably chosen so no one would accidently spot the fugitives.

 

Tracing his signature, Kameko’s feet are soundless as she begins her hunt. When she bursts from the foliage and appears in front of him, Zetsu is already watching her.

 

You ,” she snarls. “Cause too much damage.”

 

White Zetsu is silent but Black Zetsu is pleased, “Me? I am but a humble servant.”

 

“Of a fake god.”

 

His eyes flash as he moves to impale her, “You know nothing. I am her Will.”

 

“She tried to create Dui herself,” Kameko retorts, “And failed so badly that she created chakra.”

 

Zetsu scoffs, “You are a weak human. You could never comprehend my Mistress's ingenious and regal actions.”

 

Zetsu isn’t a combat specialist. He knows it, she knows it. Despite that, he is capable and has two jinchuriki on his side. 

 

He is attempting a final showdown. She isn’t sure if it’s because she’s being underestimated or because he’s trying to steal her bijuu and know this will be his best chance. 

 

(It will not go the way he hopes.)

 

---

 

“I was the best Seal’s Master in Uzushio before it fell,” she tells him. “Which makes me the best in the world.”

 

Zetsu stands in the middle of a glowing seal, not unlike how she defeated Obito. This one will drain him of chakra until he ceases to exist.

 

It will not take long.

 

“I didn’t want to kill him,” Kameko confesses. His eyes flicker up, seething- he knows he has lost. He knows what that means.  “Because Uchiha Obito didn’t deserve that. Unfortunately, he was as corrupted as you are.”

 

“You’re a liar, Zetsu. Manipulative.”

 

“I could not afford the truth. I am not strong enough to force the world itself into submission.”

 

“You were created to be a pawn.”

 

“I will not regret my actions.”

 

“I know. Your actions were of genuine intent and great effort.”

 

You lost anyway.

 

(Pawn: a chess piece of the smallest size and value. The one killed first, or last.)

 

(The one that watches and grieves.)

 

---

 

When the middle of the seal is empty and the wind nips at her ankles, Kameko exhales slowly. 

 

“Tobirama,” she calls.

 

Then she calls again, “ Tobirama!

 

----

 

Regret , Kameko thinks, is an awful feeling . She’s tried to avoid it, even more avidly than most because of her impeccable memory.

 

(Because she’ll have to live with it for an eternity.)

 

Her first regret was leaving him to fight with nothing but a handful of clones.

 

“Fear is something complicated,” Yuma tells her while combing her hair, “It doesn’t really make sense. Sometimes you’ll feel that way for a reason, something you think is a reason- False Evidence that Appears Real- or no reason at all.”

 

Kameko nods, “I’ve felt it in my stomach. When my little hairs jump up.”

 

Yuma gently separates her hair into three parts, “Once it starts, once it gets out of control, it’s very hard to stop.”

 

“That’s okay,” Kameko says, “Sometimes it helps me know when to go away.”

 

Yuma nods, fingers twirling light blue hair expertly, “We are born to fear things for a reason. Instinct has saved my life as a kunoichi more times than I can count. But you cannot let it control you.”

 

“Remember Kameko, it’s a warning, not an endgame.”

 

Kameko tugs on the end of her finished braid, “And assumptions are bad.”

 

Her second was for doubting her sensei.

 

---

 

Once she’s snapped out of her minor panic attack, Kameko is easily able to follow the trail left by her sensei’s battle. 

 

(The birds have resumed chirping.)

 

Kameko’s rushing around the sharp, unnatural edge of a nearby mountain when she collides head on with a Mizuko running in the opposite direction. It pops, leaving her cargo sprawled over Kameko’s lap.

 

“Sensei?” she questions hesitantly. He’s dirty, a bit singed, but he doesn’t seem to have any major injuries.

 

“Chakra exhaustion,” he mumbles, “Won, though.”

 

“Of course.” She slumps, resting her head on top of his, curling around him protectively as memories of their battle return to her. “Good job,” she compliments.

 

“You too- I know you won.”

 

“I’m just that good?”

 

I’m just that good. You’re me and Yuma’s, brat.”

 

Kameko cards her fingers through his hair, “Always.”

 

When she feels his lips curl into a smile against her neck, Dui spreads out across her chest.

 

(Family and love come in many shapes and sizes.)

 

---

 

Kameko’s tired, but not exhausted. Tobirama sits beside her on a thick blanket as they watch the stars, eating warm stew the Mizuko’s brought after locking up the jinchuriki.

 

She’ll never say it, but it is nice to have a break from Kimimaro. He’s sweet, quiet and one of her precious people, but she always hesitates on how to handle him. It’s draining.

 

It’s also nice to spend some quality time with her sensei. “I fixed it,” she tells him, “Humans will still hurt each other, but at least Kaguya won’t kill ninety percent of them.”

 

Tobirama sets down his bowl and brings her into another hug, “I’m proud of you.”

 

“I did it for her,” she whispers in return.

 

Tobirama’s grip tightens. Kameko knows that without her and Kagami around, he’s probably a bit touch starved. She can’t say she’s any different, but she’s learned to ignore the itch under her skin.

 

She’s happy he’s outgrowing the unhealthy habit. 

 

A sharp wind blows and Kameko huffs, pushing Tobirama down until he’s laying down on his back. Ignoring his raised eyebrow, Kameko climbs on top of him, tangling legs and wrapping her arms around his torso, before pulling the blanket over the both of them.

 

“My old bones can’t handle camping,” she complains.

 

Tobirama stares blankly, “...Your feet are freezing .”

 

(When Tobirama wakes up surrounded by forest critters, he nods a quiet greeting and despairs that it isn’t the first time. Once he’s done counting, his mind sways between befuddlement and despair. He’s creative but he isn’t imaginative enough to conjure someone who’s worse than Hashirama.

 

It’s fine. )

Notes:

yes I'm on board with the Tobirama loves all the kids but calls them "brat" headcanon

we've seen how kameko can handle independent adults but we are seeing with kimimaro how she doesnt quite know how to handle children. She can do babies and adults and has patience but she didnt have parents so she doesnt quite know what to do + her own abandonment and commitment issues= do desire/attempt to parent

to be clear, the story writes itself and im along for the ride just as much as you guys I swear (dui? jinchuriki hunting? in my notes? i think not)

Chapter 18: Eighteen

Summary:

Kameko gets bonding time with Tobirama, Han and Roshi go before their judge, more bijuu conversations.

or

Kameko plays with water.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

They’re eating breakfast when Tobirama brings up the animals still surrounding the camp.

 

“Is this normal?” he questions delicately.

 

Kameko glances at a particularly fat squirrel, “No. Sometimes they hang out while I sleep but they’ve never stayed past dawn.”

 

Tobirama furrows his brow, “I will admit that something similar happened with Anija. I didn’t think it’d ever happen to someone else.”

 

Kameko shrugs, “It’s odd, but it’s probably either Dui or Blessed related. Like the Mizuko’s.”

 

Tobirama just shoots her a puzzled glance and Kameko blinks, “...Right.”

 

--- 

 

They sit facing each other on the grass, soaking up Kameko’s second confession.

 

“Sorry for making you my therapist,” she tells him.

 

Tobirama snorts before sighing softly.

 

“They always thought I was incapable of emotions,” he says, “And I love you, so thanks.”

 

Kameko blushes a bright red, “I love you, too.”

 

(For them, this is everything. Thank you for keeping me company. For opening my eyes again. I don’t know what I’d do without you. I’ll always listen. )

 

---

 

There are things to do and places to go, and today Tobirama and Kameko are taking a field trip to a local city.

 

“We shouldn’t waste time when there are imprisoned jinchuriki in our custody,” Tobirama smirks. “Let’s do it.”

 

Kameko cheers.

 

Neither of them disguise themselves and the downtown is just large enough that they don’t stand out. Kameko bites her dango, “Kimimaro and I had quite the adventures,” she tells him, “but I’m happy the bijuu hunting is over.”

 

Tobirama nods, “What do you plan to do with Han and Roshi?”

 

They wander closer to a stall that sells small bobbles, pretty things to take home and put on a shelf. Kameko tilts her head, “I’m not sure yet. Just because the problem’s gone, I’m not sure I want to let them free to do whatever.”

 

“Are they known for hurting others?” Tobirama fingers a small glass tree before setting it down and moving on.

 

“No,” she admits, following him through the market. “From what I understand, they’re decent people.”

 

“The problem then?”

 

“Everyone else had to pass my idea of a good jinchuriki,” Kameko kicks a small pebble.

 

“You think you have the authority to judge that?” Tobirama watches her, but he isn’t criticizing her.

 

“No. Maybe? I probably shouldn’t but I’ve already started. I can’t stop now,” Kameko explains. 

 

Tobirama sits down on the steps of an abandoned courthouse, patting the space beside him. 

 

“Yuma gave you the job of changing the future, and I don’t think there’s anyone who can tell you if you’re doing it right or wrong,” Kameko thinks of the wind that whispers encouragement or the rain that tells her stories and leans closer to Tobirama-sensei.

 

“Regret is going to be hard to avoid, but you will never be the only human to make decisions where you ‘probably shouldn’t’ have the authority to. Do your best to be sure.”

 

“That’s all I can do, huh, sensei?”

 

Tobirama smiles gently, “Please tell me if you figure out a better way.”

 

“Deal.”

 

---

 

They buy sandwiches from a local deli and have a picnic in a local park. When the conversation about his experiments lulls, Kameko asks the question that’s been on her mind. 

 

“Do you miss Konoha?”

 

Tobirama raises an eyebrow, “I miss my Konoha.”

 

Kameko smiles sadly. Uzushio is rubble but Konoha has outgrown Tobirama. She isn’t sure she could handle being left behind by her own home.

 

“Do you miss Konoha?” Tobirama asks.

 

“Why do you say it like you already know the answer?” Kameko whines.

 

He raises a white eyebrow, leaning against the back of the bench. She frowns.

 

“I’m not sure. I come and go from Suna all the time, but Konoha does feel a bit different,” she admits. “It’s not that I miss it more, I think, well, I don’t know how to explain it.”

 

Tobirama nods, “Why don’t you visit?” he prompts.

 

Kameko shrugs, “I guess, when I go back, it’ll be for a while?”

 

Tobirama chuckles, “You’re preparing your affairs so you can nest among the leaves.”

 

Kameko sticks out her tongue, “I don’t pick favorites.”

 

“Among the villages?”

 

“Yeah.”

 

“That’s true, but you will always favor some people over others, Kameko.”

 

Her fingers tap against each other, “That makes sense, I guess.”

 

(3600 Ume is one of her homes.)

 

---

 

When they’re done with their sandwiches, Tobirama takes out a notepad and pencil. 

 

“What’s your plan?” 

 

Kameko tilts her head, “Like the order to do things?”

 

Tobirama nods, “Once you write things down, you’re also able to check them off.”

 

Kameko smiles because this is probably his equivalent to a diary.

 

Her sensei is adorable- cuter than Temari with a big, floppy sun hat.

 

“Well, I want to visit you, Kimimaro, Yagura, Hanzo and the townspeople after each task,” she starts.

 

Tobirama nods, scribbling down her answer.

 

“First, obviously, we figure out what to do with Han and Roshi,” Kameko thinks aloud. “And I want to check on the people who’s destiny I know I changed, if slightly, but maybe we do that last?”

 

Tobirama twirls the pencil around his fingers, “Yes… it would make sense so you have a longer period to see if you need to interfere with their lives.”

 

Kameko nods in agreement.

 

“Let’s do Kiri second then,” Kameko decides, “Yagura wanted me to keep an eye on them and I want to do it personally.”

 

Tobirama’s handwriting is thin, solid, lines slanted with just enough natural curve that it seems elegant. Kameko watches his hands, littered in small scars, and thinks thank Kami I got to meet him.

 

She blinks back to the present, Dui and gratefulness pooling in her heart.

 

“Me and you,” she decides. Tobirama lets out a small, questioning sound. “We should take a trip.”

 

He furrows his brow while looking at the list, “You don’t exactly have a lot of free time,” he reminds her.

 

“Absence makes the heart grow fonder,” she quotes her Shisou, “But always make time for those you love.”

 

His red eyes watch her closely before he nods once, “I want to make up with the bijuu, even the ones I never met.”

 

Kameko grins, “Me too.”

 

Tobirama glances back to the paper, “Anything else on the to-do list before Konoha?”

 

Kameko nods, “I’m supposed to train medics in Kumo.”

 

And with that, Kameko’s plans are made.

 

---

 

After half a year on the road, Kameko is ready to abuse the Hiraishin seals located in almost every city in the Elemental Nations, not including the many miscellaneous trees or rocks in the middle of nowhere.

 

“Let's go home,” she calls. 

 

Tobirama’s eyes soften, “I’ll race you there?”

 

---

 

Walking down to the little prison on Uzushio with Tobirama holds a nostalgia that makes Kameko a bit weary. Yuma had always disliked Hiruzen for being old, weary and turning a blind eye, but Kameko thinks she understands.

 

(Once you’ve killed so many, what’s a few more being killed by an old friend?)

 

Their footsteps echo softly as they walk down the staircase, Tobirama’s hand swinging hers gently.

 

A few turns later they stand in front of a door. Nodding to the Mizuko on duty, Kameko enters the room followed closely by her sensei.

 

The jinchuriki are in fighting stances but she senses their chakra stumble following their entrance. They’re scared.

 

They have a reason to be , she realizes grimly.

 

“You are here to be tested. I will determine if you deserve to be containers of bijuu for the remainder of your lifetime.”

 

Kameko knows she has done nothing to deserve the bijuu’s company, but she is the strongest across the Nations. She is the only one who can protect them and she can do so without being a jinchuriki herself. She can afford to give the smallest amounts of freedom.

 

Roshi snarls, but Han speaks first, “You are the one hunting the jinchuriki?”

 

They all know it’s her, but Han doesn’t want it to be true.  

 

“Two have remained jinchuriki,” she offers, halfheartedly. Tobirama squeezes her hand and she takes a deep breath. 

 

“Do you know your bijuu’s name?”

 

Roshi snorts, “It doesn’t deserve to be called by its name. This damned monster ruined my life.”

 

Kameko winces as she realizes there’s no way she’s saving him.

 

Han shrugs weakly, “We bonded through them, though. I can thank them for that alone.”

 

“Roshi will die,” she announces, “I am not sure about Han, yet.”

 

Roshi recoils, eyes wide before they smolder. 

 

“How dare you?” he growls, “One of the Great Village’s couldn’t control me, neither can you, bitch!”

 

Kameko watches him dispassionately, “You were defeated by one of my clones.”

 

Han flinches. 

 

“Because you seem like a good partner, I will give you the honor of dying in battle.” Kameko crosses her arms, “But that is all.”

 

Han clenches his fists before bowing low, “He did not mean it,” his voice is low, wavering, “Roshi loves and respects his bijuu, as do I. Please allow us to leave peacefully.”

 

Roshi glares at his, Kameko is sure now, significant other. She sighs. 

 

“That is what I want to hear, yes,” she agrees, “But you and I both know that is not how he feels.”

 

Han’s chakra bursts outwards, “I won’t let you!”

 

Roshi grins ferally, “We’ll just fight our way out, bitch.”

 

Kameko frowns, not understanding why they’d believe they’d emerge victorious. She turns to Han, “You choose to die with him?”

 

He nods, “We fight to the end.”

 

Roshi fist bumps him, “Forever and always.”

 

With that irrefutable confirmation, Kameko snaps her fingers and activates the seals within the room. 

 

----

 

Kameko finds it somehow easier to bear the fact that they die together than to take one and leave them both alone. She watches their crumpled, unconscious bodies lean towards each other and hopes that their last kiss was meaningful.

 

She takes Son Goku first, making sure that Han stays unconscious during the procedure.

 

(She will not make them watch.)

 

----

 

This time, she leaves the prison with two jars of ash and two more bijuu in her necklace.

 

To Cherish All Creatures , Kameko thinks, is very hard.

 

(Balance is kept for as long as one can blink.)

 

---

 

Kameko does a Ceremony for Beloved’s for their ashes. She scoops a handful of sand and mixes half of it with each of the ashes.

 

(Body.)

 

She takes both containers and pours them into one glass vase.

 

(Joined.)

 

The vase is green and is etched with swirling fires.

 

(Alive.)

 

“May the water cleanse you,” she dunks her hands underwater before grabbing the small handles on the sides.

 

(Purified.)

 

“And may you find each other again,” Kameko seals the vase with a wooden top covered in seals.

 

(Protect.)

 

Then she runs as fast as she can and flings the vase in the center of the largest whirlpool she can find.

 

(The salty water that encases the vase is not only from the sea.)

 

---

 

“The elders said that when you perform the Beloved Ceremony, the spirit will travel worlds to be with it’s partner,” Kameko tells Tobirama.

 

“Because the ceremony involves the sea and tears, I originally thought Mizu culture might have a version,” she muses, “But now I think it might be Dui related as well.”

 

Though he started training again, Hanzo is not as power hungry as he once was. He had also heard that nature chakra was closer to chakra than Dui and decided to never attempt it. While impressed, Yagura agreed.

 

For better or worse, Tobirama is a scientist. 

 

“If the intent is to purify the souls and then send them together into their next life, it’s an emotional ceremony,” he considers. “Dui is proportionally related to Will, or Intent, so that makes sense.”

 

Kameko nods.

 

“Uzumaki-style sealing also has an element of Intent, which could be the tiniest amount of Dui. It would resolve conjecture’s on Uzumaki longevity since they’ve been on Uzushio the longest and why their sealing is so strong.”

 

“It would explain why their deep emotions usually tip opposite of the Uchiha,” Kameko adds. “The Uzumaki ancestors were around so early they knew about Dui and it’s still present in most ceremonies.”

 

They look at each other, “Apart from the science,” she hesitates, “I really do hope that they’re able to find each other again, no matter who they become.”

 

Tobirama folds her into a tight hug, his chin resting gently on her head. 

 

“I love you,” he tells her again.

 

“I love you, too.”

 

They only needed to say it once to remember for the remainder of their lives, but there’s something peaceful about having the freedom to repeat it without calamity.

 

( “There is no mountain or valley or ocean or army that will keep me from being by your side,” Yuma tells her, “I love you.” )

 

---

 

Kameko is preparing to clean loose ends and misses her people in Konoha, but she has no intention of rushing back. 

 

She takes Yagura on a walk against the shoreline. 

 

“You are very different from your clones,” he tells her lightly.

 

“I was wondering when someone would ask me about that,” she muses. “When I was younger I thought the Mizuko’s were supposed to be my true personality so I did a ton of meditation.”

 

“And then?”

 

Kameko smirks, “Well my shisou was Tobirama-sensei’s mutual crush,” she sobers before returning to her story, “It didn’t quite work out. Anyways, I’m ninety percent sure that he taught her shadow clone jutsu- because it’s that or they created it together. Loved Shisou to death, but she wasn’t really one for jutsu creation.”

 

Yagura listens quietly.

 

“Either way, she knew it and she taught it to me when I was seven. It took a few tries of course, but their personalities puzzled both of us. The Mizuko’s are polite now, but back then?” Kameko giggles, “They were reverent. Bowed all the time, only listened to me, attacked the tasks I gave them- I thought I was a creepy form of narcissistic crazy!”

 

Yagura cracks a small smile.

 

“And Shisou was very spiritual and told me it was probably related to being Blessed. I’m not sure if I believe her now, but it seems her theory has only gained credibility over time.”

 

Yagura stops walking, watching a seagull peek at something in the sand ahead of them. 

 

“We do have stories,” he offers. “Generally, Mist has always been the most “spiritual” of the other Great Nations. Everyone has their own beliefs why, but there are stories that are told throughout the islands.”

 

“Do you know them?” Kameko asks eagerly.

 

“No,” he shakes his head. “They’re mostly told to children and I have long since forgotten them. I apologize.”

 

Kameko shakes her head, “‘Not your fault,” she mumbles. 

 

Looking up at him through her lashes, Kameko smiles, “I can just put that on my to do list, I’m heading to Mist after my breaks over anyways.”

 

Yagura looks surprised, and a bit wary, “Why?”

 

“Sempai!” she cries dramatically, hands over her heart, “You don’t remember?”

 

Yagura raises an eyebrow, wariness gone for faux irritation.

 

Kameko huffs, “You trusted me to look after your country! I’ll take care of it until you go back.”

 

Yagura blinks, “Go back?”

 

Kameko tilts her head, “Yes? I’m not forcibly keeping you. I just took you here originally so you would be safe and in good hands treatment wise. That being said, you aren’t cleared for 100 percent health yet, but you could leave if you really wanted to.”

 

Yagura’s expression closes off, “I see. Thank you for your hospitality, and for saving my life. I… will forever be in your debt.”

 

Kameko scoffs, cuffing him against the head. Yagura’s hands jolt to his head, eyes wide.

 

“You’re lucky you’re pretty,” she tells him. Yagura flushes, mouth opening and closing silently.

 

“Friends don’t go into debt with each other,” she explains, “Obviously you can go but you can also stay . As long as you want.”

 

“They also don’t tend to remove bijuu from each other,” he retorts. 

 

She nudges him again, “I don’t need your sass. Brat.”

 

“I thought I was your senpai .”

 

Kameko applies just enough chakra to her shove to send him careening into the water. Yagura resurfaces immediately, magenta eyes flashing, damp hair clinging to his cheeks.

 

She’s been trained by Tobirama. Yagura is the Yondaime Mizukage.

 

In the end, both of them are soaked to the bone and throwing up water.

 

They agree it was a good day.

 

(The day of the Fall, Kameko never would have believed that she would become friends with someone from Kiri .)

 

(It happened anyway.)

 

---

 

Her town has become a collection of misfits, but she doesn’t mind. Neither do they, considering that many now have the means to move and choose not to. Her people are well taken care of- fed, educated, housed. Over the years, there have been refugees- a girl escaping prostitution, a family in search of a miracle to heal their sick child, missing nin with hearts too soft.

 

They aren’t rich, but they have no need for money. 

 

Kameko takes care of them and in return, they live their lives to the fullest.

 

(Children and civilians were slaughtered during the Fall.)

 

More than anything, Kameko wants the bijuu to find a home with her community. 

 

(She would forever give up a roof in return for quick death alongside Uzushio. That was not her fate.)

 

Seven dolls stand in front of her, watching.

 

“My title is Chiharu-sama,” she begins confidently before faltering, “My name is Uzumaki Kameko.”

 

Kurama snarls, “Uzumaki women serve only to imprison us and please their husbands.”

 

Kameko sniffs, shoulders relaxing the slightest bit even though she knows he’s not joking, “I don’t respect or agree with those methods. And, I don't have a husband. Or a wife.”

 

Choumei watches her, “You clearly don’t need one.”

 

“I’ll always be honest with all of you, if only because it is the least I can do.”

 

Kokuo is taunt and displeased, “Indeed. I do not hold attachment to my containers but I do not like being stolen like a toy between children.”

 

Kameko nods hurriedly. 

 

Technically, she holds the power in this situation. But she also has morals and respect for creatures that have lived far longer than she has. 

 

“Of course. I am human,” she prefaces, “But my lifespan will be multiple centuries and I do not age.”

 

Shukaku turns to her for the first time, “You’ll stay?”

 

Kameko shrugs, “I can die and be revived five times, each time I will lose about one hundred years of my lifespan. That being said, I am very strong and it is unlikely.”

 

Kurama looks away.

 

Isobu nods wisely, “We don’t have friends,” he tells her. “We hardly have had each other.”

 

“Ah,” Kameko doesn’t truly know what it means to be part of a family, to have siblings, “I would like to be your friend. I,” her voice cracks, “want companions that will live as long as I will.”

 

Kokuo clicks her glass tongue, “Child, prepare for the future but do not worry about it.”

 

“Death,” Shukaku is no longer gazing at any of them, is scarcely present in the conversation at all, “is supposed to happen naturally.”

 

Kurama scoffs, “Humans die, girlie. It must be karma that you’ll die after everyone else.”

 

She flinches. 

 

Choumei swipes at him, “Oh, hush. I’m pretty sure she only sought our, hm, company after finding out she’d pass later.”

 

Kameko nods absent-mindedly, “That was only part of it. You were all going to be hunted by someone who intended to reform the Juubi.”


The tiny bijuu exchange glances- ranging from morbidly interested to horrified to disbelieving.

 

“It’s true,” Isobu interrupts the clamoring as it begins, “My jinchuriki and I were in a genjutsu for years, and that was just the beginning. She took us for our safety as well.”

 

Kurama flexes his claws, “How disgustingly submissive, Isobu.”

 

Choumei frowns, “Just shut up, we’re here now.”

 

“Your complaining changes nothing,” Kokuo agrees.

 

Kameko waves her hands, “While I appreciate your cooperation, part of me wishes you were all more like Kurama,” she admits.

 

“What do you mean, girl?” Son Goku demands. Kurama watches her through narrowed slits.

 

“It’s just that, it’s obvious he hasn’t lost his spark,” she struggles to put her thoughts into words, “He still has a strong fighting spirit even after all the years you guys have spent imprisoned. No one likes change and he’s telling me that. Even if his phrasing is rude, he’s honestly communicating.”

 

Shukaku rolls onto his belly, “Why would I be honest?” he questioned himself before laughing uproariously. 

 

Saiken shrugs, speaking for the first time. “It’s easier to get along with creatures like you.” His eyes are cunning, but not necessarily malicious. “To be what the jinchuuriki wants always got me where I wanted to be.”

 

Kameko’s fists clench before she continues, “And I know you’re all flexible and resilient because you had to be, but you’re also creatures that suffered immesable trauma, predominantly alone.”

 

“That’s a lot of empathy coming from someone who hasn’t been imprisoned,” Kokuo growls, “You don’t want honesty- and you sure as hell don’t get to keep a moral high ground compared to other prisons.”

 

Kameko uncrosses her legs, watching the waves. 

 

“I know,” she admits freely, “I just wanted you guys to know where I stand. I can take your anger.”

 

(Friendships start with trust.)

 

---

 

Kameko lays on her bed, the room pitch black. Her eyes are wide open.

 

“Isobu,” she asks, “Do you want to stay with Yagura while I go to Mizu?”

 

The tailed turtle lies on her stomach, the glass as warm as skin. 

 

“I think I want to stay with my siblings,” he tells her, “We’re reacquainting ourselves with each other.”

 

Kameko reads between the lines. Why talk when all you can do is perpetuate sadness of the normalcy of their abuse? To be considered a weapon is the worst side of inhumane.

 

She isn’t surprised they need ‘reacquainting,’ and she doesn’t mind being their common enemy. 

 

“Have you been using the shared mindspace when you’re all in the necklace?”

 

“...Yes.”

 

Isobu does not ask her how she knows it exists. 

 

(Sentient beings will be the way that they are and discovering that takes time and observation.)

 

“Yagura and I could negotiate and occasionally communicate,” Isobu explains, “We were a jinchuriki and his bijuu, but we were not more than that.”

 

Kameko blinks and nothing changes. Isobu continues, his jaw pressing in on her stomach as he speaks.

 

“One day, we might meet again. For now, we’ve said our last words.”

 

Kameko’s eyes close, “Okay.”

 

(Yagura never asked to speak with Isobu.)

 

 

Notes:

y'all i binge watched Carmen Sandiego on netflix and would 10/10 recommend for a badass latina mc, diverse body shapes and cultures

hnnnnn

It's comes off as a kid show at first but it just keeps getting better and the ending is actually amazing

(wow im fangirling so hard oops)

Hope you enjoyed!

Chapter 19: Nineteen

Summary:

*sorry its been a bit!

Kameko receives a warm, bloody welcome to Mist.

or

The history of 'hn', the bijuu choose a project, and Hanzo knows more than he should.

Notes:

This is relevant: Kameko's appearance is basically ANBU without the vest; baggy pants, skin tight, sleeveless top and sandals.

This one is a bit... different (my excuse is listening to Sean Paul's Temperature while writing lol)

Also, it seems I've accidently written shikaku instead of Shukaku thats who I mean

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

 

 

When she comes down for breakfast, Kimimaro is eating rice while Hanzo grills fish. She’s getting ready to leave, but she still has a few things to do. 

 

“Kimimaro-chan,” she calls softly.

 

He looks up, green eyes blinking away sleep. 

 

“I’m leaving,” she tells him, “But I’ll come back.”

 

Bits of rice fall into his lap from his rough grip, “Am I staying here, Baa-chan?”

 

Today, Kameko’s eyes are almost as green as his- a freshwater lake full of plants. She nods sharply, once. 

 

Kimimaro doesn’t cry, eyes falling to his lap. He sets the onigiri onto the plate and picks at the rice grains, one at a time. 

 

“How long?”

 

“As long as it takes for me to complete my task.”

 

“Hn.”

 

She blinks, taken aback, before she berates herself. Honestly, why would the Uchiha have the monopoly on a syllable?

 

“Where did you hear that?” she asks, curious. 

 

Kimimaro looks at Hanzo who raises up his hands, “It’s addicting,” he insists. “Besides, I picked it up from Tobirama.”

 

Kameko cackles, clutching her stomach. She isn’t sure which way it’s more amusing- either the Uchiha picked it up from him, or he picked it up from them. 

 

White Demon indeed.

 

Hanzo raises an eyebrow before efficiently plating the fish and turning off the stove. 

 

“Anyways,” she wheezes, “I’ll bring you both a gift back from Mist. What do you want?”

 

“Are you trying to buy my affection?” Hanzo deadpans.

 

Kameko sniffs, “Why would I buy something I already have?”

 

Relaxing, Kameko turns to Kimimaro, “And what about you?”

 

Mutely, he shrugs. Licking her lips, Kameko nods at Hanzo and scoops up Kimimaro into her arms. 

 

Quietly, he rests his chin on her shoulder. They walk in the opposite direction of the shore and the town. She brings them down a forest trail, the leaves beginning to change color while still clinging to the branches. 

 

Eventually, they come across a fallen tree. It’s trunk is thick enough to sit on but Kameko only sits next to it, bottom on dirt. 

 

“Kimimaro,” she begins, “I am an orphan. Until I was six, I had no one but the dead. When I was eighteen, I was alone again. Then one by one, people joined me. Some as acquaintances, as wards, as students, as friends.”

 

“I know you’ll come back,” he says, face turned away, “It just hurts to wait.”

 

“I’m sorry I can't be your mother,” she confesses.

 

“Me too.”

 

(To be an individual means being connected to many red threads.*)

 

---

 

“Why don’t you have summons?” Hanzo asks her. 

 

Despite his place in her town, they are not explicitly close. They are both professional, and can therefore criticize each other easily. They acquaintances who know how to have serious conversations. 

 

 He is part of her therapy program and she is the one who saved him from committing atrocities.

 

(Kameko knows, had she been a bit different, experienced slightly different situations, she would be very similar. By saving Hanzo, she has a saved a part of herself.) 

 

“On one hand,” Kameko speaks slowly, despite having thought of the subject multiple times since meeting Katsuyu-hime-sama, “I simply don’t need them. On the other, who would I choose? Should I reverse summon myself? Choose an Uzushio summon- and if so, which one?”

 

Kameko laughs, shaking her head, “I know it sounds stupid and arrogant, but I don’t want to feel like I’m picking favorites.”

 

Hanzo watches her, “We’ve known each other quite a few years now,” he reminds her. She inclines her head in agreement. 

 

“You don’t look any different.”

 

She isn’t fast enough to immediately hide her tensed muscles.  

 

“You hold many secrets, Chiharu-sama, and you haven’t begun to look for an apprentice.” She watches him, “You do not age,” he finishes, the accusation no louder than a whisper of breath. 

 

“I haven’t really been hiding it,” she admits, “but I still didn’t think anyone would notice. Not so soon.”

 

(Suddenly, she wonders if Tobirama already knows.)

 

He smiles wryly, “Are you human?”

 

“Yes. I am not immortal, nor a goddess,” she responds. 

 

Hanzo interlocks his fingers, “Do you believe real deities exist?”

 

(He doesn’t ask her how old she is- how old she was when it fell, how he’s never heard of anything like her.)

 

(Perhaps the program is more important than she originally gave it credit to. Shinobi need a neutral place to heal, a place to think in new ways.)

 

Kameko shrugs, “Perhaps not. I know that spirits exist. That there is a life energy that connects everything alive. That the natural world exists before we are born and after we are dead.”

 

Hanzo nods, “If there was anyone I’d believe, I suppose it’d be you.”

 

She smiles wryly, “Uzushio called me Blessed.”

 

He leans on his palms, “I see why you were chosen.”

 

Kameko shrugs, “I don’t, but I figure I’ll do my best. Got lots of time to work.”

 

He places his hand on hers and traces the outlines of her nails, “You’ve helped me, Chiharu. Helped the ones I hurt, too, inadvertently or otherwise.”

 

She watches him, her wavy hair flowing around them as her bun collapses under the wind. 

 

“Hard work is important, but so is taking a break. Time doesn’t have to be a curse or blessing.”

 

She laughs, “Believe it or not, this is me taking it slow, being meticulous. Taking breaks, getting to know all of you is, in the end, unnecessary and more liable to hurt me in the future.”

 

She sighs, “I’m not sure why I’m doing it.”

 

(Yuma had a saying, “Better to have loved and lost than to never have loved at all.” Kameko has never been sure of it’s honesty.)

 

“Tobirama was the first, right?” he asks, “After Uzushio.”

 

Kameko hums in agreement.

 

“Well, why did you open up to him?”

 

Her hair covers her face and she brushes it behind her ear, “I thought I was the one giving you therapy.”

 

“Deflection.”

 

She winces, relaxing slightly as his calluses drift over her cuticles in a soothing pattern.

 

(This isn’t a friend confiding in another. It’s two people being honest and opening their hearts.)

 

“He knew my Shisou,” she considers, “So he lost her too. Nothing brings people together like grief,” her lips pull, not a smile or a grimace or a smirk. 

 

(Kameko is a socially stunted orphan. Someone who belongs to a dead village that lives only within herself. She is not a shinobi or a civilian.)

 

(She does not know how to belong, or how to recognize it.)

 

“And he had been,” she pauses because this is not her story to tell, “a bit out of touch for decades. He knew what it felt like to wake up to something so different, yet simultaneously similar. 

 

“He knew the past has happened- and that he can never go back .”

 

(Time is a reaper who invites the Shinigami.)

 

Kameko’s heart stutters at the thought of a failing memory, something she will never suffer. 

 

(She’ll take her nightmare’s and her questions and despair over that . Maybe she does understand Yuma-shisou’s saying.)

 

“And I guess that, after almost a decade, I missed people,” she mused, “And sensei is similar to me. We have similar mindsets, interests.”

 

Hanzo nods, “Brilliant and strong and efficient. Selfless.”

 

She nudges him with her elbow.

 

“Ah,” and she realizes where Hanzo has led her, “he had no where else to go. No one left to call home.”

 

Just like her villagers, like Kimimaro and Hanzo and Kagami and Yagura and most of the bijuu.

 

(Just like herself.) 

 

---

 

It’s a recurring theme to have the bijuu sit in front of her on top of the statues in the Valley of the End. Tonight, they sit on Hashirama’s head. Despite Madara’s descent into madness, she can respect his principles.

 

(By now, she is probably one of the few that remembers Uzushio’s history. Uzumaki love as deeply as the Uchiha and they intermarried far more frequently than Uzumaki and Senju.)

 

(The practice was forbidden by Hashirama’s generation, mostly because of the instability promised by the Warring States Era and how either partner would handle being a widow.)

 

Besides, despite her low opinion of Mito, she wasn’t the one who cemented the practice of Jinchuuriki.

 

All of them made mistakes, created problems, but most of them were just following the charismatic Senju Hashirama.

 

(“For peace.”)

 

Maybe they did make the world better, but she has only known the problems created by villages, by shinobi in groups far larger than family. But she was born too late to help them, and too early to save her village.

 

(Perhaps this is fate apologizing.)

 

(Kameko doesn’t believe in fate.)

 

Kameko sighs, “The Founders should’ve made an autobiography, not Konohagakure.”

 

(They weren’t ready, but who ever is?)

 

“It would be a tragedy,” Kurama snorts, “serves ‘em right.”

 

“Not a drama?” Kokuo’s tails swish.

 

Choumei jumps in, always eager for a relatively healthy debate,”I think it's a romance!”

 

Kokuo tilts her head, “Well, yes, they were all head over heels for each other but that’s why it’s a drama .”

 

Kameko quirks an eyebrow.

 

“I think it’s an epic,” Isobu contributes, “Every part is interesting, so it could definitely be pretty long.”

 

Kokuo sniffs, “Quite the vocabulary there.”

 

“Heyyy,” Kameko warns lightly, “Play nice.”

 

She’s just fast enough to cut off the “kids” at the end.

 

Isobu sprawls on top of Kokuo as she splutters, “I have more tails! How dare you!”

 

Despite knowing she’s talking to Isobu, Kameko shrugs, “Well I’d hope so. I don’t have any.”

 

Kokuo snarls.

 

Fake-it-’till-you-make-it with a side of tsundere, she thinks, amused. How interesting .

 

“You could interview Tobirama,” she ponders out loud, “But he might lie. Or rant about doing all the administration work. And either way, he’s definitely biased.”

 

Son Goku perks up, “It’s definitely action, but we could make it a project.”

 

Kurama flicks his ear, “Why would we write about those bastards?”

 

“Therapy?” Kameko suggests half heartedly, “Confronting trauma.”

 

The look Kurama gives her is scathing and none of the other bijuu look impressed. Son Goku, however, wasn’t listening to begin with, “Revenge.”

 

The way it rolls of his tongue, excited as a cat who just spotted a bird, sparks the other’s interest.

 

“How?” Saiken asks, “We’d just be immortalizing them.”

 

“Yes,” Son Goku agrees and Kameko understands before he can explain, “But in whatever way we want.”

 

Chomei’s eyes sharpen, “If we make it available for everyone across the Elemental Nations…”

 

“And interesting enough for all ages,” Isobu agrees. 

 

Kokuo smirks, “We can confront our trauma and get the last word against even their own kind.”

 

“This wasn’t what I expected for our small talk,” Kameko interrupts, “but I honestly wouldn’t mind as long as you don’t trash talk Yuma-shisou. Or make her a ditsy and love-sick.”

 

“We could make her the heroine,” Saiken offers, “she did sound pretty cool.”

 

Kameko’s lips twitch up, “Technically, she only met Tobirama…”

 

“Not a problem,” Kurama agress easily, tails swishing, “So many things happen with a slight push of fate.”

 

“A flip of a rock,”  Choumei agrees.

 

“Alright,” Kameko shrugs. “I wouldn’t stop you either way, but I guess you have my approval. Write about the Founders like they were never written before.”

 

The bijuu look pleased, tails flicking pleasantly. Kameko darts a look at Shikaku who’s been entirely silent, sitting quietly watching the forest.

 

He’s looking in the direction of Suna , she realizes, but what does that mean?

 

She’s only had a few meetings, mostly so she can get a decent grip on the bijuu’s personalities before she infuses them with enough chakra to do what they’d like, but Shikaku is still a mystery. 

 

He seems more unstable then the rest, zones out often, but he doesn’t emit the bloodlust that appeared in Yuma’s future-story. She isn’t sure if he’s lonely or longing or something else entirely.

 

She doesn’t know what to do, how to help.

 

(Kameko is not more than what she’s trained and who she’s met. She cannot read minds or fix problems that she doesn’t understand.)

 

She claps her hands together, enough for him to turn towards her. With all of their attention Kameko begins, “As you know, I’ll soon be leaving on another task. It’s up to you if you’d like to come with me or stay on the island under Tobirama’s care. He has expressed interest in,” she pauses, unsure how to phrase what she wants to say, “getting to know all of you, as sentient beings.”

 

The bijuu listen quietly.

 

“I’d like for you to stay together, but if there are two who feel partial to different options, just tell me and we’ll make it work.”

 

They don’t really need to stay together, but she thinks it’s probably better for them to bond a bit more. They’re family.

 

(Kameko knows that blood, or being created from the Jyuubi, doesn’t guarantee a good match up, but they’re family through friendship as well. Through perseverance and survival and knowing each other for eons.)

 

“I won’t advise you either way,” Kameko smiles gently, “But if you’d like to work on your project, Tobirama really would be a good person to interview and he could probably be guilt tripped into writing it for you.”

 

They look at their paws, claws, and other appendages. “That might be for the best,” Saiken admits. 

 

She winks before returning to a serious tone, “He’s grouchy, but he won’t treat you wrong. And, just so you’re aware, no one other than me has control over any part of you.”

 

Kurama glares at her, “Thank kami.

 

Kameko shrugs. She feels bad, but she did what she had to do. Some day, she might regret her actions, but it won’t be today.

 

(And probably not tomorrow. And for Kameko, it’s enough.)

 

She can’t allow herself to wallow in guilt because she has things to do. Can’t let the bijuu, or anyone else, control her actions. 

 

Kameko answers to the Land, the Water, the ancestors and the sentient creatures of the present and future. There is work to be done, and she is equipped to do it.

 

(Kameko will stop at nothing for a slightly better world.)

 

(The moon isn’t out, but stars peek through the clouds, bright and encouraging.)

 

---

 

The bijuu choose to stay with Tobirama and Kameko heads to Mist. 

 

---

 

This time, she hiraishin’s straight to the capital.

 

When she appears in the back of a shadowed alley, she realizes that in Mist she’s more likely to appear in the middle of a damn ballroom and be alone then somewhere ‘suspicious.’

 

Private.

 

At her feet lays a badly beaten man with a few others spread out among the alley like decorations. She’s appeared just as the last one is knocked out.

 

(She’s a bit surprised they aren’t dead.)

Understanding that it’d go over better if she doesn’t lurk in the dark corner, Kameko steps forward. 

 

“Hello,” she calls, overly sweet, “My name’s Chiharu.”

 

The swordsman startles quietly before he whips around, swearing, “You with them?”

 

Kameko laughs, shaking her head. Nudging the closest man, Kameko allows herself to show a bit of bloodlust, “Don’t know who they even are.”

 

She glances up from under her lashes, allowing her hand to drop onto the curve of her hip, “They mess with the wrong man?”

 

His brown hair reaches just past his shoulders, young enough that his beard from Yuma’s future-story isn’t present. He’s probably about twenty.

 

“Well, Jinpachi?”

 

Fingering his sword’s hilt, Munashi Jinpachi puffs out his chest, “Guess I’m famous, even among your type.”

 

Moving her other hand to her chest, Kameko plays the lightest bit offended. She isn’t sure why she decided to play this game with him of all people, but Kameko has an adventurous streak that’s been harder to scratch the stronger she gets. 

 

Kameko’s a thrill seeker, and Kiri is the best place to show it. 

 

(She doesn’t like killing or maiming, but some blood and danger are intoxicating.)

 

(Kameko was raised in a world of shinobi at war.)

 

“That almost sounded like an insult ,” she purrs, tone becoming breathy near the end. “What do you consider my people?

 

She’s an infiltration specialist, but she doesn’t need those skills when she’s naturally inclined to flirting and fighting- preferably in strong company. Her blue hair is unique, but it fits into Mist better than anywhere else.

 

Jinpachi draws his sword, “Koi, the kind that get fucked. You know, I woulda killed these bastards, but that Mizukage-snake made me a bet to not kill anyone. I don’t lose.”

 

Kameko bats her eyelashes, grateful for her outfits body clinging qualities. And they say Kiri isn’t welcoming.

 

“You think I’m weak?” she challenges, “Maybe I don’t lose either?”

 

Mist’s culture is unique and a complete opposite from Konoha. Their prostitutes can be bulky and scared and swear with the best, and worst, of them. Fighting is a way to flirt, one that can end in sex or death and the pleasure is somewhat the same.

 

Of course, everyone has their own preferences. 

 

Jinpachi lets out a feral rumble, “A bit prettier than I’d usually go for, but you give me good fight and I’ll give you something nice.”

Kameko winks, “Here I go.”

 

She teases, but it’s also a taunt. Jinpachi bares his teeth.

 

---

 

When it’s over, the alley is a bit wider.

 

It’s also on fire. 

 

Kameko is unscathed.

 

(Jinpachi is on the ground moaning in a mix of pain and pleasure, sword at his side.)

 

---

 

Once she’s healed enough that there won’t be lasting damage and he can walk, Jinpachi grins at her, surprisingly boyish.

 

“Oh, Koi,” he cooes, “I hope you do stay a bit.”

 

“I expected a bit more fun,” she snarks, a smile pulling at her lips. “But I wouldn’t be against… a party with friends.”

 

Pulling him to his feet, Kameko loops their arms, pressing her chest against his arm. Leaning closer, she whispers into the shell of his ear, “Why don’t you introduce me to your friends on the roof?”

 

Terumi Mei calls down, auburn hair flowing in the breeze, “You got your ass handed to you, Jinpachi.”

 

Mei floats down, dress fluttering elegantly as she lands lightly, “You might be the one bottoming to her.”

 

Jinpachi rakes his eyes over Kameko, before shrugging, “I’d take whatever she gave.”

 

“Ah,” Kameko pretends to be surprised, “Flattered. Wasn’t sure that was the game we were playing, though.”

 

Mei snorts.

 

Kameko pouts, “But Mei-chan! I’m a virgin, surely you can’t ask me to give out my chastity!”

 

Kameko couldn’t care less for her chastity, but she is a virgin. She figures thirty four is old enough for that to change. Even if she only looks about twenty.

 

Mei blinks before leaning forward, placing a hand on her shoulder, “That was quite the performance,” she hums. “I wouldn’t mind being your first.”

 

Kameko raises her brow, considering. Some shinobi have sexual preferences, but most prefer certain characteristics over gender. Hair color, nail length, experience. 

 

Terumi Mei is hot. 

 

Kameko licks her lips, a light blush crawling over her features before leaning towards Mei, “You’d deflower me, Mei-chan? I must be special.”

 

Their torsos brush.

 

“With pleasure, pretty thing.”

 

Jinpachi groans, breaking the moment. “Stealin’ my girl, now? And I thought you couldn’t get worse, Mizukage-snake.”

 

Despite the harsh words, Kameko is easily able to understand that they aren’t malicious.

 

Mei wraps her arm around Kameko’s waist, and pulls them flush together. And Kameko plays the shy maiden at an absolutely delicious Kage’s side as they face Jinpachi.

 

Kameko’s hand traces small shapes against Mei’s thigh, “I must say, Jinpachi, as fun as it’s been, Mei’s…”

 

Her audience pauses, curious.

 

“... Stronger.”

 

Kiri has no shortage of powersexuals, or people with powersexual tendencies. Even civilians. By easily winning their spar, Kameko has shown that she’s out of Jinpachi’s league. Not that Mei’s much closer, but he doesn’t know that. 

 

Jinpachi barks out a laugh before leering her, “Fine, Koi. You let the Mizukage ‘deflower’ you while I train.”

 

Kameko pretends to swoon, “I’ve been in Kiri for an hour and I’ve gained two suitors, how lucky.”

 

Jinpachi smirks, “If you’re good enough, Mei-chan might even make you a concubine.”

 

“Oh, I wouldn’t dare.”

 

Mei shakes her head, “Jinpachi was here to take care of a small rebel faction, I was here to make sure he didn’t kill them, so, Chiharu, why are you here?”

 

Kameko sighs, releasing Mei and leaning against one of the remaining walls, “You do remember what I told you last time?”

 

Mei nods. 

 

Glancing at Jinpachi, Kameko shrugs. He won’t leave Mist, so it’s not really a problem if he knows. Well, not her problem, anyway. 

 

“Yagura has chosen to remain in my company. He is healthy and steadily recovering,” Mei keeps her mask up, “And now I’m doing what I told him I would.”

 

I’m here to keep Mist safe is what she doesn’t say.

 

“Okay.”

 

Better to have you as an ally than an enemy .

 

(Maybe that’s all Kameko’s good for.)

 

(She made a promise.)

 

 

 

Notes:

red threads* In this context, a red string between anyone you will ever meet

I don't think I've really had reason to say this before now but: Don't like, don't read. Simple.

This story is gen and there's no final pairing. I'm considering making a harem au vaguely inspired by Misplace your Cities (Aiko Uzumaki is the mc, I think. It's been awhile) but that wouldn't go up until this is done. Also, I'm writing ch. 24 and for the most part Kameko has only been females, so keep that in mind.

(Shikaku fans I do have a gift coming... eventually ;)

Also, before questions come in: yes, Kameko knows everything Uzu... including sex. It fell when she was 18, so everything was consensual, but it was also mostly just explained. Or videos. She's still a technical virgin, and sex in general reminds her of her teenage years (happy times) because she hasn't been sexually active since it fell.

Within the story itself, there won't be sex. It will definitely be implied and maybe have some kissing before/after, but it won't be super explicit. If someone wants a warning when that'll start, I'm fine providing one but I won't do it unless someone asks. Same with tags.

The event with Dai has already happened, but who was part of the Seven Swordsmen in the aftermath was such a mess I just kinda picked who I wanted.

Until next time!

Chapter 20: Twenty

Chapter Text

 

Mei dismisses Jinpachi to find a squad to clean his mess while she escorts Kameko to her office. 

 

Once they’re inside and the door is locked, the Mizukage turns to her.

 

“How long will you be around?”

 

Kameko shrugs, “Depends on how many dissidents there really are. I’ve set aside six months, but that’s tentative and dependent on the situation.”

 

Mei curls a piece of hair around her finger, “It’s bad,” she admits. “Kiri is bloodthirsty by practice and genjutsu-influenced Yagura had basically promised them war. A hunt.”

 

Kameko listens.

 

“With Yagura handing me the reins and subsequently disappearing, lots of people suspect I put a hit on him.” She scowls, “Not like he was my sensei or best friend or confidant for years .”

 

“Then how come you didn’t notice the genjutsu?” Kameko tilts her head, “It obviously made him act differently.”

 

Mei looked away, “When he was-probably-put under, I was on a long term assignment. We had had a slight argument beforehand. 

 

“When I got back, everything was different. He wouldn’t listen to me, hardly talked. I got sent on way more missions…”

 

Kameko hums, “So it’s not that you didn’t notice, but that there was nothing you could do.”

 

Mei’s fist clenches. 

 

“That’s fine,” Kameko dismisses. “Nothing we can change about it now. Is most of your opposition from shinobi then?”

 

Mei nods, “Civilians are mad about all the chaos, but they definitely didn’t want a civil war. They spit to spit but they aren’t planning anything- almost half are hardly scrapping by to begin with. We’ve got limited decent farmland.”

 

Kameko shrugs, “Shinobi are fickle. If the civilians are content enough, we can just crush the louder objections until they realize Mist isn’t going back to what it was.”

 

Mei smirks, “Your plan is ‘kill strategic leaders here and there and stay long enough that it doesn’t backfire’?”

 

“I’ll also take out foreign spies that should mind their own business.”

 

“Sounds like a plan. Such a good one in fact, that that’s what I’m already doing.”

 

Kameko laughs, “Of course, Mei-chan! But before, you didn’t have me .”

 

(In many instances, kunoichi are far more dangerous than their male counterparts.)

 

---

 

By the time they’ve finished planning an outline of attack, they’ve moved to the Mizukage Manor and it’s almost midafternoon- Mei’s break time. 

 

Not that Kameko notices this until a nail trails down her spine and Mei drapes her front against her back.

 

Chiharu-sama ,” she purrs and her title should not be said like that

 

Mei’s mouth is filthy as she whispers against the skin of her ear, lowering her head to place openmouthed kisses against Kameko’s exposed neck.

 

Kameko lets out a pleased sigh, tilting her head back until it leans on Mei’s shoulder. While it had been phrased lightly, both of them had been well aware that they had given genuine consent. 

 

“I wasn’t kidding about being a virgin,” she tells her. “I haven’t even done anything remotely sexual in over a decade.”

 

And wow, she does not even want to imagine what she’ll consider a dry spell by the time she dies. 

 

Mei lifts her eyes making eye contact. 

 

“And, just call me Chiharu.”

 

Kameko is being serious, but she can multitask and Mei’s eyes are pretty. Bright green and half lidded and heart wrenchingly kind. Considerate enough that Kameko chose her for her first.

 

“I’ll take care of you,” Mei promises, “No strings attached.”

 

---

 

When Kameko wakes up hours later to a warm body curled around her and silk sheets, she’s sore in muscles she’s never used.

 

It was nice, and Mei was everything she’d hoped she’d be.

 

The sky’s dark and Kameko nudges the slightest bit closer.

 

“Thank you,” she whispers.

 

Mei hums, her hand giving her ass a small squeeze before planting a lazy kiss on Kameko’s forehead. 

 

They fall back to sleep peacefully.

 

---

 

Kameko’s taking in Kiri’s main road while Mei gathers her troops to explain the plan when she hears sniffles. Following the sound, she comes across a small boy. 

 

Or girl.

 

She can’t immediately tell. They’re about four years old and ridiculously androgynous in a small, tattered grey cloak. 

 

“What wrong?” she asks. “Are you crying?”

 

“No, I’m just a bit sick,” the child replies. “But I am hungry.”

 

Red eyes glance at her face and Kameko huffs, the slightest bit amused.

 

(It’s better than being angry about the past she can’t change.)

 

“Don’t try to inspire pity in me, kid. I don’t like it and I won’t commend you for lying- I’m not a shinobi.”

 

She picks him up like an unruly kitten, and he dangles from her grip limply. 

 

“But I know what it’s like to be hungry, so I’ll get you something nice.”

 

She smiles when she feels his chakra twist in hope.

 

(She knows she won’t let it die.)

 

---

 

She sips her water while the kid, who she’s now eighty percent certain is male, devours entire dumplings whole. 

 

“You’ll get a stomach ache.”

 

No reaction.

 

“I’ll buy you a to-go order if you slow down.”

 

His eyes peek up from under purple lashes as he chews furiously, but he gently places down his chopsticks. 

 

“What’s your name, little one?”

 

“Ranmaru.”

 

“Are you a boy?”

 

“Yes.”

 

Kameko gains pleasure from small and big things, and no one hates being right.

 

(Usually. Prodigies are rarely granted the opportunity to disregard what others want from them- even if that means their severed head in bruised, healthy hands.)

 

Kameko watches him, “Little one, would you like to take a field trip with me today?”

 

He has no reason to trust her and he’s been on the streets long enough to know that. Normally, he’d never consider it. 

 

“You’re different,” he says. “I don’t know if it’s better, but you’re different.”

 

At first glance, Kameko blends in Kiri with a no nonsense attitude, blue hair, and the confidence of a predator that refuses to hide. 

 

When looking deeper, it’s obvious that she’s a foreigner with an off-accent, odd morals, and a body that doesn’t match her eyes. She’s a predator that protects prey.

 

Kameko’s guardian literally came from another universe and Uzushio becomes less than a memory with each day that passes. 

 

Of course she’s “different.”

 

“Let me observe you with my kekkai genkai,” he decides. “If you pass, I’ll go wherever you go.”

 

Kameko dips her head, curious, and Ranmaru’s eyes glow

 

“You shouldn’ be usin’ that in public. People ’re still a bit twit-chy,” she drawls, naturally slipping into a speech that crests like the waves of home. His eyes inspire her true self wih an unexpected ferocity. “But kudos for having the guts to do it, anyways.”

 

Ranmaru shrugs before squinting, “You feel soft. Warm. Strong.”

 

His voice is awed, but they aren’t touching. 

 

“What are you talking about?” she questions.

 

“Your life force,” he attempts to clarify, but really, that just creates more questions. Opening up her sensing, Kameko blinks. 

 

“You can use Dui,” she realizes, “that’s your kekkai genkai.”

 

The amount is miniscule but it’s probably why his body’s sickly. He can’t gather it like she can, so every time he uses his “kekkai genkai” he’s really shaving of a bit of his life, making his body run on fumes.

 

(Ranmaru has done his best to survive.)

 

“Stop using it,” she tells him. “I’m happy you trust me, but you can’t keep using that technique- it’s killing you.”

 

Ranmaru reels back, “No! What do you mean? My mother told me! She told me it was our kekkai genkai! Those don’t hurt the user!”

 

Kameko watches him and realizes that Ranmaru definitely suspected that it was making him unhealthy.

 

“Little one,” she soothes, “You will always be your mother’s son, no matter what.”

Tears well in his eyes.

 

“But I doubt she could’ve used it without repercussions and I know you can’t. It isn’t a kekkai genkai, either.”

 

His eyes are wide, and he isn’t blinking. His cheeks remain dry.

 

“Then,” he warbles, sounding choked and scared. Small. 

 

(A child with no one left, inherently wants to cling. To be loved and safe.)

 

He tries again, “Then…”

 

He takes a deep breath and the tears spill out. He wipes his face with his hands, far too thin for someone his age. 

 

“Then, if it’s not a kekkai genkai, what is it?”

 

And what does that make me?

 

Kameko bites her lip, because she’s considering that highly classified information, but she still has to give him an answer. 

 

“Your ancestors called it Zero Life Force,” she recalls. “I call it Dui. By using it, you’re literally using your life force, meaning that you’re cutting up your lifetime and making your body weak.”

 

Ranmaru tenses.

 

“Very few can use it at all, but you should only use it in life or death instances.”

 

The boy nods, gnawing on his lips. Kameko lightly cuffs the back of his head, “I just gave you something to eat, and I’m literally giving you a self-care lecture, kid. Help me out a bit. There's no need to eat your mouth with foood in front of you.”

 

He flushes a bit, “Of course, miss.”

 

She blinks, “Ah, my bad. You can call me Chiharu.”

 

He nods again and Kameko leans back, “Do you want to be a shinobi? You don’t need a kekkai genkai for whatever you choose to do with your life.”

 

The boy shrugs, “Haven’t had a chance to think about it.”

 

Which, fair.

 

Kameko already knows she’s going to be helping with just about everything Mist related and she likes this kid. She’s considered bringing him to her town, but she wants him to meet Raiga before she makes those types of decisions.

 

“Let's go on our field trip, then.”

 

---

 

“Chiharu,” Ranmaru begins slowly, facing the room full of Mist’s ruling class, “Who are you really? I’ve never seen or heard of you before.”

 

Kameko covers her grin with the back of her hand.

 

“You aren’t the only curious one,” Jinpachi appears at her side, draping an arm over her shoulders. “Who’s the chibi, Chiharu-sama?”

 

Kameko tilts her head at the honorific. 

 

“This is Ranmaru,” she introduces, “I’m taking him on a field trip. Ranmaru, this is Munashi Jinpachi of the Seven Swordsmen. He wields Shibuki.”

 

Jinpachi pats the kids head, “Nice ta’ meet you, squirt.”

 

Before the conversation can continue, the door opens and Mei walks in. Apart from her, everyone bows at the waist.

 

“Mizukage-sama.”

 

“Stand. Let's get the meeting started.”

 

In the end, once the shinobi to have their target groups, Mei keeps the swordmen and Kameko in the room. Waving a lazy hand in her direction, Mei leans against her desk.

 

“Everyone, this is Chiharu. I don’t know who the squirt is, but you are to treat her with the utmost respect.”

 

That’s why he didn’t call me Koi , she realizes. She doubts he’ll keep the title if Mei isn’t there.

 

“She’s here to help rebuild Mist on her own accord,” Mei rubs her temples, “Just don’t actually get her mad.”

 

“Yes, thank you, Mei-chan,” Kameko says drily before turning to the others. “It’s very nice to meet you, please take care of me. I will be in charge of the hospital, the academy, and international politics while I’m here.”

 

A tall man with orange hair raises an eyebrow, “My name is Suikazan Fuguki, and this is my apprentice Kisame. How long will you be in Mist?”

 

Kameko shrugs, “As long as it takes.”

 

The others shift.

 

“My loyalty is not to Mist or Kiri,” Kameko clarifies, “Nor is it to any other Great Village. But I’m here as a favor to a friend and I’ll take care of your home. I figured today we could get to know each other through a meal or spar.”

 

A redhead steps forward, “Ameyuri. I’d be willing to spar with you, Chiharu-sama.”

 

Ameyuri’s words are surprisingly polite, but the rabid look in her eyes gives her away. Kameko’s lips twitch, “Of course.”

 

Jinpachi chortles. 

 

Mei shakes her head, “Alright, well the rest of you can finish introductions later- not that I don’t believe you don’t know each of them intimately , Chiharu.”

 

“Mei-chan,” Kameko whines, “Stop making fun of my information network! It’s helping you find all the rebel groups!”

 

Mangetsu steps forward, “You’re the reason why we know about the new groups now?”

 

Kameko winks just as Mei grabs her shoulder to shunsin, “Meet us at Training Ground Five.”

 

---

 

Training Ground Five is halfway across the main island and at the empty base of a cliff. 

 

She places Ranmaru between Raiga and Mei and wonders if they’ll click like they did in Yuma’s future-story. Kameko knows change is necessary, but it hurts to know she’s destroyed the good alongside everything else. 

 

(The story has changed, and there’s no going back.)

 

(Uchiha Obito died at Kannabi Bridge.)

 

Kameko moves to stand across from Ameyuri while the others line up along the sidelines.

 

“Have fun getting your ass kicked, Ameyuri!” Jinpachi calls, “At least only Mei saw me get dropped by Koi.”

 

Kameko blows a kiss.

 

Ameyuri pulls out Kiba, twin lightning swords and Kameko’s eyes move to her opponent. Her gaze flickers to Mei.

 

“Begin.”

 

---

 

Ameyuri deserves her title as one of the best kenjutsu users across the Elemental Nations- not that she stands a chance against Kameko. 

 

“Thank you for this match,” she says once Ameyuri’s forfeited. 

 

Ameyuri bares her teeth, half-smile, half-snarl, “You’re strong.”

Kameko nods, “I am. But that doesn’t stop me from training to improve.”

 

Ameyuri’s mouth stretches wider before she tilts her head back and cackles, “I like you! You’re a fuckin’ monster!”

 

She turns to Jinpachi as she pulls herself to her feet, “Jinpachi! Yo! Jinpachi!”

 

He straightens, “The hell you want, Ameyuri?!” 

 

“Why the bloody hell you call her Koi?! She seem delicate to you, Jinpachi?! Or is that what you’re into?! Huh, pervert? C’mon, answer me!”

 

Jinpachi cups his hands around his mouth to project his voice, “I’ll answer when you stop fuckin’ yappin’! Damn, Ameyuri, no one asked you!”

 

Kameko snorts at the two sword wielders yelling insults at each other from kilometers apart. 

 

“‘Course no asked me because I’m the one askin’ you! Do I need to electrocute you so hard I undo damage?!”

 

Kameko shunsin’s closer to their audience. 

 

“As long as that’s the only way you use the lightning chakra,” she mutters. 

 

Kisame splutters, cheeks turning purple. Eyes widening, Kameko curses. Her sailor’s mouth has only gained more freedom since coming to Kiri.

 

I’m going to traumatize everyone outside the Tokubetsu-Jonin longue when I get back to Konoha, she thinks, goddamn prudes.

 

“Ah, kid,” she waves her arms around, trying to think of an excuse. “That wasn’t what I meant,” she finishes lamely.

 

Fuguki turns to them, guarded, before crouching down next to Kisame. “What’d she say?” he questions seriously.

 

Kameko covers her face with her hands and groans. This is why she can’t be trusted around people; she corrupts children who have survived being corrupted by the Seven Swordsmen of the Mist. The notoriety! 

 

To be fair, using lighting chakra during sex would be very difficult to do safely for someone that wasn’t a medic or someone with extremely precise chakra control. And had lighting affinity or training.

 

Which classifies it as “kinky” even by shinobi standards. Or for the elite, seeing as there’s very few prostitutes with chakra training at all, not to mention lighting or control.  

 

(Kameko herself was a virgin, but that doesn’t mean she hasn’t experimented. )

 

Kisame leans closer to his Shisou, purple down to his collar, and whispers in his ears. 

 

Fuguki blinks before chortling, “I’d pay to see Ameyuri do that to Jinpachi.”

 

Ameyuri’s now close enough to hear and turns towards them, “Do what?” she questions. 

 

Mei smirks at her and Kameko blushes. 

 

“Anyone else want to spar?” she redirects desperately.

 

Raiga snorts, “I don’t need to get beat up in front of everyone, thanks.”

 

When the others nod in agreement, Kameko pouts. 

 

---

 

Kameko is able to bully Raiga into letting Ranmaru stay with him for a week. With that taken care of, she’s also noticed the distinct lack of Yuki Haku. 

 

She doesn’t know where his family is, assuming it’s still a miniscule farm town and they use different names. Hopefully, the father won’t feel so inclined to familicide. 

 

Kameko doesn’t count on it. Tensions are high and people will continue to look over their shoulders for years. 

 

It’s Kameko and Mei’s job to show them that Mist is changing for the better. To raise children differently, but inherently safer. Kinder, perhaps. 

 

That being said, if the father turns, Haku is Kameko’s first choice to groom as a successor Mizukage. 

 

Her plots are long and convoluted, and this isn’t something she’ll push if it gives Haku the chance at family. 

 

Either way, she has to find him first. 

 

“I’m going to the country first,” Kameko tells Mei, “While I’m there, I’ll wipe out the hiding and forming rebel groups, show the farmers better techniques, and get rid of foreign spies.”

 

Mei tilts her head, “We need an Academy and Hospital as soon as possible.”

 

“You have one,” Kameko points out, “and it was working well enough before I arrived.”

 

Mei pouts.

 

“I’ll leave a Mizuko to start organizing the hospital and to work on critical patients you would deem past saving,” Kameko offers, “But I won’t be gone for more than two months. By that point, it’ll give me another month to prep the Academy for the new term.”

 

After having left Konoha in mid-November, eight months have passed, her thirty fith birthday with them. With it being humid July, she’ll come back by September. 

 

If everything goes to plan. 

 

---

 

When Kameko finds Haku, the boy is just learning to walk and his smile is bright and happy. 

 

He plays with small ice dolls and coos at a delicate, detailed mobile. 

 

His mother is a dark haired beauty with a clan insignia embroidered on her clothes. They live in a compound with high walls and plentiful neighbors.

 

The Yuki Clan is alive and well.

 

(There is no husband in sight.)

 

Kameko leaves a Mizuko and moves on.

 

---

 

When Kameko returns, she has deported over two dozen spies attempting to gather information on the state of affairs in Kiri. 

 

She tied them up and tattooed a small ‘s’ on the back of their necks, and hiraishin’d them home. 

 

Unhurt, but also unable to return without being recognized. 

 

In their pocket’s, was a small note, “Don’t be nosy. -Chiharu-sama, Mist and Sand Affiliate.”

 

It was a nice surprise that there were none from Suna. She had been surprised by the amount from Iwa, though, considering they were on the opposite side of the continent. 

 

She pushed herself to stay to her given return date, and hadn’t had a chance to learn more about the Mist stories Yagura had told her about. Fortunately, with Zetsu and therefore Kaguya out of the picture, there was nothing she was concerned about being unable to handle. 

 

She has centuries, and she’s still learning other things. She’s sure the secrets of Dui can wait until she’s ready to uncover them. Any stories that have survived this long are unlikely to disappear any time soon, after all. 

 

---

 

“Meiiii-channn,” she calls obnoxiously, “I’m backkkkkk. Did you miss me?”

 

The woman grunts, not looking up from her paperwork. Setting down her brush, Mei looks up, “Anything to report?”

 

Kameko shakes her head, “The country is steadily coming to enjoy peace. I’ll start cleansing the Capital, but mostly I'll just make sure that they can’t leave and mess up all the work I’ve done. A lot of groups are staying still and laying low right now, so I’ll just take of them when they show their face.

 

“Dissenters from Mist have quieted substantially, and now it’s just the old conservatives who yell about everything.”

 

Mei nods, “Thanks.”

 

Kameko smiles gently, “Get some rest when you can.”


---

 

Kameko takes one night to herself before returning to work with vengeance. 

 

The Hospital is pathetic compared to what she’s used to within her town and Konoha.

 

She makes it work. 

 

She gives a passionate nurse a few books when no one’s available to train her, but for the most part, Kameko simply gets things in order. She shudders at the thought of the facility before Mizuko’s hand. 

 

---

 

Three months later, the Hospital functions similarly to Konoha’s and medics have had a crash course in everything they need. From here, it’s just practicing and getting better before applying. 

 

She’s proud of her staff. The experience is similar to Uzumaki Glass, but substantially different.

 

Bigger. 

 

She’s growing and learning and teaching and her projects are too. She’s “preparing her nest.”

 

(She misses her people in Konoha, but she won’t visit until she’s invited or her tasks are done.)

 

---

 

Ranmaru has stayed with Raiga, who is, coincidentally, roommates with Zabuza. 

 

She was worrying for the wrong pair, and she mourns the loss of the relationship Haku and Zabuza will never have. 

 

She watches Zabuza sling Ranmaru under his arm and thinks of Haku’s smile. 

 

She thinks it turned out okay, though.

 

(Either way, it is what it is.)

 

(The past has changed, but there’s nothing to say they won’t meet in the future.)



Chapter 21: Twenty-One

Summary:

Kameko leaves Kiri and takes Kimimaro on a field trip to Konoha

or,

Root stirs up trouble and Tsume enters the story

Notes:

sorry it's been so long! exam season urgh

Before anyone asks... yes, Danzo is actually dead.

(See the end of the chapter for more notes.)

Chapter Text

 

Seeing as she’d been so busy in the hospital, Kameko has missed the beginning of the new term at the Academy. It takes less than a month to plan everything, but nothing can be implemented half way through the year. 

 

Kameko sits down in her office, stapling her fingers. Looking out the window, she watches the early morning mist rise and dissipate under the midmorning sun. 

 

“That’s it,” she realizes. 

 

Mei leans against her doorway, juggling two cups of coffee.

 

“What?” she asks.

 

Kameko smiles at the Mizukage who, while younger, has become a definite friend. Zabuza, Raigo and Ranmaru visit occasionally for a meal and Ameyuri will hound her for a spar, but Mei is definitely Kameko’s favorite person within Mist. 

 

Mei hands her a cup of coffee.

 

“I’ve stopped by my town to check in a few times, mostly for Kimimaro,” Mei nods encouragingly, “But I think after I finish getting rid of the last couple spies, I’ll be out.”

 

Kameko hands her two folders, “The one on top is everything Academy related.”

 

Mei flips through it, “Looks good.”

 

Kameko grins before continuing, “And the one below was for trading and beautification aspects. Mostly park stuff based on Mizu architecture.”

 

Mei quirks an eyebrow before flipping through that folder as well, “Interesting. That’ll definitely be helpful, thanks ‘haru-chan.”

 

Kameko winks, leaning back in her chair.

 

“I still love how we trip people up with that.”

 

Mei smirks, “What, the betting pools on if we actually fuck or not? Or the ones that say we’re long lost childhood friends and have been calling each other cutesy nicknames since we were tiny?”

 

Kameko laughs, “Both. Kiri shinobi don’t gossip as much as Kumo or Konoha, but y’all will catcall to high heaven.”

 

Mei sips her coffee, “I don’t know about that- Kisame’s conspiracy theories have been the highlights to my days recently.”

 

Kameko pretends to wipe a tear, “Since the day I realized I ruined him, I knew the world would fall.”

 

Mei nods seriously, “I’m considering leaving your office empty when you leave so it can do that dramatic thing where it gets dusty and I leave your things untouched. Sigh when I glance inside.”

 

Kameko snorts before pausing. “Wait, please do. And then tell me what look Mangetsu gives you when he finds out.”

 

Mei flops a hand against her head, “Woe is me! For my lover and left me and my heart will never recover!”

 

Kameko shakes her head, “You poor, poor thing. What an awful lover you have.”

 

Mei nods seriously. Kameko continues the previous conversation, “So I’ll probably take about a month vacation, check in with my town, anywhere else that needs me, and then come back here for a month to make sure all goes well. 

 

“Maybe get to know people outside of the Hospital better,” she muses aloud.

 

Mei hums, “Can’t really go wrong there. Just don’t join a street brawl or you’ll have the whole city pining.”

 

“But Mei-chan! How could you? You know you’re my one and only!”

 

----

 

Kameko’s leaving a bar when she notices the dark figure jumping rooftops. 

 

It doesn’t belong.

 

Kameko’s just spent the night talking with drunk locals and instilling them with a good opinion of Mei’s character. Kameko herself, similar to Suna, has been regarded highly by the general populace because they’ve seen her work for their betterment. She’s technically not a government official, which has helped more than Kameko would’ve expected.

 

She’s also known to be strong, considering none of the Seven Swordsmen allow anyone to call her weak, which would therefore be calling themselves weak- if indirectly. Which makes her hot.

 

Quite simply, Kiri likes her because she has brawns, brains, and beauty. In that order. 

 

But when she sees a Konoha ANBU- because she knows where she’s seen people move like that- jumping through Kiri like they belong there, Kameko gets angry. 

 

Right now, Mist is under her protection.

 

Within a second, she has a knocked out ANBU in her arms. She takes them to her apartment and ties them to a chair. It takes her a single minute to read the seal attaching it to the owners face and then take it off. 

 

She blinks, revaluating the situation.

 

She’s still mad, more at Minato than this unlucky operative, but she hadn’t expected Shiranui Genma. 

 

Minato wouldn’t have sent him alone.

 

She furrows her brows. Genma’s part of the Hokage’s guard and therefore has access to a lot of classified material, meaning he’s either a spy or on an extremely sensitive mission.

 

She’d pegged him as a poison and seduction specialist, which means a focus on assasination and short term infiltration. He’d attempted to blend in with Kiri night patrol. 

 

He hadn’t done half bad, actually. 

 

She frowns at him, before slapping him lightly, “Wake up.”

 

He jolts, brown eyes flying open before landing on her. A moment later, they dart off and take in the room. 

 

“Why are you here, Genma?” she asks, noting when he realizes he doesn’t have his mask. The panic really is borderline amusing. “And where are the others?”

 

He doesn’t move, jaw clenched. 

 

Kameko brushes off nonexistent dirt from her lap, standing.

 

“Fine, I’ll find them myself,” she places a short term paralyzing seal on his chest. “Wait here.”

 

Now that she's actively looking for them, it only takes about ten minutes to find two partners near the outskirts. She also realizes that they likely just arrived, which means they would’ve been caught by her patrol squads within the day. 

 

It’s a relief, seeing as she is currently in charge of international security.

 

Their take down is just as quick, and when she sees Genma’s face subtly fall, she knows she didn’t miss anyone. 

 

Their unmasking ceremony goes even faster than his, and Kameko is pleasantly surprised by her gifts.

 

“Minato, you shouldn’t have,” she giggles. “His guard, wife, and Inuzuka Clan Head?”

 

“I’m the heir,” Tsume bites out, “You don’t know much do you, trash?”

 

“Ah,” Kameko says. Maybe she should’ve broken the news gentler, but she had assumed she already knew.

 

“No, Tsume,” there’s genuine guilt in her voice, “Inuzuka Hikame died two days ago.”

 

It’s a tragedy, but Kameko’s Mizuko Network works fast. With pinpoint accuracy, Kameko has ready access to information that could destroy just about anyone. Anything. 

 

(To fell a country, the damage can be done in hours.)

 

Kushina’s mouth falls into a grim line when she realizes this isn’t a trick or exaggeration, “How?”

 

No!” Tsume growls, “My mother isn’t dead! You’re lying! Kushina, why are you listening to her ?!”

 

“Because she’s our mission ,” Kushina snaps back, “The one you guys didn’t know about. And…”

 

Kameko raises an eyebrow. 

 

“She wouldn’t lie about this,” Genma finishes. Kameko watches the exchange, expressionless, but undeniably intrigued. He glances at her, “I’ve seen her with Gai, and you’ve heard just as many stories as I have. Hell, Tsume we’re alive. And this isn’t Kiri T&I.” We have a chance of walking out of here.

 

A hopeful ANBU; eccentric. 

 

Kameko isn’t inherently merciful, but she doesn’t lie when her hair is blue. Half truths, lying by omission, sure, but not lying.  

 

“Not to say you won’t go there if you get on my nerves,” Kameko replies, “But I am currently in charge of international politics, so the decision is completely mine.”

 

Tsume snarls and Kameko releases her chakra, “I am Alpha here,” she tells her and the others freeze. 

 

Kameko leans down, slaps a paralysing seal on Tsume and cuts her ropes. She bunches her clothes at the back of her neck and pulls up the teenager like a puppy.

 

Shaking her a bit, Kameko repeats herself.

 

“I am Alpha.”

 

Tsume lies limp, and the fight goes out of her eyes. Kameko lifts her up until they’re eye level, “I’m sorry for your loss.”

 

Tsume tears up before letting out a howl. Kameko lets her, content with her soundproofing seals. 

 

“When people let out a cry of grief, don’t interrupt them.”

 

Yuma pats Kameko’s head, “A llanto* is a way to mourn and fight to your feet at the same time.”

 

“We aren’t cowards who kick others when they’re down,” Kameko agrees. “Healthy healing, the courage to continue, is to be respected.”

 

When she’s done, reduced to quiet whimpering and drying tear tracks, Kameko places her on the large, hotel sized bed. Moving across the room, she lights a stick of incense gentle enough to calm Tsume’s advanced senses. 

 

Moving back towards the bed, she moves Tsume’s head into her lap. She starts by running her fingers through her hair, brushing her nails against her scalp in small circles.

 

Kushina and Genma watch until their mourning teammate falls asleep. 

 

“I’ve never seen an Inuzuka on the brink of going feral, come back,” Kushina mutters softly. 

 

Kameko shrugs, “Inuzuka’s and Hatake’s are primal.” She sighs wistfully, “It’s both similar and different from Uzumaki and Uchiha.”

 

Kushina looks confused again, and Kameko shakes her head. 

 

“Ah, Minato’s gonna have a fit,” Kameko sighs. Genma gives her an odd look, “Normally, you wouldn’t be able to save an Inuzuka from going feral. Period. What I did was the only way.”

 

Genma and Kushina tense. 

 

“I made her imprint on me instead. Even if she becomes Alpha to her Clan, I’ll always be her Alpha. Which, theoretically, means that I’m Alpha to the entire Inuzuka Clan. I’m already close with his Jonin Commander and by extension the Ino-Shika-Cho Alliance, and the Uchiha know that they owe me a debt.”

 

Kushina pales, understanding that that alone is substantial power for an outside force. For an inside force, even. 

 

Kameko isn’t allied with Konoha at all. 

 

“The Sannin will listen to me before him or each other, quite frankly. The Hospital Board likes me. I can beat Minato in a fight. Honestly, the only large clans I have no influence in are the Aburame and the Hyuuga.”

 

Gemma cusses lowly, “Fuck.”

 

Kameko shrugs, “If it makes you feel better, I’ve got about three other countries in my pocket and I could buy quite a few small countries if I so desire. Besides, I wasn’t even attempting to network- I was just taking care of people who needed it.”

 

The implied because Konoha hurt them then left them to rot is clear.

Kushina’s hands are fists and she has a bit of fear in her eyes, “We trusted you into our house when I was pregnant and Minato was sick. We knew you were strong. Why did we do that?”

 

Kameko shrugs, despite knowing the question was primarily rhetorical and self directed. 

 

“I’m down to earth and you’re shinobi. You pick up intent. I was there to nurse you and that’s what I did. I didn’t use a creepy brainwash jutsu.”

 

Not that she doesn’t know them, but Kameko considers those inhumane. Kinjutsu.

 

(To die for what you believe in isn’t to die at all.)

 

Genma bites his lip.

 

“I’m the exception to the rule in your lives, but you don’t have to fear someone stronger. I’m not sadistic, not assigned missions. I do what I want.”

 

Genma looks down at Tsume, sound asleep, “Generally, you aim to protect. That’s why we feel comfortable, you feel like a comrade- even if you aren’t Konoha.”

 

Kameko’s fingers trace over her necklace, “I think so, yes.”

 

He sags, “Will you let us go?”

 

Kameko nods, “Yeah. I need to know your missions though- both of them.”

 

Kushina straightens, before sighing. Genma perks up, gaze jumping towards her. 

 

“Minato would much rather you get home alive- you can always say I threatened you,” Kameko offers. 

 

Genma bristles, “We don’t lie to our Kage.”

 

I won’t be in your debt .

 

“Suit yourselves.”

 

“Our secret but primary mission was to try to find you and bring you back to Konoha,” Kushina begins. “Our secondary was to get a grip on what's happening in Mist. All our spies have recently been returned to our gates, courtesy of you.”

 

Genma’s brows furrow and Kushina turns to him, slightly sheepish. “I was going to tell you and Tsume in the morning, but you weren’t supposed to know until you needed to. Everything was S-ranked for secrecy.”

 

Kameko rubs Tsume’s neck and earns a small rumble, similar to a purr. 

 

“Why? How?”

 

Genma nods next to her, “Why do we need her?”

 

“It didn’t seem as terrifying until you broke down where you have power in Konoha just now,” she admits, “But I was told ROOT, Danzo’s force, refuses to work until they see you. Their other condition was getting rid of the seals on their tongues, but Minato and me and Jiraiya couldn’t crack it.”

 

“And a little more than a year isn’t enough to recover from the Kyuubi attack,” she muses. She doubts that it’s the whole truth, but it probably is at least vaguely ROOT related.

 

She observes as Genma soaks up the information, “So you’re team leader and firepower, Tsume’s the tracker, and Genma was here for the secondary mission?”

 

Kushina twitches, “Not quite.”

 

Genma makes a noise of comprehension.

 

“It was her!” he exclaims. He turns to Kushina, “She was my target, right?”

 

Kushina dips her head. 

 

“I was what?” Kameko questions, impatient.

 

Genma grins, the slightest bit lopsided, “I was told I had a seduction target for this mission.”

 

His grin turns into a slow smirk and his voice lowers, eyes darkening, “I was here to convince you.”

 

“Hokage-sama’s plan,” Kameko says slowly, unaffected, “Was we can’t fight her so ‘convince’ her to come back?”

 

It’s not entirely unsound and Genma’s undeniably an exceptional seduction specialist, but Kameko likes consent. Loves it. Won’t do anything without it.

 

Mission orders do not count. 

 

Minato sending someone on a seduction mission for her has only made her angrier. 

 

“You have a valid reason to want me to return,” she tells them. “But the way Minato went about it really makes me hate him.”

 

A bit of KI leaks out, and maybe it’s because she’s getting sentimental in her old age because Genma is an adult but she’s furious at the way a kage is throwing a fucking twenty year old onto her lap. Maybe Genma thinks he could subdue her with poison, but Minato knows better. 

 

If Kameko was just the slightest bit more twisted, Genma could be raped and dead and terrified .

 

Tsume whimpers and Kameko claws her way back to reality, wrangling her chakra into submission. 

 

Genma and Kushina are pale.

 

“Am I so bad?” he attempts to joke. 

 

Her gaze softens, and she exudes a bit of positive intent for the other participants in the room. 

 

“Kushina, why aren’t you Hokage?” 

 

Kushina looks a bit thrown, “Well, with Hiraishin, I knew I’d never beat Minacchin in battle and Konoha deserved the strongest as Hokage.”

 

Kameko nods for her to continue. 

 

“I found out I had to do paperwork,” she admits, “And I was a jinchuriki. Then I became a mother and I never wanted to be forced to put the Village before Naruto again.”

 

Kushina reels back, “That’s not what I meant-”

 

“It’s okay, Kushina,” Kameko interrupts. “Being a mother shouldn’t be treasonous, but that’s simply another tally towards ‘felling the shinobi system.’”

 

Genma’s tense again, but she highly doubts he’ll mention this during his report. She meets his eyes, “Do you think there’s something wrong with what she just said?”

 

His brows furrow, “According to the rules-”

“Aa, ah, ah,” she tutts, “I asked Genma, not a mask.”

 

He hesitates before slumping, “No,” he tells her. “The Shiranui Clan is dead because we prioritized being shinobi over child rearing.”

 

The corners of his mouth turn down, “They went on missions until they died halfway through and eventually, there was no one left. Gone, one at a time.”

 

Kameko doesn’t comment on the fact that he basically repeated himself, but it’s important he begins to realize being a shinobi shouldn’t consume your life.

 

Unfortunately, that’s part of the job description.

 

Kameko will change that, or destroy everything that makes it that way. She isn’t yet sure what she’ll resort to. 

 

“You aren’t bad, Genma,” she tells him, “in any way. You were shaped and molded, but your self worth shouldn’t be derived from what others tell you.”

 

“I’m a seduction and infiltration specialist,” he tells her, “of course it is. I need to be what people want.”

 

Kameko shakes her head, “Yes, but no. You need to do your job and train, but you also need to be able to separate yourself. Who is Genma ?”

 

He’s frowning, trying to wrap his head around what she’s saying, but he’s still listening

 

“Kushina lost being Hokage, but she stopped wanting the position when she found something that was hers . That’s when she became a person. You were both raised as soldiers during a war and you don’t quite know how to be human because you were never forced to.”

 

“You know how to fake behavior, but your feelings are consistently surface level to protect yourself from what you do. You can’t afford to consider morals as a shinobi.”

 

Genma starts trembling, and she doubts he knows why yet.

 

“I just need you to find yourself. As a person and seduction specialist,” she puts her hands on his shoulders before gripping him tightly and giving him a rough shake. “You need to learn what consent means. It isn’t take what you get and make the best of it- it’s finding the best and choosing .”

 

Kushina watches, making no move to stop Kameko’s lecture. 

 

“And sometimes you need someone to tell you you’re good as you are, and that’s fine, but make sure they aren’t complimenting something that isn’t real. You’re a flirt? Fine. But don’t be a flirt because it’s a mask you’ve donned.

 

“That’s lying to your comrades, and I’m pretty sure shinobi like to save that for other villages.”

 

“It was a joke,” he laughs awkwardly. Kameko had wondered how much he’d be able to absorb before he shut down. It’s to be expected when you tilt someone’s worldview askew. 

 

“Yes,” she agreed, “but there’s a reason that that was the phrase that popped into your mind first, and it wasn’t a hurt ego.”

 

Kushina sits quietly hands clasped in her lap, “I’ve done awful, unforgivable things as a kunoichi,” she tells them. “But I did it on orders.”

 

“I understood what I was signing up for, even as a kid. I’ll stick it out with my comrades,” Genma says, and Kameko knows this is something he’s told himself for a long time.

 

Too long, possibly. Kameko sighs, “If you ever need it to stop, I can threaten Minato. Hell, I can take you to my town and you can disappear. You can do whatever you want and I’ll help you.” 

 

She glances around the room, “Any of you.”

 

Kushina lets out a stuttered breath, but she doesn’t answer. Kameko doesn’t expect much. Not now, maybe not ever.

 

They’re adults and they’ve chosen their paths, whether they realized they had other options or not. 

 

Kameko moves Tsume’s head off her lap and stands. 

 

“I think I do want to have a conversation with Minato,” she decides, “You can spend the night and I’ll escort you out in the morning.”

 

They nod absentmindedly.

 

“I’ll go in three days, but I’m taking someone with me and you are to leave and not come back. I’ll send Tsume with something that has my scent. Are we clear?”

 

Genma looks to Kushina who shrugs, “Sounds better than what I expected.”

 

Kameko nods, “Tell Minato, now that he has been warned directly, if I find Konoha spies in Mist, I’ll just kill them. Unpleasant, but Kiri is currently under my protection.”

 

The two look solemn, but they nod. 

 

“Okay.”

 

---

 

The next morning, Kameko officially hands her jobs over to her trained replacements.

 

“You headin’ out?” Mei asks.

 

“Seems like it, but I’ll be back in a month. Want to give me a nice send off?”

 

Mei smiles ruefully, “I can’t. Jinpachi hinted that he has a free night, though.”

 

Kameko lights up, “I’ll talk to him then. Kami knows I won’t be having sex in Konoha- goddamn gossips.”

 

Mei cackles.

 

---

 

Kameko stops by her town before going to Konoha. She’d gone from half a year with him on her hip to a day per month, and she’ll be damned if she leaves Kimimaro alone for much longer. 

 

She’s his Chiharu-baa and she takes that seriously. 

 

“I’m back,” she calls. 

 

“Welcome back,” Yagura calls from the kitchen counter. “How is Mist?”

 

Kameko nudges him with her shoulder, “You left it in good hands. I’ve cleared out spies and given country folk some better agricultural techniques, but they’ve got it handled.”

 

He nods once, “Thank you.”

 

“Of course.”

 

(Kameko, in Cherishing all Creatures , will make sure that starvation isn’t something people have to suffer.)

 

(It’s never countries on the brink of desperation, but the people who live there.)

 

---

 

When Kameko flashes to the gate with Kimimaro in his sling on her back at midday, she hadn’t been sure what to expect.

 

Last time she returned, it was early morning and empty. Quiet, calm streets. 

 

This time, when she appears in front of the two young guards, they both jump, glancing at her hair. One immediately dips his head into the village central, “She’s here!”

 

The other gapes at her, taking a step back. 

 

“I was expecting a monster!” he cries, “Not a pretty girl! They sent me unprepared, unprepared I tell you!”

 

Kameko tilts her head to the side while the other pops his head back in.

 

“Kotetsu-”

 

“Is a briefing standard for gate duty?” Kameko asks curiously. She’s been knee deep in Mist’s bureaucracy for months, and some habits are hard to break. 

 

They freeze.

 

“Maybe,” the one who had been yelling, Kotetsu, hedges.

 

“You’re lying,” she considers, delighted. “How interesting.”

 

Kameko licks her lips and maybe a little bloodlust shows, but well, she hasn’t practiced hiding it in a while.

 

The gate guards tense, uneasy and unable to explain why.

 

Konoha shinobi are rude after all. He could’ve just told her it was classified. Her sharp eyes rake over their coiled forms. Wouldn’t be much fun, she decides.

 

Kimimaro rubs his nose against her neck, “The walls are pretty tall, but so far this field trip is boring.”

 

Kameko nods empathetically, “This city is Tobira-ji’s child, are you surprised it’s a bit boring?”

 

ANBU drop down, surrounding them. Minato steps forward, looking a bit haggard and slightly relieved. 

 

Kimimaro lights up.

 

He knows exactly what ANBU do , she considers before shrugging. I love him to death, no matter what, but the child is undeniably Kiri. 

 

Kameko doesn’t mind cultural differences, even if it scares Konoha. 

 

(She will not allow blind eyes to justify dehumanizing other people.)

 

“Still boring?” she teases.

 

Minato takes a step forward and Kimimaro’s eyes follow the movement, accurately determining the main ‘threat’. 

 

“Put me down,” he tells her quietly. She isn’t under the impression that it went unheard. 

 

She knows this won’t end in a fight, but he doesn’t.

 

(If they attacked her after inviting her, with Kimimaro at her side, it wouldn’t be a fight.

 

It’d be a bloodbath .)

 

She puts him down, “Stay close.”

 

Minato’s eyes glance at Kimimaro before returning to hers, “Chiharu-sama.”

 

“Hokage,” Kameko greets in a tone that tells him exactly how she feels. Here, it isn’t a title but an insult.

 

(It’s dangerous for a shinobi to be unable to differentiate a monster and a girl, after all.)

 

( Deadly , even.)

Notes:

*llanto Spanish, shout to release emotions. Usually grief.

And now, I'm off to fight the school board

Chapter 22: Twenty Two

Summary:

Uchiha Itachi looking for spices. With a big woven basket. As a four year old.

(and some politics but like whatever.)

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

 

Minato escorts them through the gates. 

 

She hadn’t told anyone apart from Kagami that she was arriving, but it seems Konoha’s rumor mill has struck again. Curious strangers gather for her return.

 

It makes sense that she’d draw attention, she supposes. Technically, she’s similar to a well-connected celebrity to civilians and an interesting, and possibly dangerous, anomaly to shinobi. 

 

The stand out, however, is Uchiha Mikoto.

 

Kameko tilts her head to the side when she catches eye contact. She moves to walk in her direction, ignoring Minato’s twitch. 

 

“Hello, Matriarch,” she murmurs softly, “to what do I owe the pleasure?

 

Mikoto is pretty and Kameko likes flirting. 

 

Mist’s quickly become one of her favorite places. What she ignored in her anger was that they too are people of the coast; wild and untamed. Vulgar. 

 

The promise of a good time.

 

And well, a traditional beauty with a history of T&I? Noble lady with unparalleled genjutsu? That just promises an irresistibly good rush. 

 

Mikoto blinks her large, dark eyes. Once, twice, long lashes fluttering. 

 

“Ah,” she says and Kameko feels her lips curve higher- her voice sends tingles.

 

Minato clears his throat. Kameko ignores him.

 

“Chiharu,” she introduces herself. “I know we’ve met, but I feel like we haven’t had a chance to connect…”

 

“Mikoto,” the woman inserts smoothly. She bows just enough to showcase the outline of her cleavage and Kameko’s suggestive grin turns a bit more genuine; it’s no fun to play by yourself. 

 

“I would love to invite you to dinner.”

 

To anyone else, Mikoto seems interested. Kameko isn’t sure that she’s not , but that invitation is definitely the reason she was there in the first place. 

 

And Kameko gave her the perfect excuse to use. 

 

Kameko would never take advantage, but part of her is morbidly curious on how far Mikoto would’ve gone to secure her presence. 

 

“It’d be an honor,” Kameko demurs. Mikoto smiles back and another jolt of adrenaline runs down her spine. Kameko shivers. 

 

Mikoto hands her an invitation and saunters away. She doesn’t look back.

 

Kameko returns to her escorts and Minato looks somewhere between exasperated and annoyed.

 

“She’s married, you know,” he mentions, faux casual.

 

Kameko shrugs, before glancing at him through her lashes. She’s nowhere near pleased, or even neutral about his leadership. 

 

She doesn’t like it. 

 

Quite simply, Kameko is pissed. But that doesn’t mean she can’t play nice, can’t spin her webs.

 

She won’t dethrone him officially and Kameko needs a new project. Something bigger than the Head of the Hospital or Aid to the Mizukage. 

 

Making the Hokage a figurehead should do just fine, and she’s curious on how ROOT will fit in with her plans. The bijuu would probably be proud if she told them about the layers of rot the founders started and her assistance.  

 

The shinobi system is vile, but it simply isn’t working for Konoha.

 

(The Uchiha Massacre was an example in itself. Konoha’s caving and ultimately something critical will snap.)

 

(Konoha is her friend's home and she’ll save it; collateral not included.)

 

“What, you don’t want juicy Uchiha Head’s gossip running amok?” she teases, “Or wait! Is this about Kushina, too? You didn’t quite give me possessive vibes, Goldilocks.”

 

Except he’s shown that side of himself to her multiple times. She looks him up and down and Namikaze Minato sure as hell ain’t ugly .

 

On the outside.

 

(“Remember children, only the best shinobi become Kages.”)

 

“I won’t steal her from you, doubt that I could,” she placates dismissively. “Besides, if I was going to play homewrecker or side hoe, I wouldn’t put much effort into it.”

 

She throws up her arms, “I’m strong! And rich! And debatably pretty!”

 

She hears a muttered, “Who the hell said ‘debateable’ to that?” from an ANBU. 

 

She snorts before continuing, “Most places, that’s enough for me to be the sugar daddy- not anything else! Top of the chain ,” she stresses; the joke stretching to cover her threats. Those aren’t for prying ears. “But I take one step into gossipy Konoha and I have the Hokage on my ass for giving someone a good time!”

 

Minato has gotten progressively redder, his serious Hokage facade crumbling. 

 

He donnes another mask so naturally, she muses, I wonder which one Kushina gets. 

 

“And you have Jiraiya as a sensei!” she accuses. “The hell’s wrong with you? If your only giving poor Kushina vanilla sex,” Kameko gotten progressively louder during her ranting and hey, this is fun too. 

 

The marketplace is so busy this time of day. It’d be a waste, a near crime, if she didn’t offer a new tidbit to the gossipers. She’s not from Konoha, but she should do as the locals would, like a polite visitor. 

 

Then maybe I will take her! ” Kameko waves her arms and gossips are only ‘bad’ if they work against her.

 

And she knows giving people physical masks just makes them gossip louder. 

 

Minato splutters, and attempts to defend himself. 

 

“It’s one thing from Sensei, but you’re a girl! Young looking!” 

 

Kameko raises an eyebrow, severely unimpressed. Dumb fresh chunnin and dangerous shinobi, fine. Hokage and perverts are only dirty old men? Please. She doubts Minato’s a sociopath, but the only people he cares about are likely Kushina, Naruto, and Kakashi- at most. 

 

“Is this what too many traditional clans does to a place?” she wonders, “‘Cause that’s just sad.”

 

Minato’s eyes spark and he opens his mouth again. Kameko cuts him off, now genuinely curious. 

 

“Is it really just vanilla?” she asks, quiet enough to give him the illusion of privacy. 

 

Minato’s ears are red and the flush started at his cheeks. It’s almost endearing. 

 

The ANBU lean forward. 

 

“Respectfully, I’m not having this conversation with you, Chiharu-sama,” he grinds out.

 

His acting is flawless, but she’d be disappointed if it wasn’t. 

 

Kameko slumps dramatically, “If you didn’t want to gossip, the heck you invite me for,” she grumbles.

 

(Masks are met with masks.)

 

Minato winces. He’s clearly considering what happened since he last met her- a lot, including some sort of sexual awakening- but he grasps to her option of switching topics.

 

Predictably, he talks shop. 

 

“When we get to my office, Shikaku and the Sannin will be there.”

 

He glances at her, “With Elder Shimura’s unfortunate passing, the Elder’s Council has been disbanded and the Sannin now work as advisors.”

 

She nods, looking down at Kimimaro who walks a half a step behind her. Hiruzen and his teammates needed to retire, one way or another. 

 

When Minato glances down at him, he does not pull out the cheery attitude he might for a Konoha-bred six year old.  He can sense the blood on Kimimaro’s hands, the blood that all shinobi have, and he is well aware that he has no authority over the child.

 

He also might suspect Kimimaro’s Kaguya heritage- the history of another dead, massacred clan. 

 

(The difference between Kimimaro and Kameko is that with the fall of their Clan, one was set free, while the other was abandoned.)

 

(Or maybe there’s no difference at all.)

 

---

 

The walk into the Tower is unpleasant yet perfectly tolerable. Kimimaro shadows her like an ANBU guard does a kage and she finds it painfully sweet.

 

(He would never get hurt before she was dead five times over. Not because of her.)

 

When they enter Minato’s office, she is immediately wrapped into an embrace. She doesn’t fight the pale, lanky limbs that wrap around her torso.

 

Kimimaro jumps, but he doesn’t go to attack. 

 

(In another life, he wouldn’t have understood the importance of a hug. Wouldn’t have experienced one at all.

 

This is not that life.)

 

She hadn’t quite expected it to be Orochimaru who felt her absence so intensely, but perhaps she should’ve. 

 

She missed him terribly and a letter is never enough to say goodbye. 

 

(It’s been fourteen months.)

 

She brushes her fingers through his inky hair calmly, rubbing small circles in his back. She won’t be the first to let go.

 

Orochimaru relaxes the slightest bit, sagging against her. Trusting her to hold him up while he swipes his partially forked tongue against her neck- reacquainting himself with her scent.

 

It isn’t something they’ve done before, but she can feel his desperation slowly evolving into contentment as he leans against her. She doesn’t mind, and he trusts her to stop him if it makes her uncomfortable. 

 

She doesn’t, and he relaxes a little more. 

 

Leaving Orochimaru to take what he needs, Kameko peeks over her shoulder at the other inhabitants in the room. Shikaku is observing Minato’s posture while Kimimaro stares at the remaining Sannin. 

 

“He looks like Tobira-jii,” he declares, scrutinizing Jiraiya. “But uglier.”

 

They aren’t being subtle, but who would contemplate that they’re talking about the revered, long dead Nidaime?

 

“Is it the white hair?” Kameko inspects.

 

Kimimaro hesitates before nodding. Jiraiya splutters, “I’ll have you know I’m very handsome and popular! And you have white hair too, punk!”

 

Kimimaro looks at her and shakes his head in disappointment, “Dumber, too. Chiharu-baa, you said it’d be fun.”

 

Tsunade cackles in the background while Kameko huffs in amusement. “I’m afraid fun things don’t happen in office’s too often- especially not in Konoha.”

 

He pouts and Orochimaru slowly lifts his head from her shoulder. Lidded golden eyes monitor his surroundings lazily, as if he just awoke from a soothing nap. He steps back before meeting her eyes. 

 

“Welcome back,” he whispers. 

 

She squeezes his hands before releasing him entirely. 

 

“Everyone,” she announces, “This is Kimimaro.”

 

She waves her hand at the six year old, “He’s one of my wards, so don’t mess with him.”

 

Kimimaro’s green eyes worship her and Dui rushes through her veins. She can protect him without it, but she likes having proof of her emotions. 

 

(Kameko will live a long life and it’s important to have reminders that she is human.)

 

Shikaku nods at them both, “Nice to meet you. Unfortunately, this meeting is rather urgent, so let's get started.”

 

Kameko leans against the side wall and motions for him to begin. She hadn’t even done a briefing with her spy network in her desire for a new game. 

 

“ROOT had three leaders apart from Danzo himself,” Minato initiates, “They’re called The Generals.”

 

Kameko knows all of this- having stolen the ROOT paperwork a few months before assassinating Danzo, but she’s curious how much he will tell her directly. 

 

“When we raided the base, it was empty. Whatever Danzo’s protocols were, they’re undeniably effective- we can’t find anyone. We suspect children are still being taken and trained.”

 

“How long have you had a chance to investigate?” she asks. She killed Shimura a year and a half ago, when ROOT was a myth within Konoha. A disbanded sect of ANBU. 

 

Kameko has all of ROOT’s documents, has them memorized. It’s because of this that she knows Rule #2: Should Shimura Danzo be killed and defeated, the victor is to become the new Valued.  

 

Danzo believed in survival of the fittest, and he was petty enough that anyone who defeated him would have to be strong enough to defeat anyone.

 

In the end, it is what happened. 

 

(To be a war hawk in a shinobi world is to follow the system and work it to your advantage.)

 

But Danzo had also preached to love and protect the village above all else, and Kameko wasn’t above her curiosity to see what would happen if she left. The aftermath of The Kyuubi Attack would bring in genuine nationalists but where would the rest go? Were any of them nationalists at this point? Would ROOT fall apart if she left it alone?

 

Are they actually refusing to work?

 

Her experiment had been a part of what led her to admit to her role in Shimura’s downfall. And yet, nothing. 

 

Until now.

 

What Kushina told her was a taste, enough to peak her interest, but Kameko has no idea if any or all of it was compromised intel.

 

“Only since about a month ago,” Minato admits. “We weren’t sure ROOT existed in the first place and with Danzo dead we assumed it would dissolve if it was.”

 

Kameko raises an eyebrow. 

 

“I got an ultimatum,” he discloses, jaw clenched. Kameko doesn’t smile but she is delighted; whether it’s coincidence or ROOT laying a rat at her feet, she’s pleased. 

 

“All we know about ROOT is that Shimura ran it, he’s dead, and now there are three Generals keeping it in place. They demanded the seals off their tongues.”

 

That’s pathetic, she thinks, but it probably really is all that they know . Kameko turns to Shikaku, “And what do you suspect ?”

 

“I suspect that they filled ranks through kidnapping and possibly fake promises. We aren’t sure how many there are, but it’s a well trained army. They have power and treaties with other nations.”

 

Kameko shrugs, “You aren’t necessarily wrong, but there are so many gaps. You’re thinking so hard you’ve built a box, Shikaku.”

 

He frowns. 

 

“What's the ultimatum?” she asks Minato. 

 

“They want to meet you or they’ll attack the village from the inside.”

 

Risky. Her lips curve. Maybe Konoha has thrills of its own, hidden deep enough people forget they exist. Whatever missions Danzo had assigned before he died, they’re done.

 

ROOT’s looking for a purpose. Duty is the only way they know.

 

She thinks of the roughly four hundred soldiers who have forgotten how to do anything but fight, outmaneuver, rest, eat, and fight again. They’ve done everything they could do to stall time, they considered Rule #31: Do not talk to Valued unless given permission , but now they have nothing.

 

They’ve realized she won’t come for them, so they’re coming to her. If she doesn’t come, they’ll self-destruct.

 

(They’ll be seen and remembered.)

 

“This isn’t about anyone in this room other than me,” she tells them. Her eyes are a deep blue and dancing . “This isn’t even about the people out there,” she jutts her chin towards the window framing the village. 

 

“I’ll handle it; give me the note.”

 

Minato looks hesitant but he’s out of options- it’s why he called her in the first place. He’ll probably try to track her, but she’s done playing his games. Shikaku reaches for an inconspicuous stack of papers. 

 

Jiraiya is observing her again, a disarming grin resting on his face. It doesn’t fool her. There’s a reason Minato is phenomenal with masks, after all. 

 

Jiraiya’s loyalty is hers only through his teammates, and he’ll fight her to his grave if she does something to harm them. That being said, Minato is still his student.

 

His Hokage. 

 

(That has to mean something. For fear of everything collapsing; imploding.)

 

Shikaku hands her a small scroll. She pockets it and stands. Tsunade’s brows furrow while Minato balks. 

 

“What do you mean?” he asks.

 

“Technically, it is your right to know- considering the threat and all,” Kameko waves her hand. “But I’m not going to tell you. If you want, we can have a meet and greet with the Generals at some point, but you’re probably not going to interact with ROOT much anyway.”

 

Shikaku leans on his elbows, “All that work… for nothing.”

 

Kimimaro giggles, a high pitched, childish noise. He’s thrilled, can appreciate her actions establishing herself at the top of the chain . Kameko’s smile loses its sharp edge as she ruffles his hair. 

 

Minato looks hesitant, yet equally unwilling to go against her. He knew what he signed up for when he sent for her, and by now he’s well aware that she doesn’t refer to him. 

 

He’s also busy. 

 

“Fine,” he agrees, “But I’d better get a warning if they decide to attack.”

 

Kameko shrugs. 

 

---

 

With the meeting over, Kimimaro climbs back into his sling on her back. Shinobi children don’t take naps but Kameko’s already flipped Kimimaro’s life on it’s side and in the end, it’ll only make him stronger. 

 

(Kameko didn’t take naps when she was on the streets, either. Then Yuma came and flipped her life on it’s side.)

 

She feels him shuffle his weight and arrange his limbs. Feels his hair brush her exposed neck, feels it tug slightly against her necklace and ribbon. 

 

Patting his foot gently, Kameko smiles at the occupants of the room, “Find me later, after work, okay?”

 

Once she's gotten nods in return, Kameko heads out the door, tossing a wave over her shoulder. 

 

---

 

Kameko walks around a park to get Kimimaro to sleep, her head tilted up at the cloudless sky. 

 

Fishing out the invitation from her pocket, Kameko straightens the Uchiha invitation. The dinner is set for tomorrow at six, at the home of the Clan Head. 

 

Kimimaro’s breathing evens out and Kameko heads to the market for dinner ingredients. She sends a Mizuko with an invitation to Gai while picking fresh meat. 

 

She’d hoped to be lucky enough to be unbothered on the way to 3600 Ume, but the market is far too busy. Civilians that remember her are friendly, but most are too intimidated to do more than half-heartedly haggle. 

 

That’s not to say the moment she leaves hearing distance they aren’t whispering among each other. 

 

So it wouldn’t be a surprise if she got interrupted on her shopping trip. And yet, the opposite happens. 

 

She interrupts someone else’s. 

 

Kameko recognizes the boy she would greet among the redwoods. She doesn’t know his name and is quite impressed with the fact she recognized him at all- it’s been almost two years and he was no older than two at the time. She puts him about four now. 

 

And that isn’t enough to interrupt him; they both have busy lives and the child is far too intelligent to be left in peace among the leaves. 

 

(He’s forming calluses on his hands and most of his baby fat is absent.)

 

But he has an empty basket in his arms and looks so lost, Kameko’s guidance instincts kick in. At first, she thinks hers aren’t the only ones when she considers the women swarming him. 

 

One of them will help him, she muses while turning away. 

 

Then he looks up and his coal irises meet her stare. She blinks as his blank eyes suddenly widen slightly and his chakra pulses in the smallest of SOS’s.

 

She’s the only one close enough to notice. 

 

Eyes sharpening, Kameko re-examines the civilians surrounding him. How did I miss it? She berates herself. 

 

She’s not sure who the little prince is, she’d assumed he was Uchiha, but that’s not enough to garner this type of reaction. These women are trying to earn favor and marry off their daughters.

 

Or themselves, she thinks with a curled lip. He’s mature but he’s nowhere near puberty, let alone marriage. These women are dressed to impress and straying far too close to touching places where hands do not belong.

 

Konoha is trying her patience for reeling in her KI.

 

Striding forward, Kameko only has to shove two women before the others scramble out of her way, jewelry jingling. 

 

She crouches down in front of him, “Don’t leave my side,” she tells him. 

 

He nods once and follows her out of the vulture’s nest. One woman steps forward, attempting to bribe him back, “Would you like another sweet, Uchiha-sama?”

 

Kameko cuts her with a sharp glare right as the others attempt to restart, even with her right next to him.

 

It’s the fucking gate chunin all over again, she snarls.

 

“Don’t bother us again,” Kameko enunciates slowly. “We will buy what we want, and we will come to you- not the other way around.”

 

She turns to face them, “Uchiha-sama” behind her. 

 

“Are we clear?” 

 

Her voice has an obvious threat level associated. Hell, this is almost as awful as Minato sending Genma on a seduction mission. She’s never met so many civilians publically, shamelessly attempting to court or sexualize or bribe a child younger than five!

 

She’s seething. 

 

The women nod frantically. 

 

“I hope you don’t teach your daughters to behave in such a fashion,” she spits before spinning on her heel. 

 

---

 

Itachi doesn’t really know the woman with blue hair. 

 

He found comfort in her steady presence by the redwoods after dusk, but the comfort came more from having a routine with someone he didn’t know. 

 

(Someone who didn’t know him.)

 

Someone who didn’t treat him any particular way.

 

She was a nice puzzle; kunoichi or civilian? Immigrant or old genetics? Mother or babysitter? He never thought of her outside of his walks, but she was fascinating enough to keep his interest during them. 

 

When she stopped coming after the Kyuubi Attack, he had assumed she had died. 

 

Sad, but ultimately just another part of the tragedy.

 

He didn’t actually know her, nor did he have any intention to. He was busy being trained by his Clan, preparing for the Academy, being the perfect son. 

 

A son trustworthy enough to be sent on a small errand for his mother. 

 

Itachi was not yet concerned with politics and his Clan Heir training wouldn’t begin until he was a genin. 

 

Or ten, but everyone knew what would happen first. 

 

Which is more than likely the reason he’s gotten himself into this mess to begin with. Politics isn’t necessarily one of his interests and the Uchiha had been getting progressively tenser and Itachi…

 

He’d run away. He hadn’t wanted to deal with Clan-vs-Village vs Hokage vs other clan vs clan members. So he trained within the compound, was named a prodigy, and left only for his walks. 

 

(Walks where he saw a woman who didn’t look like an Uchiha and smiled gently when she greeted him.)

 

Which were only allowed because his father said they “fostered independence.” 

 

And so, with his independence, Mother sent him to get ingredients for dinner. The map she gave him allowed him to find the market easily, and he thought that everything would go well. He’d be back in time to finish reading a book Akihiro-sensei had assigned.

 

It wasn’t meant to be.

 

He didn’t know one spice from another and when he asked the stall owner she was a bit too enthusiastic. 

 

He hadn’t expected the hand on his waist and while she was chattering about something that was decidedly not spices, another woman came up.

 

And then another.

 

Some felt the definition in his arms, others cooed, put things in his hands and then wrapped his fingers around it. Complimented him, touched his clothes. 

 

None of them asked if he needed help. And he couldn’t be rude and shove them off.

 

(With as many as there were, he wasn’t even sure he’d win a fight.)

 

So he was stuck with an empty basket clutched in his arms. He was mentally forming his apology to his mother for being unable to get the ingredients when he felt fingers brushing his face. 

 

He jolted back. 

 

“His features are so nice!” the woman with plum colored hair exclaimed. “Traditional with such long lashes.”

 

Another nods, “Those will be soulful eyes when he gets older.”

 

When he sees they aren’t reaching to touch him again, he returns to his apology. 

 

Itachi had been standing with his empty basket for almost half an hour when he spotted her among his eighth scan of his surroundings.

 

So when he saw the blue haired woman, his safe haven in the world outside the compound, he automatically flared the standard SOS with his chakra that he’d been practicing. He hadn’t meant to, and it was so feint- he was still learning- he assumed nothing would come of it. 

 

Then her eyes changed to the eyes he saw on the battlefield where he unlocked his Sharingan and he thought: she’s a kunoichi .

 

He felt giddy for a moment, having solved one of his mysteries. One that truly only raised more questions- none of which he should be contemplating when a kunoichi is heading in his direction with that look in her eyes.

 

The civilians keep chattering, completely oblivious, and Itachi almost envies them as the kunoichi strides closer. 

 

He’s no match for her.

 

The hairs on the back of his neck raise and he’s no longer thinking about how he’s in the middle of Konoha, where he’s supposed to be safe. 

 

The predator arrives.

 

Within a moment, she’s bypassed the civilians and she crouches in front of him. 

 

“Don’t leave my side,” she orders and Itachi is willing to do just about anything she tells him. Every instinct screams “danger!” and she isn’t even exuding KI. His hands clench the basket a bit closer.

 

She leaves the same way she entered, and Itachi is a bit in awe at the way she commands the crowd. 

 

He moves to follow her, obidently, and then a woman offers him sweets.

 

He pales. One, he has no idea what she’s talking about- another? Two, how does she have the courage to stand in front of the kunoichi’s way? She literally just told everyone in hearing distance that he was going with her.

 

And they were definitely within hearing distance. 

 

You don’t get in the way of an angry shinobi, anyone knows that. Especially if you're untrained. He looks at the civilian, confused, before the realization dawns on him. His stomach sinks.

 

This woman doesn’t know she’s in danger.

 

She’s hanging onto a cliff and doing her best to pry her fingers from the surface herself. Itachi takes a step back. 

 

He’s a clan kid and he’s been on a battlefield. He doesn’t know what this woman wants, doesn’t find her interesting enough to care, and she’s so ignorant to her surroundings Itachi pities her. 

 

The kunoichi glares, and he watches with morbid interest as it begins to sink in. She doesn’t wear the hitai ai, which is rare as most wear theirs even when they aren’t on duty, but she’s undeniably skilled. Experienced.

 

The civilians reel back- they’ve never faced someone who was trying to kill them. She still isn’t releasing KI but it’s something in the confidence of her posture that says I can kill you. I will kill you. It will be painful. 

 

He shivers as she turns her back to him. 

 

The kunoichi is speaking again and he straightens, trying to pay attention but the blood is roaring too loud in his ears. He watches, as if separate from the scene entirely, as the civilians freeze.

 

They don’t move and talk and smile like they did a minute ago. They’re still, statues.

 

Too still- like victims of a genjutsu or puppets with no strings.

 

Like people who are learning terror. This moment will never leave them, he thinks. Then he remembers her smile highlighted by the moon and thinks, not unless she wants it to. 

 

Itachi licks his dry lips as she spins around, nodding heads at her back. They haven’t found their mouths, not yet.

 

Itachi follows the blue haired woman, basket in his arms. 

 

She is a predator, he thinks, but she’s also an unimaginably fierce protector.

 

(This is when he notices a sleeping bundle on her back.)

 

(Uchiha Itachi believes he is four years old the first time he is saved by Kameko.)

 

(In reality, she starts changing his fate when he is two years old and she is a blue haired woman he knows nothing about.)

Notes:

I actually love Minato and minakush, not that you can tell from this fic...

Itachi disassociating is actually a big part of a lot of my head canons and while it wasn't super obv here, there's definitely elements of it. Also, most of this will be Kameko's pov but he just forced himself in and I liked how it went so (:

It's (finally) summer, so I'll definitely focus more time on this story,

Until next time!

Series this work belongs to: